Beginning Latin 00 Bars

.
^^>yy/
O O 5 1 O V\
V 2V.
W^
.^^vr^w^
Ja n
\^\\
3^54
G1LJ)ERSLEEV R- LODGE LA TIN SERIES
BEGIIsrNi:NG
LATIK
BY
JOHlSr
EDMUND BAESS
LATIN MASTER IN THE HOTCHKISS SCHOOL
*S\'^*J
L.1O3
ui^
College of Liberal Arts
Boston University
UNIVERSITY PUBLISHINCI COMPANY

NEW YOBK
BOSTON
NEW ORLEANS
/irrf7_
in
l^
>?
C5H1
>^'
^4
0^
Copyright,
1906,
by
UNIVERSITY PUBLISHING COMPANY

***
2924
PREFACE
This book
is
who
dedicated to teachers of Latin
the importance of first-year work.

secure three things:
first,
aim
Its
is
realize
definitely to
mastery of forms; second, the
nucleus of a working vocabulary; third, a grasp of the broad

principles of the Latin sentence.
The method
book has been guided by the modern

accompanied
by immediate use of the knowledge gained. Accordingly,
numerous short exercises arrest the attention of the pupil
of the
belief that the acquisition of facts should be
and demand
The
most
his.
activity at every point of advance.
detailed application of this principle of expression
The
fully exemplified in the treatment of forms.
of the various elements are explained,
and very many sim-
ple exercises in the building of paradigms introduced.
method
much
is
less
This
found to give a conscious mastery of inflections in

time than under the old system of memorizing
paradigms.
first
is
uses
In the case of the verb, the person-endings are
attacked, interlinear exercises being given in which
of the verb except the
ending is supplied.
all
Next, the present
tenses of the four conjugations are exhibited together, and

exercises are devised
vowel.
which focus the attention on the stem-
The treatment
of the other tenses
incidental result being that the pupil
acquiring a feeling that only the
first
and that the other conjugations are
is
is
similar,
an
prevented from
conjugation
relatively
is
more
normal,
difiicult
PREFACE
IV
and
important.
less
In order to render this method prac-
forms at the end have been for the

most part given by termination only.
In the translation exercises, English-Latin sentences have
been unhesitatingly and freely introduced from the first.
ticable, the tables of
Here, as elsewhere, experience has been the guide, but a
word
of explanation
may not
be amiss.
In the
first
place,
the assumption that English-Latin exercises are inherently
more
difficult
An
fallacy.
than Latin-English would seem to involve a

English-Latin exercise which
is
primarily an
exercise on the practical use of forms, and which does not
contain difficult and complicated syntax, presents to the

pupil the same problems as a Latin-English exercise
But
problem of terminations.
it
has, for the
young
distinct advantage over the Latin-English exercise
exercise to be written
secures
tiie
the
pupil, a
it
is
an
and written work for the study hour

and the surest results.
best concentration
Following the Lessons intended to be assigned for preparation are supplementary Exercises for Class
involve
the
same principles and vocabulary
sons which correspond
to
them
in
Drill.
as
number.
the
While
These
Lesit
is
not intended that their preparation should be required in

advance, those members of a class whose study time permits
may
well look them over, and test their preparation by

means of the questions which are in many cases appended.
Here the ratio of Latin to English exercises is much
increased, in order that in his translation
work the pupil
may
benefit by the teacher's instant correction of
and
his
bad English
suggestions regarding methods of attacking the
Latin.
Furthermore, every
The simple
fifth
Lesson
is
a Latin Reading Lesson.
narratives contained in the
first
twelve of these
PREFACE
V
and his
from
are taken, with the kind permission of their author
Messrs. Wiegandt
publishers,
&
Grieben, of
the ^^Lateinische FibeF'' of Professor Dr.

of the
Gymnasium
The
at Steglitz,
Berlin,
Ludwig
Gurlitt,
Germany.
vocabularies of the lessons proper are almost entirely
confined to about five hundred of the commonest words in
given in
Caesar,
and
also collected
both special and

in
lists
general vocabularies,
for purposes
of
The
review.
vocabularies of the Reading Lessons are less restricted in

their range,
and are given only
in the General Vocabulary;
and, while the interest of their content makes

to
them
easy
remember, provision for a vocabulary drill has been

confined to the five hundred words already
purposely
mentioned.
The Eeading Lessons
after Lesson
XL, together with
Les-
XCII-XCV, are designed as an introduction to Caesar.

By means of the Drill Exercises, and of the Reading Les-
sons
sons, all or part of
which might be omitted
in reviews, or
with classes whose ability admitted of rapid advance,

has been secured.
elasticity
It will also
be feasible, in
much
many
work in the Exercises

hoped that by this means the
substitute oral for written
cases, to
paradigm building. It is
method of the book will be rendered acceptable
in
differing
widely in the time allotted to
to schools
the elementary
stage.
Through the wise liberality of the publishers, an experimental edition of Beginning Latin has already been tried
in the Horace Mann and the Berkeley Schools, New York,
in Horton Academy, Nova Scotia, and in the Hotchkrss
School.
am
work.
deeply indebted to the candid criticism of
who were good enough to test my unfinished

More than formal acknowledgment is also due to
the teachers
PREFACE
VI
Messrs.
I.
0. A.
Beverstock, of the
Crombie, of Bridgewater, N.
Hotchkiss
School, and
who have read the proofmade material contribution
S.,
sheets of the present edition and
form and statement. Most of all. Professor

Lodge has my sincere thanks for enconragement, criticism,
and wise counsel throughout the progress of the work.
to its accuracy of
Jo
Lakeville, Conn., April
9,
1906,
Edmund
Barss.
CONTENTS
LESSON
I.
Pronunciation
II.
Subject and Object
III.
Interrogative Sentences.
IV.
The Genitive
V.
Reading Lesson
VI.
The Dative
VII.
The Ablative
VIII.
The
IX.
The Vocative.
....
Adjectives
Minerva
Ablative, Continued
The Present Tense
X.
Reading Lesson: Diana
XI.
The Present
of
Four Conjugations
XII.
The Present
of
Sum.
XIII.
The
First
Predicate Agreement
and Second Declensions
The Imperfect Tense
XIV.
Attributive Agreement.
XV.
Reading Lesson: Pugna Romdndrum
XVI.
The Future Tense
XVII.
XVIII.
The Future of Sum. Verb Review

The Third Declension: Consonant Stems
XIX.
The Perfect Tense
XX.
Reading Lesson: Agricola
XXI.
The Pluperfect Tense
XXII.
XXIII.
The Third Declension: Liquid and Nasal Stems

The Future Perfect Tense. Verb Review
XXIV.
Prepositions
XXV.
XXVI.
Reading Lesson
et
et
Oermanorum
in
jo, &,
Naufae
Ludus Graecorum
Prepositions, Continued
XXVII. The Passive Voice
Present of Four Conjugations
and
CONTENTS
Vlll
LESSON
PAGE
XXVIII.
The Passive Voice: Imperfect and Future Tenses
XXIX.
The Third Declension:
XXX.
Reading Lesson: Castra Romdna
Neuter Nouns;
Consonant
Stems
XXXI.
The Third Declension: i-Stems
XXXII.
The Passive Voice: Perfect Tense
XXXIII.
The Passive Voice: Pluperfect and Future Perfect

General Review of Verbs
XXXIV.
The Third Conjugation: Verbs

Declension: Mixed i-Stems
in
XXXV.
Reading Lesson: Germdnl Aittiqul
XXXVI.
The Third Declension: Neuters:

tives of the
XXXVII. Comparison
XXXVIII. Adjectives.
XXXIX.
Adjectives:
-id.
The Third
Stems.
Adjec
Third Declension
of Adjectives
Irregular Comparison
Irregular Comparison, Continued
XL.
Reading Lesson: Templum Delphicum
XLI.
Comparison by the Aid of Adverbs.

Degree of Difference
....
....
XLII.
Personal Pronouns
XLIII.
Demonstrative Pronouns
XLIV.
XLV.
Reading Lesson: Mores Germdnorum
Ablative of the
Possessive Pronouns
XL VI.
XL VII.
The Relative Pronoun
XLVIII.
Pronouns, Continued
Interrogative
and
....
Indefinite
Pronouns
XLIX.
Pronouns, Continued.
L.
Reading Lesson
LI.
Alius and Alter: Correlative Use
LIT.
The Fourth Declension
LIII.
The Fifth Declension
LIV.
LV.
Reading Lesson: luppiter
LVI.
Numerals, Continued
LVII.
Adverbs: Formation and Comparison
Irregular Adjectives
Athenae
Numerals
....
....
....
53
CONTENTS
IX
PAGE
LESSON
LVIII.
LIX.
The Locative Case
108
Irregular Nouns.
Tliird Declension:
i5ome
Rules
Gender
....
LX.
Reading Lesson: Aesculapius
LXL
Deponent Verbs.
LXII.
The Subjunctive Mood: Present Tense,
Possum
Hortatory
Subjunctive and Subjunctive of Purpose
LXIII.
The Subjunctive Mood.
LXIV.
Indirect Questions
Lnperfect Tense
LXV.
Reading Lesson: Gallia Antlqua
LXVI.
The
LXVII.
Irregular Verbs:
Mood
Subjunctive
Tenses
mentary
Nolo;
Void;
and
Perfect
The Comple
MdlO.
Infinitive
The Subjunctive
LXVIII.
Irregular Verbs
Fid.
LXIX.
Irregular Verbs
Fero.
LXX.
Reading Lesson
LXXI.
Irregular Verbs -.Ed
LXXII.
The Imperative Mood
LXXIII.
The
Infinitive
Mood
LXXIV.
LXXV.
LXXVI.
The
Infinitive
Mood, Continued
The
LXXVII.
The Gerund and Gerundive
LXXVIII.
Participles
Reading Lesson
Infinitive
Eelvetiorum Coniurdtio
Mors
Mood, Concluded
....
Participles,
Reading Lesson: Helvetiorum Profectio
LXXXI.
Participles,
LXXXII.
Periphrastic Conjugations
LXXX III.
The Subjunctive
Continued
Concluded
in
Commands and
in
Reading Lesson
LXXXVI.
Substantive Clauses
Helvetil
Ire Prohibeiitur
Rliodanum Flumen Trans
...
of
Wishes
Purpose
Various Expressions of
LXXXV.
after
....
Orgetorlgis
LXXX.
Supine.
of Result
Questions with Nura
LXXIX.
LXXXIV. The
Pluperfect
Purpose.
Verbs of Fearing
The Subjunctive
.
CONTENTS
LESSON
PAGE
LXXXVII. The
LXXXVIII. The
Dative with Special Verbs

Ablative
clauses.
Certain
with
Subordinate Clauses
XC.
Reading Lesson:
XCI.
Accusative.
Via per Sequanos

Dative.
Genitive.
.165
Cum-
....
....
Deponents.
Adverbs of Place
LXXXIX.
Ablative
167
169
173
174
XCII.
Translation Exercise
XCIII.
XCIV.
181
XCV.
Analysis and Translation
183
177
179
Exercises for Class Drill
185
Forms
237
Special Vocabularies
Lists of
Words
for
Review
261
278
Latin-English Vocabulary
287
English-Latin Vocabulary
305
Index
317
BEGINNÎNG
LESSON
LATIIS^
I.
PRONUNCIATION.
1.
The
The Latin Alphabet
Alpliabet.
the English, without^' or

2.
ters
Letters
Sounded
3.
as in English.
t,
d, k,
1,
m,
n,
r, f,
plenty of time
vowel
is
hurried a
let-
h, x, qu.
Long and Short Vowels. The vowels are
When
the same as
The following
have the same sounds as in English

p, b,
is
lo.
a, e,
i,
o, u, y.
taken to pronounce a vowel, the

said to be long.
When the pronunciation is
little,
is
the vowel
is
said to
be short.
Long
BEGINNING LATIN
vowels are marKed thus
a, e,
o,
i,
Short vowels
u, y.
The
unmarked.
marked thus a, e, i, o, u, y, or
latter is the method regularly followed in this book.
are
4.
are
left
Sounds of the Vowels.
The sounds
of the vowels
as- follows
a like the second a in aha'

a like the first a in aha'.
e like ey in they.
e like e in then.
i
like
in machine.
like
in jîw.
like
in holy.
6 like
in obey.
u like 00 in 2)ool.
u like u in jLXf//.
y and y have a sound which may be uttered
by shaping the lips as if to say oo, and
then making the sound ee.
Pronounce the following words according
5. Exercise.
to the rules in 2-4.

1.
Ama'bani pete'bant
;
uteba'mini
quo'rum.
6. Diplitlioiigs.
3.
li'ber
li'ber.
Tyran'nl
2.
Ora'tor
mi'litem
The diphthongs and
rex
quod;
In'fero.
their sounds are
as follows
ae like ai in aisle.
au like on in house.
ei like ei in eight.
eu like eu in feud.
oe like oi in
oil.
ui like oo'ee (or we).
'
More
in they.
exactly, like ey'oo
pronounced rapidly, the ey being sounded as
PRONUNCIATION
Other combinations of vowels, as ai, eo, etc., do not

form diphthongs, each vowel being pronounced separately,
(=
as in aulai
7.
au-la'-i)
Exercise,
1.
Hae
rroiiounce the following.
au'teni
dein'de.
2.
lieu
poe'na
hulc.
PronouiKie
8. Kemiiiniiig Soiiiids.
c as in cat.
as in get.
i-consonant' (usual sound between two voweis, or

at the beginning of a word when followed by a
vowel) like y in you.
s as in so (not as in has).
like
tv.
z like dz.
ch like
ph
like /.
bs like ps.
bt like pt.
Doubled consonants should both be sounded, contrary

custom of English. Thus, bellum is pronounced
to the
distinctly, ber-lum (not bel'm).
Pronounce the following.
9. Exercise.
1.
Cethe'gi
cho'rus
iam
urbs.
a'mfis
hic
Philo'sophus
3.
sic.
2.
Ga'za
obti'neo
Za'ma
Cae'sarem
Ci'cero.
10. Syllables.
A Latin word has
has vowels and diphthongs.
it
syllables
as
many
syllables as
Thus, praesidium has four
prae-si'-di-um.
In dividing a word into syllables, a consonant between

two vowels belongs to the second as re-xe-ra'-mus.
The last syllable of a word is called the ultima.
The syllable before the last is called the penult.
;
'
In some boolcs
is
written for i-consonant.
of convenience, as Latin
bad no
letter
j.
This
is
merely a mattor
BEGINNING LATIN
The
syllable
before the penult
called
is
the ante-
penult.
11. Accent,
the penult, as
word
penult
if
of
A word
il'-lud
is
a-ma'-ve-ram
two
is
is, its
syllables
is
accented on
short, the accent falls
accented on the
is
long, as a-mf7'-bam
po-te-rfl'-mus.
If
on the antepenult, as
po-tu^-e-rant.
The quantity of a syllable,

known by means of sim-
12. Rules of Quantity.

that
syllables
e'-rat.
more than two
the penult
the penult
of
length,
may
often be
Thus,
long
when it contains a diphthong, as Oree'sar.
or when it contains a long vowel, as
ple rules called Eules of Quantity.

{a)
A syllable is
re-gl'na.;
an-
f *'-quus
or Avhen
its voAvel,
even
if
short,
consonants, or a double consonant

Ca-fifrius.
(h)
A s^dlable is
when
it
short
followed by two
as ex-o-Yi-un'-tur
contains a short vowel
consonant; as rW-e-rant
is
(x, z)
'
'
followed by a single
c5nV*^ci;
vowel is folloAved by h, or by another

vowel with which it does not form a diphthong (see
or
4)
when
its
as con'-frd-hmit
suV-e-o.
13. Exercise. Copy the following passage, marking the

accent of each word according to the principles given in
Pronounce according to the rules in 1-12.
11 and 12.
Quo usque tandem
abutere, Catillna, patientia nostra
etiam furor iste tuns nos eludet ? Quem ad

Quam
finem sese eff renata iactabit audficia ? Nihilne nocturnum
praesidium Palati, nihil urbis vigiliae, nihil timor populi,
dill
^
Aberant is a compound (ab-erant) and does
10 in its division.
Jiot
follow the rule of
and
subjp:ct
ojjject
nihil concursus bonOruni omniuiri, nihil hic munltissimus

habendi senatus locus, nihil horuni oni vultusque moverunt ?
Note.
Beginning on page 185
found additional exercises and

These are
will be
questions on each Lesson (except the Reading Lessons).
intended to furnish material for class-room

1
drill.
It is
not necessary
hat they should be prepared in advance, although pupils
the time
preparation.
them a means
find
will
On
the other hand,
drill exercises are
it
of
testing
and
who have
improving
their
should not be forgotten that these
an essential part of the method of
that they cannot be omitted without impairing
LESSON
this book,
and
its efficiency.
II.
SUBJECT AND OBJECT.

14. Subject and Object in English and in Latin.
In 'English, Mari us /ears Sulla has a very different meaning from Sulla fears Marius.
In Latin, however,
Mari8 timet SulU^w* and SvUlam timet Mari?8 both mean
the same thing Marius fears Sulla.
But if Ave change
-.
Mari^/s to Marian;*,
and
Sullaii* to Svilla,
be Sulla fears Marius, no matter

words. Thus,
1.
SulLf timet MsiriifiH
2.
Msiviiim timet Sulh*;
3.
Sulhf.
4.
5.
Mari/u>^ Sulhf timet

Timet Sulhf Mari/fm
6.
Timet Mari/oi* SulLf
From
subject
tlie
it
the
Mari/n>/ timet
above
may
the meaning will
how we combine
Sulla fears Marius.
appears that while in English the
often be recognized by
its
])osition before
by its position after the verb, in

Latin these things do not depend upon position, but on
the verb, and
tlie
object
the endhuj of the word.
BEGINNING LATIN
15.
Case.
When
a word
is
said to be in the Nominative Case
In English, the latter
in the Accusative Case.
ally called the Objective Case.
Latin, the use of
which
used as subject, it is
when used as object,
is
gener-
There are other cases
in
will be explained later.
16. Case Endings. Besides showing the case of a

noun, as already explained, the endings also show Avhether
it is singular or plural; as amic/fs, friendj 2imlcT, friends.
There are five sets of these noun endEvery Latin noun belongs to
declensions,
except a few which are
these
of
one
some
"
and
do
not
change their endings.
indeclinable,"
called
17. Declensions.
ings, called Declensions.
Nouns which
are names of males are

Gender; nouns which are
names of females, of the Feminine Gender.
(h) Many nouns which are names of neither males nor
females are called Masculine or Feminine in Latin,
according to rules of gender which will be given later.
These nouns are said to possess Grammatical Gender,
while those in {a) are said to possess Natural Gender.
(c) Nouns which are neither masculine nor feminine are
said to be of the Neuter Gender.
18. Gender,
{a)
said to be of the Masculine
19. Ending-s for Subject

Nominative.
and Object.
Declension
I.
SUBJECT AND OBJECT
21. Base. The part of the noun to which the endings

Thus,
are added is called the Base.
Base:
port-,
Base: amlc-, friend.
gate.
PLUR.
SIJJQ.
SING.
PLUR.
Nom.
port-a
port-ae
Nom.
amic-us
amic-i
Ace.
port-am
port-as
Ace.
amic-um
amic-os
22. Exercise. Write out the base, the meaning, and the
nominative and accusative singular and plural of each noun
in Vocabulary I (in the Special Vocabularies at the back of
the book), according to the examples given in 21.
23. Exercise.
Learn Vocabulary
following sentences in Latin.
I.
The verbs
Then
write the
are not in
the
Vocabulary, but are given in parentheses in the Exercise,
without endings. When the subject of the verb is singular,
-t to the form given ; add -nt when the subject is plural.
In Latin the verb generally stands at the end of the sentence.
add
1.
The*
(habe-) a'
lieutenant has
friend.
2.
The
friend sees (vide-) the walls.
Towns have
gates.
The town has noV a
gate.
5. The town has not
a AvaH. 6. The lieutenants
have friends. 7. The
3.
4.
friends
see
the
towns.
The girl sees the gates.

9. The girls see the gates.
10. The girls see the lieu8.
tenant.
Ancient Italian City Gate
BEGINNING LATIN
24. Rules of Syntax/ The substance of the following Rules has been given in 14-23. They should be
word for word, and reviewed until perfectly

The same method will be followed Avith
learned,
memorized.
other principles of syntax as they shall occur.
Rule
The
I.
subject of a finite
verb is in the nominative
case.
Rule
The
II.
direct object o^
a transitive verb
is
in the
accusative case.
L.ESSON
III.
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
ADJECTIVES.
Questions with -ne.

Declarative sentences in
be made interrogative by adding the syllable
to the most emphatic Avord.
Thus,
25.
Latin
-ne
may
Does Sulla fear Marius
Timebie Sulla Marium
word so attached is called an Enclitic. Observe that

the " does " of the English is not translated.
26. Questions with Nbnue, When the question conmust be attached to that Avord. Thus,
Does not Sulla fear Marius f Nontie Sulla Marium timet ?
tains a non, the -ne
The
AVord to which the -ne
is
attached generally stands
first.
27. Exercise.
25 and
1.
see
4.
Have
the lieutenants friends
2.
Do
the friends
the gate ?
3.
Does not the girl see the gate ?
Has not the town a Avail ? 5. Has not the lieutenant
a friend
'
Write, using the principles explained in
26.
Syntax
sentences.
is
'
that part of grammar which treats of the construction of

All parts of the verb except the infinitive are called Finite.
ADJECTIVES
INTERROGATIVE SENTENCES.
28. Adjectives. Adjectives in Latin have endings which

and case. The gender,
indicate their gender, number,
number, and case of an adjective must be the same as

that of the
Nom.
Nom.
noun which
it
Thus,
modifies.
msLgnnni oppid/ziiy,, a large tovm;

mvlXae portac, mmiy gates.
or Ace. Neut. Sing.

Plur.
29. Adjectives of the First and Second Declension.

Adjectives
There are two classes of adjectives in Latin
of the First and Second Declension, and Adjectives of
the Third Declension. Adjectives of the first and second
declension have endings as follows.
{a) The masculine endings are the same as those of
masculine nouns of the second declension.
:
(h) The feminine endings are the sam,e as those of

nouns of the first declension.
(6') The neuter endings are the same as those of neuter
nouns of the second declension.
Eeview these endings as given in 19 and 20.
30. Exercise.
Make
a table like the following, putting
in the blank spaces the proper
forms of the adjective magnus,
large, great.
Masc.
SINGULAR.
Fern.
PLURAL.
Fein.
Masc.
Neut.
Neut.
Nom.
Ace.
31. Exercise. Copy the Latin of the following Exercise,

(a) adding to each noun its proper termination according
as it is subject or object, singular or plural;
{h)
adding to each adjective
its
proper termination, ac-
cording to the rules given in 29;

(c) adding to each verb the termination
singular, -nt
if
its
subject
last in their sentences.
is
plural;
-t
if its
and putting
subject
all
is
verbs
BEGINNING LATIN
10
The numbers under the nouns indicate the declension;

gender is indicated by the letters m, f, n, whenever it would
not be clear from the rules given in 18-20 whether the
word
is
masculine, feminine, or neuter.
Has
1.
the large toAvn
many
gates ?
magii- oppid- mult-
habe-
3n
have deep
ditches.
habe-
foss-
alt-
2.
port-
Many towns
mult-
oppid2 n
[He]
3.
is-besieging
'
''
the
small
parv-
opptigna-
town.
4.
The lieutenants
oppid2 n
2 ra
see the high
and long
vide-
et
alt-
long-
[They]
mfir-
First learn the Vocabulary.
Habetne Romanus gladium longum?
1.
5.
walls,
2
32. Exercise.
besiege few towns.

oppiigna- pauc- oppid2 n
legat-
oppida multas portas habent.
3.
2.
Magna
Puellae parvae fossam
4. Nonne oppida altas et latas portas

Parvum oppidum portas paucas [et] parvas
altam vident.
habent
5.
habet.
33. EuLE III.
number with
the
An
adjective agrees in case, gender,
word which
it
and
modifies.
LESSON
IV.
THE GENITIVE.
34. Subject Omitted. When the subject of a verb is
a Personal Pronoun {he, she, it, they), the subject is generally omitted in Latin, unless for the sake of emphasis.
By reference to the foot-notes to 31 it will be seen that
'
'
'
Not expressed. Give verb termination for singular subject.

The same as besieges in Latin.
Not expressed. Give verb termination for plural subject.
THE GENITIVE
the termination
hey she^
it,
equivalent to the singukir pronoun
is
-t
and -at
Tlius, habe^
to the plural they.
he has, she has, or
has,
it
means they
have.
36. Review ExercivSe. All the words of

have been given in Vocabularies II and III.
1.
3.
He
She
has
sees
many friends.
many Romans.
2.
this exercise
They have broad swords.

4.
Few towns have many
They have few gates and small

36. Genitive. This is the name given
gates.
means
according to the rest of the
Similarly, habew*
sentence.
11
ditches.
5.
to that case in
Latin which corres])()nds to the possessive case in English,

and also to the objective with of. The endings are as
follows
Declension
SINGULAR.
Declension
I.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
II.'
PLURAL,
-drum
-ae
-arum
-i
37. Exercise. Write the nominative, genitive, and accusative, singular and plural, of filia, daughter; numerus, number; telum, missile.
38. Exercise. Copy and complete the Latin words in

the following phrases.
Words which have already occurred
are not given, and must be supplied.
1.
A small
number
of missiles.
2.
great supply of
copi-
tSl-
2n
grain.
fmment-
3.
3n
provinces.
Lack
of
money.
inopi-
pecuni"
5.
The daughters
4.
Of a number
of
many
of large
friends.
provinci1
39. Exercise.
Write in Latin, after memorizing Vocab-
ulary IV.
'
Masculine and neuter nouns of Declension II end alike in the genitive.
BEGINNING LATIN
12
1.
Is
he not besieging' the walls of the town
see the lieutenant's supply of grain.
a great number
of missiles.
5.
2.
They
Have
the towns
of gates ? 4. They see the Romans' lack
The Roman province has a large supply
3.
of money.
A noun used to limit or modify another

in the genitive case when the two nouns do not
40. Rule IY.
noun
is
denote the
same
thing.
LESSON
V.
THE DATIVE
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
13
Statuae et arae teiTrun Ornant.
ornat.
Puella
(leas
laudat.
Puella
rosas
pia
aram marmoream
Puelhi
portat.
Flainma splendida deani doiectat.

(yorOnae
ornant.
albam
Minerva
aram
marmoreae
est dea inagna.
Hasta longa et galea aurea deam magnani ornant.
ornat.
'
Terra statuas
albris et
ITnda est valida
Herbae
olivae
et
marnioreas aras portat.

ITndae pfirae Oram altam pulsant.
terrain
ornant.
Statuae marmoreae sunt pretiosae.
Attica non
splendidae.
magna
LESSON
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
How
41.
Ollva est iucunda

Galeae aureae sunt
terra est, sed clara.
VI.
THE DATIVE.
to Use tlie Principal Parts.
The
principal
parts of a verb (see foot-note to Vocabulary III) are used
by cutting
as a guide to the writing of the verb; for

off
the
we can
ending.
-re
of
the second of these parts (the infinitive)
what vowel |)recedes the -t or -nt of the

Thus, piignare lêcomes pugna-, giving pugna t and
learn
pugnant; habere becomes habe-, giving habe t and haben t.

This vowel is called the Stem-vowel, and is changed
when
the infinitive ends in
-ere
or
-ire.
Thus,
gerere gives ger/t and gerunt (not geret
and gerent);
audire gives aud/?mt (not audint).
Use these
rules in writing the following exercise
42. Exercise.
Some
of the
new.
See the Vocabulary.
been given.
verbs of
tliis
Exercise are
The other words have already
BEGINNING LATIN
14
1.
Do
the girl's friends hear the lieutenant
friends of the
Eomans
are sending
money,
'
Does not
3.
the lieutenant's daughter send supplies of grain

is
fortifying
5.
They
'
The
2.
4.
He
the gates of the towns of the province.
are fortifying' the walls of the Eomans'
little
town.
43. Dative. This is the name given to that case in

Latin which corresponds to the following uses in English
:
(a)
the objective with
(h)
the indirect object
which
case before
to
;
may
Give me
to
or for.
that is, a
word in the objective

be put without changing the
the hooJc = Give the hook to tne.
meaning. Thus,
The endings of the dative are as follows
Declension
Declension
I.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL
-ae
-is
44. Exercise.
ter?
2.
enemies.
They
3.
1.
filius, son,
Does the ambassador's son owe
Do
4.
5.
to [his]
'
daugh-
do not give a supply of grain to [their]

nou da-
friends ?
and femina, woma7i.
Does he give money
l5gat-
-is
Write the dative, singular and plural,
inimlc2
m
money
PLURAL.
-0
with English meanings, of
45. Exercise.
SINGULAR.
11.^
The
111
fill-
they not give the
[his] friend
debe-
111
money
to
[their]
lieutenant gives a supply of weapons to

tel-
2n
the provinces.
foot-note 2 to 31.
See.
"
Masculine and neuter nouns of Declension II end alike in the dative.

Words in square brackets are not to be translated.
THE ABLATIVE
46. Exercise.
2.
Do
They owe money
to their enemies.
not give a reward to the Gaul
tliey
gives a
1.
15
weapon
to the
Roman.
4.
3.
The Gaul
The ambassadors do
he owe
5. Does
not give weapons to the provinces.
money
to
many
friends ?
Rule Y.
47.
The
indirect object is in the dative.
liESSON VII.
THE ABLATIVE.
48. Review Exercise
gates, walls,
Many towns do
ditches.
[and]
2.
1.
Does he owe
money
the
to
ambassador
3.
They give the

money to their
friend's little
daughter.
4.
The
ambassadors'
give
number
of
friends
small
weapons
to the
Gauls.
5.
OAves
The
friend
Gaul's
money
to
the lieutenant.
49. Ablative.
This
is
the
name
Ancient Citv
Wall
not have
BEGINNING LATIN
16
given to that case in Latin which corresponds to the

English objective with hy^ with^froni, or m.
The terminations
Declension
of the ablative are as follows

Declension
I.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
-a
-is
SINGULAR.
II.
PLURAL.
-6
-is
50. Exercise. AVrite the dative and ablative, singular

and plural, of copia, supply; annus, year; bellum, v:ar.
51. Exercise. Copy and complete
1.
In one year.
2
4.
From
2.
With four
ann-
tin-
the Latin.
swords.
3.
With
quattuor
pll-
indeclinable
lack of money.
5.
a javelin.
2
'The lieutenant frees the

llbera-
town from great danger.
6.
Do
they take the town in

expugna-
perlcul2 n
four years
7.
The troops
copi-
fight with javelins.
8.
The
pui^na-
1 pi
people take (singular) the town by war.

popul2 ra
fortifying the
9.
We
are
bell-
town with
walls.
10.
In a few years
they free the province.

52. Exercise.
Write the nominative, genitive, dative,
accusative, and al)lative, singidar and plural, of the Latin
words fov gate ; wall ; war.
LESSOJ^ VITI.
THE ABLATIVE, CONTINUED.
is
53. The Ablative Avitli Prepositions.

The ablative
sometimes used with prepositions, sometimes without.
THE ABLATIVE, CONTINUED
When
(a)
the ablative denotes the place
thing occurs,
Eomands
it
takes the preposition
hi oppido vident,
When
ij))
17
The?/ see the
Romans
WITHIN WHICH something occurs,
in the town.
time
the abhitive denotes the

it
where some-
Thus,
in.
when
or
used without a
is
1, 6, and 10 of 51.
the ablative denotes the means or instrument
preposition, as in sentences
When
(c)
with which someone performs any

a preposition, as in sentences
With, besides denoting the
{d)
When
paniment.
such
the ablative with cum
We come with
is
also denote accom-
the case, with
is
represented by
Thus,
Venimus
the lieutenant,
tute together with for the with.
cum may be used.
c/tmi legato.
Cum must never be
54. Caution about Cam,

express instrument or means.
sense,
means or instrument
may
the sentences just given),
(as in
used without
and 10 of 51.
act, it is
2, 3, 7, 8, 9,
used to
In case of doubt, substiIf this does not alter the
Thus, the last example might
be changed to
We
come together ivith
the lieutenant,
a change which could not be made in the sentences

referred to in
ic)
above.
55. Exercise. 1. Are the troops fighting in the town ?

In a few hours they fortify the camp. 3. Why does
4. Does the meshe send a messenger with a letter ?
senger fight with a sword ? 5. Do not the Komans take
2.
the Gauls'
town with swords
After memorizing the Vocabulary, transwords and sentences in every posThus, if we had hortd, it might be dative, mean-
56. Exercise.
late each of the following

sible
*
way.
Do
not use -ne
this sentence.
when
there
is
any other interrogative word, as why
in
BEGINNING LATIN
18
ing to or for a garden, or ablative, meaning by, with, or from

It would not mean in a garden, as that would be
a garden.
in horto ( 53, a),
1.
4.
Anno
anni.
2.
Quattuor annls.
Periculo populum libera t.
legatus pecuniam debet.

oppidi vident.
9.
Copiae.
8.
Perlculd.
3.
Inimicls.
6.
Inimicis
Copiae muros
Copiam pllorum non habent.
copiae pills pugnant
57. Rule YI.
7.
5.
10.
Cur
The place where
is
expressed hy the abla-
with the preposition in.

Rule YIl. The time when or within which
tive
hy the ablative without a preposition.

Rule YIII. Means or instrument
a preposition.
Accompaniment
is
is
expressed
expressed hy the
ablative without
Rule IX.
is
expressed by the ablative
with the preposition cmn.
liESSON IX.
THE VOCATIVE.
THE PRESENT TENSE.
58. Review Exercise. 1. In four years he frees the

people from Avant. 2. Do the Romans take the Gauls'
town with the swords ? 3. The troops are coming with
4. They free the ambassador's son from
the lieutenant.
many dangers. 5. Tlie Romans take many towns in a
few
years.
59. Vocative. This is the name given to that form of

a noun used in addressing some one, as
Come, friend ! Veni, amice !
In Latin, the vocative is like the nominative except in
the singular of those nouns of Declension II which end in
In such nouns, the vocative ends in -e, as amice above.
-us.
60. Endings of the Verb. These indicate the number and person of the subject.
THE VOCATIVE.
THE PRESENT TENSE
names the speaker (/ or
If the subject
19
we), the verb is
in the first person.
names the person or thing addressed
If the subject
thou), the verb is in the
names the person or thing spoken
If the subject
she,
they, or a noun), the verb
it,
The endings
{you,
second person.
of {he,
in the third person.
is
for the present tense (that
for those
is,
forms of the verb which represent an action as going on

at the MOMENT OF speaking) are as follows
Person-endings of the Present Tense.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
When
1.
-6
-mus
2.
-s
-tis
3.
-t
-nt
the subject would be a personal pronoun, as
you, he, we, they,
etc., it is
The endings
for the sake of emphasis.
of the verb indi-
cate of tliemselves the person of the subject.
ama^ means he^ she, or
/,
not expressed in Latin, unless
amaiwi/s,
it loves;
we
Thus,
love.
Copy, complete, and arrange in the Latin

Adjectives may either precede or follow their nouns.
they precede, they are usually more emphatic.
61. Exercise.
order.
When
1.
They
are-fortifying
the camp.
miiniu-
town.
3.
What
tenant
is-
camp.
6.
Friends,
muni-
npl
?
4.
The
lieu-
vide-
waging* a great war.

geri-
I am-fortifying
[my] friend
do-you-see,'
quid
2.
castr-
6.
We-are-leaving
bell-
2n
you have both swords and
habe-
'
the
relinqui-
et
javelins.
et
* English has three forms of the present

the simple present, as, thfi^j
save; the present emphatic, as, they do save; the present progressive,
as, they are saving.
Latin has but one form for all of these: servant.
:
BEGINNING LATIN
20
62. Exercise. Tell the number and person of each of

the following verbs, give the principal parts, and translate.
1.
Auditis
audmius; audiunt.
2.
Debeo; debetis;
Das; dat; do. 4. Expfignant; expugnas;

Habet; habeo; liabes.
6.
Liberatisne?
llberantne ? liberamusne ? 7. N"onne mittit ? nonne mitmunis munimus.
Munitis
8.
tunt ? nonne mitto ?
oppugnas oppugnant. 10. Privo privatis
9. Oppugno
pugnamus; pugnant. 12. Yidet;
privant.
11. Pugnas
debemus.
expugnat.
3.
5.
videmus
videtis.
63. Rule X.
and person.
verb agrees with its subject in
number
THE PRESENT OF FOUR CONJUGATIONS

pro])itia
est.
Cerva servata deae grata
deae ursis perlculosae sunt.

vulneratae perniciosa
Diana pharetra
est.
21
Sagittae
A(|ua lata et alta ursae
est.
et multis sagittis
armata
est.
Diana
luna et stellis vias terraruni illustrat. Bestiae cautae silva

densa tutae sunt. Sed dea ursam incautani sagitta fatiUrsa fuga fatlgata est. Ursa in fossa non tuta est.
gat.
Dea ursum in undis fossae latae necat.
LESSOX
XI.
THE PRESENT OF FOUR CONJUGATIONS.

64, Exercise.
the forms of a word,
table like the following, containing
is
called a Paradigm.
all
BEGINNING LATIN
22
the second,
m the third,
e,
in the f ourtn,
els are sometimes shortened or changed.
i.
These vow-
Thus,
PREDICATE AGREEMENT
THE PRESENT OF SUM.
23
Before doing this Exercise learn the

Give the number and person and
principal parts of each verb, and translate the whole.
67. Exercise.*
Vocabulary to the
lesson.
Bellumne parant ? 2. Legatummittis. 3. Yenitis. 4.

Kegnum tenet. 5. Bellum paramus. 6. Nonne timetis
1.
numerum inimicorum ?
7.
Castra
pias paucas mittimus.
9.
miiro et fossa munio
11.
Audis.
magna ponunt. 8. Co10. Nonne oppidum
Kegnum
occupas.
12.
Quid
video ?
L.ESSON XII.
THE PRESENT OF
SUM.
68. Review Exercise,
PREDICATE AGREEMENT.
Write paradigms
(see 64) of
the present tense of paro, teneo, pond, and venio.
69. Present Tense of Sum,

ular,
as
shown
The verb
sum, he,
paradigm below.
in the
The
is
irreg-
person-
endings, however, can be recognized, as in other verbs.
Notice that the first person singular has -m instead of the

5 of the present of regular verbs.
Paradigm.
SINGULAR.
1.
su
2.
m, / am
you (sing.) are
s,
3. es t, he, she, it, is
PLURAL.
mus,
are
1.
su
2.
es tis, yoit (plur.
3.
su nt, thet/ are
tve
are
^
At the discretion of the teacher, the vocabulary alone might be prepared in advance, and the translation done in class.
BEGINNING LATIN
24
Sum,
The verb sum, he, is seldom used

alone, but takes an adjective or noun to tell what or who
the person or thing named by the subject is. Thus,
.
70. Use of
Labienus
Legatus
est legTitus,
est
Lahienus
is
dTfessus, the lieutenant
lieutenant,
is
wearied.
This adjective or noun agrees Avith the subject
the noun
and the adjective in case, gender and number.

Such nouns and adjectives are called Predicate Nouns and
These must be carefully distinPredicate Adjectives/
guished from objects the difference being that while the
object names that which receives the action expressed by a
TRANSITIVE vcrb, and is in the accusative case, the predicate noun or adjective is used Avith the intransitive sum, it
MODIFIES or DEFINES the subjcct, and is in the same case
AS the subject.
From its use as a connective word, sum is called the
in case,
'
Copula, that
is,
the " coupler."
Copy and complete the Latin.
71. Exercise.
am
1.
Roman you
;
are not a slave
Tullia'
is
serv-
2ra
girl.
2,
AYe are messengers; you are ambassadors; the

luinti-
women
femin-
We are few
3.
the town
is
small
poet-
[our] friends are
the
111
are not poets.

in
many.
town are many
4.
The sword
is
not long.
5.
In
slaves.
Called "Attribute Complements" by certain English grammars.

proper nouns are the same in Latin as in English, and are deThese will
clined like common nouns having the same terminations.
^
Many
not be given in the vocabularies.
FIKST
The troops
good slave
]:>oet.
we
poets
wide.
is
are good poets.
The camp
6.
By
7.
are tired by the long Imttle.
the woman's messenger.
You
4.
25
72. Exercise.
1.
AND SECOND DECLENSIONS
is
man}^ battles
5.
3.
Ain
(Latin
we
You
2.
are a good
not a poet
" are ")
shall
The
Are
long and
take the town.
The women are good. 9. They see the good women.

10. The good Avoman sees the good^ poet.
73. Rule XL A predicate noun agrees in case with the
8.
word which
it
modifies.
L.ESSON XIII.
FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS.
74. Declension of
cline " a
Nouns and
noun or adjective
is
Atljectives.
To
" de-
to give all its forms in order,
according to 64.
In declining adjectives, the forms
should be arranged in six columns, first the masculine,
feminine, and neuter singular, then the same in the plural.
is,
75. Exercise. Write out the complete declension (that

a paradigm) of the adjective magnus, great, according to
the method described in 74.
76.
Nouns
in -er.
Some masculine nouns of DeclenThe endings
sion II have -er in the nominative singular.

for the other cases are
base.
The
added to the nominative form as
generally dropped before
e is
as in ager beloAV
but sometimes
it is
r in
these cases,
retained, as in puer.
In the Vocabularies, the form of the genitive singular

and the nominative feminine and neuter of
of nouns,
adjectives, Avill
'
show when the
Bonus, not bona.
Why?
e is to
See 29,
be dropped.
(a)
and
33.
!;
BEGINNING LATIN
26
Paradigms.
ager, field,
SINGULAR.
ager
agr i
agr 5
agr um
agr 6
N. V.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Abl.
Vir,
man,
m.
puer, hoy,
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
like puer,
is
PLURAL.
puer i
puer drum
puer is
puer 6s
puer is
puer
puer i
puer 6
puer um
puer 5
agr i
agr drum
agr is
agr os
agr is
m.
declined by adding case-endings
to the nominative form.
77. Exercise.
Write complete paradigms of the adjec(see Vocabulary to this lesson);
meaning free; frequent

and of the noun vir.
tives
Some Peculiar Case-forms.
Dea, goddess, and filia,

have dative and ablative plural deabus and
Otherwise there would be confusion
f iliabus, respectively.
Avith the same cases of deus, god, and f ilius, soji.
JSTouns (but not adjectives) of Declension II, ending in
-ius and -ium in the nominative, commonly end in -i instead
78.
daughter,
of
-ii
in the genitive singular.
Proper names in
stead of
-ie.
traction, as
have the vocative ending in -i inis the same as though this conThus,
called, had not taken place.
-ius
The accent
it. is
(from consilium) consi'li (not con'sill), of a'plan ;

(from Vergilius) Vergili (not Yer'gili), Vergil ! or
The
vocative singular masculine of mens,
79. Exercise.
1.
Vergil,
Vergil
niij, is
mi.
you are a great
Gains, the ambassador.
swords, to our daughters
3.
poet.
We
2.
We
are the sons of
give to our sons long
much money.
-I.
We
are free
THE IMPERFECT TENSE
ATTRIBUTIVE AGREEMENT.
town
the
is
free; are not our friends free ?
5.
The
27
books,
friend Gains, are mine.
80. Exercise. Tell the case, gender, number, and meaning of each noun and adjective.
1.
librum.
LibrI; liberi;
3.
Consili
5.
Ml
mel
pueros
consilio
agris.
nostrae.
puer.
10.
consilia.
8.
6.
Yir
Creber
Dea; deae;
2.
Liberum,
4.
Deabus
virl
crebra
liber,
filiabus
viro.
7.
ere bra.
liber.
;
Gal.
Puerum
9.
Agro
deas.
LESSON XIV.
ATTRIBUTIVE AGREEMENT. THE IMPERFECT TENSE.
81. Keview Exercise.
goddesses,
fields.
3.
ing the
Romans?
Is the
fields.
2.
1.
What are you giving to the

many ditches in my
[There]' are
good man weary

5.
4.
free people has
Our boys
many
are leav-
books.
82. Attributive Agreement. Apposition. An adjecis not connected by any verb \vith the noun with
which it agrees is called an Attributive Adjective, as
tive which
consilium bonum, good advice.
noun may be used like an attributive adjective, to

noun meaning the same thing. Such a
noun is called an Appositive, and is said to be in Apposition Avith the word which it limits.
limit another
Appositives, like predicate nouns, always agree in case
with the nouns which they

Gains tribunus,
Gai tribuni,
^
is
The
limit.
Thus,
Gains the tribune.
Of Gaius
the tribune.
" expletive " there, in such expressions as there
not to be translated.
is,
there are, etc.,
BEGINNING LATIN
28
83.
Tense means time.
The Imperfect Tense.
It has already
been seen
( 60)
that the present tense of
a verb represents an action as going on at the time of

speaking.
The imperfect tense represents an action as going on
BEFORE the time of speaking.

.
Thus,
laudant, they are praising^ they praise,^ etc.
Present,
lauda ha
Imperfect,
nt,
they were praising,
or
they
p>raised.
The syllable -ba- is called the Tense Sign of the ImperThe person-endings are the same as for the present,
fect.
except that the

(See 60
and
first
69.)
person singular has -m instead of
Thus,
-6.
READING LESSON
29
Paradigm.
swGULAR.
PLURAL.
Then
[there] ^
[of]
Capua.'
2.
3.
The
4.
era in,
2.
era
s,
I was
you (sing.)
3. era
t,
he, she,
1.
era mus, toe tvere
2.
era
3.
era nt, they were
tis,
you
{p\.)
ôere
ivas
were
was great lack of grain in the town

was not the friend of CS^tullus the poet.
goddess Yesta
the
altars of
why were you
Friends,
it,
Learn the Vocabulary.
80. Exercise.
1.
1.
in the fields ?
and Lucius the
friends of Grdus
an
8.
Why
altar
10.
'
Rule XIL
word which
it
An
to
beautiful.
We were the
6.
Gains the
Were we
not
goddess Minerva?
9.
Then you were staying
Capua and writing
87.
beautiful
7.
were you holding the altar?
danger of war.
[of]
the
to
5.
tribunes.
tribune was preparing-for the battle.
giving
were
I feared the
in the
town
Cinna the lieutenant.
appositive agrees in case with the
limits.
LESSON XV.
READING LESSON:
PUGNA ROMANORUM ET GERMANORUM.
In canipo lato Romanl et Germfini pugnant.
RomanI
hastas longas habent.
Gladil Ronianoruni parvl, sed Ger-
manls
RomanI prlmum hastis,
})erniciosi sunt.
pugnant.
portant.
noi'um
turn gladils
Clipeos duros, galeas ferreas, loricas duras

Clipels, galeis, Idrlcis,
vTtan4;.
'
Clipel
multas plagas Germa-
Germanoruni non
ferrel,
See foot-note to 81.

Appositive, and therefore not genitive in Latin.
sed iTgnel
BEGINNING LATIN
30
Return of Victorious Germans from Battle

sunt.
Lorlcas et galeas ferrefis non portant.
patientia
Romanos
magna
pugnant
et
gladils
longis
Tamen
multos
necant.
Proelium Rdmanls adversmn, Germanis secundum erat.

Proell secundl memoria sempiterna est. Imperio Eoma-
norum proelium adversum perniciosum erat. Proelium

adversum Romani deplorant. Bello secundo Germania
tuta est. Couimoda belli secundl magna sunt. PerlMembrls Germanorum
culorum memoria iucunda est.
loricae
Pomanorum
non
aptae
Pomanorujn German!
raptant.
sunt.
Scuta et galeas
Scutis et galels aediiicia
ornant.
LESSON XVI.
THE FUTURE TENSE.
88. Review Exercise.
writing a letter
2.
1.
Why
was the beautiful
girl
Tlien messengers were coming with
THE FUTURE TENSE
31
Cinna and Gains the tribnnes. 3. There

kingdom of Alexander (declined
the Great.
4. Our messages were fre(iuent.
their friends,
were
many
like ager)
5.
slaves in the
The people did not

'
fear the skives, [their] enemies.
The Future Tense. This tense represents action

going on after the moment of speaking. In English,
89.
as
the future
the
first
is
formed by the aid of the
auxiliaries
shaU
(in
person) ^\i(\.wiU (in the second and third persons).
Thus,
We
shall praise, lauda bi
They
luill
mus.
send, mitt e nt.
There are two sets of terminations for the future tense.

of these is employed in the first and second conjugaThus,
tions, the other in the third and fourth.
One
CONJUGATION'.
BEGINNING LATIN
32
Write paradigms of the future tense of the
90. Exercise.
four verbs just given, with English translation of the forms

of laudo according to 89.
91.
2.
The
Exercise.
1.
Shall
we
lay-waste
the
fields?
3.
I shall
lieutenant will break (move) camp.
leave the town.
You
4.
the town, Gaius.'
5.
will not find the ambassadors in
I shall lay
waste the
fields
I shall
not break camp.

6. He will find his friends; he will
not be Avearied.
7. They Avill find and lay waste the
fields of the Gauls.
8. Gaius will leave the camp and
seize the gates of the
town.
great war, and besiege
money.
you not fear the danger, lieutenant
10. Shall
92. Exercise.
idoneo pdnet.
Friends, you will wage a

towns, and find much*^
9.
many
Mox legatus Romanus castra in loco

Tum agros Gallorum vastabit, oppidum
In oppido feminae et puerl manebunt,

perlculum timebunt. Galll in agris gladils pugnabunt.
Roman! defessi proelium relinquent et castra
movebuirt.
oppugnabit.
nam
LESSON
THE FUTURE OF
fields.
3.
They
VERB REVIEW.
SUM.
1.
tenant in the camp, friends.

the poet's
XVII.
You
2.
will
will not find the lieu-
The Gauls will lay waste

break camp and leave our
find^he letter?
troops remain in danger ?
fields.
4.
Shall
94. Future Tense of Sum.

appear from the following
^
The vocative
tence.
is
'
This
usually placed alter the
first
5.
is
Why
will
the
irregular, as will
word or two of the senmuch money,"
Latin says " big money" where we say "
VERB REVIEW
THE FUTURE OF SUM.
33
Paradigm.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
1.
er o,
2.
eri
s,
/ shall be
you (sing.) will
3.
eri
t,
he, etc., ivill be
mus,
1.
eri
2.
eri tis,
we shall be
you (plur.)
3.
eru nt,
they
95. Exercise.
be
tvill be
tvill be
Will the boys be our enemies
1.
2.
Then Ave shall be m^. 3. You will be lieutenant will

you not leave the town? 4. I shall find the gate; I
5. Boys, you will find the troops in the
shall be free.
town and then you will be free. 6. The woman will be
;
from want.
free
Eeview the verbs in the vocabularies
96. Exercise.
also GO, 65, G9, 83, 85, 89.

1.
We
They were
shall see.
besieging.
3.
2.
owed.
4.
You fight (sing.

You will have
(sing, and plur.).
7. He frees.
9. He
8. They are fortifying.
They save.
5.
and
plur.).
was
leaving.
10. Slaves,
will
be
11. Yergil,
6.
free.
are a great poet.
12.
He
place the altar in a large
Feminae
2.
Itaque
et
portis
lil)eri
viri
et
puerl
Al.TAR
field.
perlculo
belli
iTberabunt.
perterrentur.
oppida miirls magnis muniunt.
feminas puerosque servabunt.
erunt perlculo.
3
will
Learn the Yocabulary.
97. Exercise.
1.
you
you
5.
4.
3.
Murls
In oppido
Consilid bono pueros periculo
BEGINNING LATIN
34
LESSOIN^ XVIII.
THE THIRD DECLENSION: CONSONANT STEMS

INP, 5, CANDG.
98. Base and Stem. In studying declensions I and II,
we have used the term hase to indicate that part of a word
which is left when the case-endings are taken away. In
studying the
speak
third
of the
stem^
declension,
which
the same as the base.
and stem are

but
its
stem
stem
servo-;
in this
will be necessary to
declension
(In declensions I
and
the base of porta
often
is
II,
Thus, the base of servus
different.
is
it
is port-,
base
is serv-,
but
its
is porta-.)
99. Classes of Nouns.
methods
Nouns
of the third declension
forming the nominative singular.

This difference depends on the last letter of the stem. If
the last letter is a consonant, the noun is said to have a
consonant stem. If the last letter is i, the noun is said to
have an i-stem.
Consonant stems are further divided as follows
differ in their
of
p or b (labial mutes);
c or g (palatal mutes);
L t or d (lingual mutes).
f
{a)
{]))
{c)
Mute stems
ending \n\
Liquid stems, ending in 1 or

ending in m or
lâsal stems,
r.
n.
100. Declension of Nouns with Mute Stems. These

by adding the following endings directly to
the stem
are declined
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
N. V.
Gen.
-s
-is
-urn
Dat.
Ace.
Abl.
-i
-ibus
-es
-em
-es
-e
-ibus
THE THIRD DECLENSION
35
In the nominative sing-ular, the following changes occur

{a) c or g combines with s to form x.
Thus,
NOMINATIVE.
STEM.
(h) t
or d
voc-
VOX (for voc-s),
reg-
rex (for reg-s), king.
is
dropped before
word.
voice,
Thus,
s.
STEM.
NOMINATIVE.
aetat-
aetas (for aetfit-s), age.
ctistod-
ctistos (for cfistod-s),
A short
guard.
(c)
before the final consonant of the stem is
generally changed to e in the nominative singular. Thus,
i
STEM.
NOMINATIVE.
princ/p-
princt^ps, chief.
iiid^x,
obs/d-
obses, hostage.
101. Exercise,
stems:
By
paradigms from
Write
-
102. Exercise.
1.
juror.
iud/c-
1.
princip-, chief,
2.
leg", laiu,
3.
milit-, soldier,
the following
m.
f.
m,
Copy and complete.
a law of the commons.
2.
To the
chief of the
pleb-
Gauls.
3f
the leaders of the war.
To
3.
.4.
By the words
due-
voc-
3f
3ni
of kings.
5.
We
reg3
pet-
leaders.
word
seek peace.
Y.
is
The
laAV.
9.
king's
The
6.
We
were seeking the
pilc-
3f
law was good.

soldiers
8.
The
salut-
3f
state.
clvitat-
3f
10.
chief's
seek the safety of the
In peace the laws are in safety.
BEGINNING LATIN
36
103.
How
to
Know
To
the Stem.
a noun of the thh'd declension, cut

of the genitive singular.
Thus,
find the stem of
the case-ending
off
NOMINATIVE,
GEXITIYK.
STEM.
virtiis,
virtut-is,
virtut-
This rule
is
when
safe only
the genitive has more
Such a Avord
syllables than the nominative.
said to
is
" increase in the genitive."
104. Exercise. Give the nominative and genitive singuand the stem of each noun; tell where it is made, that is,
its case, number and gender (see Vocabulary); and translate.
lar,
1.
Pad.
cipibus.
2.
6.
Mllitum.
Dux.
7.
Plebem.
3.
Voces.
8.
4.
Leges.
Civitatis.
Prin-
5.
9.
Salute.
10. Bello principes saluteni plebis petunt.
LESSOIS^ XIX.
THE PERFECT TENSE.

105. Present Stem. The tenses thus far learned have
been formed by adding terminations to what is called
the Present Stem. This stem ends in a vowel ( 65).
as in
{a) In the first conjugation, the stem-vowel is -a-
all
lauda
{I)
lauda ba
s,
lauda bi
s.
In the second conjugation, the stem- vowel is

time
{c)
s,
s,
time ba
s,
time bi
In the third conjugation, the stem- vowel
often changed to
-i-
or
-u-;
mitti
or dropped
as in
s,
mittu nt
as in
mitt a
m.
-e-
as in
s.
is -e-,
but
is
THE rP^RFECT TENSE

In the fourtli conjugation the stem-vowel
(d)
veni
37
s,
long stem- vowel
(see 12,
/>),
veni e
is
bfi s,
veni e
is -i-
as in
s.
shortened before another vowel
and before the endings
-t
and
-nt.
This tense represents action

lOO. The
time or (h) as simply havpresent
(a) as COMPLETED AT the
Perfect Tense.
ing OCCURRED liEFoRE
tlic i)resent
time.
The
first is trans-
by the English perfect (" present perfect "), using

the auxiliary verb have, and is called the Pure Perfect
the second, by the English past or " preterite " tense, and
lated
is
called the Historical Perfect.
Thus,
Pure Perfect.
laudavit, he lias praised.
Historical Perfect.
laudavit, he praised.
One must judge by
the context which of these
is
meant.
107. The Perfect Stem. The perfect tense is formed

by adding a special set of person-endings to the perfect
This stem may be found by cutting off the i from
stem.
the third of the principal parts of the verb.
aHio, amare, amavi,
PRINCIPAL PARTS.
PERFECT STEM.
amatum.
ailiaV-.
first and fourth conjugations, the perfect

formed by adding v to the present stem, as above:
In the
(a)
stem
Thus,
is
ama-, amav-.
(h)
erally
In the second conjugation, the perfect stem
is
gen-
formed by dropping the stem-vowel and adding
u,
as mone-, monu-.
But
dele 6, destroy,
-pled, Jill (as
(6')
tveep,
the various compounds of
and a few others, form their

same manner as conjugations I and lY.
compleo, Jill uj)),
perfect in the
Thus,
fleo,
dele-, delev-.
In the third conjugation, the perfect stem
times formed
by adding
to the present
is
some-
stem after drop-
BEGINNING LATIN
38
ping the stem vowel, as
(rex-
rule
see
regs-;
the only safe
from carpe- rex- from regeThere is, however, no fixed

any conjugation is to learn the
carps-
100, a).
way
in
princijml parts of each verb as
108. Endings
of the
it
occurs.
These
Perfect.
added
are
directly to the perfect stem, according to the following

Paradigm.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
pugnav-imus
pugnav-i
1.
2.
pugnav-isti
pugnav-istis
3.
pugnav-it
pugnav-erunt or
-ere
109. Exercise. Write paradigms of the perfect of habeo,

Give English meanings of
scrlbo, munio, and sum.
habeo and sum, according to 107.
deleo,
no.
Exercise. Review all the verbs in the Vocabulato conjugate the perfects.
and learn
ries,
111. Exercise.
left
'
the place.
pitch camp.
hastened.
5.
Y.
ambassadors.
1.
3.
We
He
was then pitching camp.
You wrote many

9.
He
letters.
8.
11.
We
2.
They
not
4.
I did
6.
You have
We have been
They have been messengers.
did not seek our friends.

12.
have waged war.
sent a messenger.
10.
were seeking
They
friends.
has always been our friend.
112. Exercise. Give the present stem, the perfect stem,

the principal parts, and the translation of each of the following forms.
1.
5.
Flevisti.
Invenistis.
2.
6.
Manserunt.
3.
Movi.
4.
Yastavit.
Eeliquimus.
*
To determine whether the imperfect or i)erfect is to be used in
translating the English past tense, try to discover whether the continuance of the past action is thought of, or merely its occurrence.
READING lesson: AGRICOLA ET NAUTAE
39
LKSSON XX.
READING LESSON:
Italia terra
fecunda
est.
AGRICOLA ET NAUTAE.
Multi
incolae Italiae agri-
Terrain Italiae oppida clara, vici amoeni, agri

silvae magnae ornant.
Taurl agricolrirum Eomano-
colae sunt.
lati,
riim ao-ros
aratrd
firant.
Aratrum
ferreiim est, tauri
AGRICOLA ET NAUTAE
robusti iiigum ligneum portant.
Agricola strenuus tauros

cum capro et
Herbae tenerae capris iucundae sunt.
pigros baculo castigat. Puer parvus agricolae
capra in agro
saltat.
BEGINNING LATIN
40
Orae
Italiae undls pulsantur.
Nautae
periti
unais
Kenavigant. Yentl validl vela lata navigi pulsant.

strenm
ex
mos longos nautae robusti agitant. Nautae
Aurum et
Italia ferrum, frumentum, vinum exportant.
argentuni nautae Komanls in oppida Italiae important.
Etiam nauta peritus ventos asperos vitat. ]âin saxa orae
navigio llgneo periculosa sunt. Parvuni oppidum est in
Nautae validl in navigio de oppido discedunt.
ora.
Nautas et navigium agricola strenuus videt. Puer non
videt semper cum caprls saltat.
'
LESSOIV XXI.
THE PLUPERFECT TENSE.
The Romans have destroyed
2. The Romans
the town and the women are weeping.
3. Why have you
have filled our fields with soldiers.
not sought peace ?

5. The laws of the
4.
1.
We found many
Romans were
slaves in the camp.
good.
114. The Pluperfect. This tense represents action as

completed before some point of time in the past. Thus,
laudav era m, I had praised ;
fu era mus, lue had been.
It is
formed by adding the following terminations to
the perfect stem

1.
In,
PLURAL.
-era mus
2.
-era
-era tis
3.
-era t
-era nt
115. Exercise.
*
SINGULAR.
-era
Write paradigms of the pluperfect of
when followed by
the accusative,
means
into.
THE THIRD J)KChENSION

par5, moneo, scribd, audio,
of
sum according
to
1.
Yirtus nillituHi
servavit.
5.
do).
magna
4.
culum
fuerat.
2.
Obsides nostros in
3.
equitum
Auctoritatem
E(|uites
7.
timueramus.
10.
semper
timent.
9.
Pedes
12.
11.
audi-
paraverat.
The Gauls feared
117. Exercise.
peri-
servorum
Dux vocem obsidum Romanorum
Parat; parabat; parabit; paravit

Fueratis es erunt fuistis eras.
verat.
6.
(m camp)
castrTs
Equites proelium non timebant
8.
servitutis
defessi sunt.
Vocal)nhii'y.
Laudem parvam obsidibus

Magna virtute salutem civitatis
Milites defessi fuerant.
continueras.
41
and sum, with English meanings
non tenuerant.
dederat (from
AND NASAL STEMS
13.
Learn the
11(>. Exert'ist'.
servittite
LICilllD
slavery.
Accord-
ingly they had fortified their towns with walls and ram-
But the Romans came and destroyed the walls.

Then the Gauls sought peace. They gave their children
The Romans had already
as hostages to the Romans.
laid waste the fields, and the Avomen were weeping.
parts.
LESSON XXII.
THE THIRD DECLENSION: LIQUID AND NASAL STEMS.
camp
2. The
had seized the

the
fields.
breaking camp.
The cavalry (plur. of eques)

and were laying waste
has saved the town and is
1.
of the soldiers
leader
The ambassadors see the danger and

4. Through (by) the influence of the
3.
will seek peace.

knights the state had kept (held) the hostages in slavery.
5. The praise of the people is, and has been, and always
will be, pleasing (gratus,
-a, -urn)
to princes (princeps).
BEGINNING LATIN
42
119. liiquid Stems. These end in 1 and r. Nouns

whose stems end in these letters add no case-ending to
form the nominative; Thus,
STEM.
NOM.
GEN.
consul-
c5nsul
consul
is,
consul.
Caesar
Caesar
is,
Caesar.
Caesar-
120. Steins in
These form the nominative in
-tr.
-ter,
as
NOMINATIVE.
STEM.
-psiteT,
matr-
mater, mother.
121. Nominatives in
the above class, have
singular.
father.
patr-
-s
A few
-s,
in place of
Memorize the following

flos,
m5s,
ros,
122. Exercise.
nouns, apparently of
-r
in the nominative
list
flor is, m.., fioicer.
mor
r5r
is,
is,
m., custom.
m., deic.
Write complete
paradigms of
consul,
consul; imperator, commatider; mos bonus, good custom; and

noster frater, our brother.
123. Nasal Stems. These end in m or n.

There is only one noun whose stem ends in m. This is
Mem s, hiem is, f., iciider (sometimes spelled hiemps),in the
nominative singular.
Most nouns whose stems end in n drop the n to form
the nominative, adding no case-ending, as
NOMINATIVE.
STEM.
centurion-,
centurio, ceiiturioji.
Stems in -in change i to o in the nominative, besides

dropping the n, as multitudo, multitudin is, f., multitude.
Virgo, virgin
is, f.,
124. Exercise.
f., man.
m. or
maiden.
Write a paradigm from the stem homin-,
THE FUTURE PERFECT TENSE. VERB REVIEW

125. Exercise.
2.
Patres
{o}i)
1.
Caesar consul et imperator fuerat.
matres
fllios,
filias
laudant.
ninltitudo liominuni in oi)[)ido
non dedimus.
7.
rant.
10.
9.
Rorem
in
4.
est.
6.
Centurion! pecuniani
Obsides ex oppido vcnerant et pecuniam
servo imperatoris dabant.'
mittebant.
3.
Mores Galloruni non

means both hear and hear of). 5. Hieme
fioribus vide bant puellae.
audlvinms (audio
43
8.
Matres nostrae nuntios
Patres nostrl nuntiis pecuniam non dede-
Centuriones perlculum viderant et castra in
loco idoneo ponebant.
LESSON
XXIII.
THE FUTURE PERFECT TENSE.
VERB REVIEW.
1. Do we find flowers in the

are seeking the safety of their fathers

Avinter ?
They
2.
and mothers. 3. Did Caesar praise the customs of the

Gauls?
the consul's mother weeping?
4. Why is
5. The general frees a large number of men from slavery.
127. The Future Perfect.
This tense represents
action as completed after the time of speaking.
Thus,
hiudav
The
eri nt, thei/ will
have praised.
formed by adding the following terminations to the perfect stem

tense
is
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
mus
1.
-er
2.
-eri s
-eri tis
3.
-eri t
-eri
128. Exercise,
-eri
nt
Write a paradigm, with English mean-
Use shall have as the auxilhave in the second and third.
ings, of the future perfect of sum.
iary in the first person
tuill
^
Do has S, instead of a before the tense-sign in the imperfect and
future (dabam and dabo, not dabam and dabo).
BEGINNING LATIN
44
129. Exercise.
have
seen.
3.
remained.
1.
We
shall
have come.
lie will have
5.
130. Exercise.
have given.
I shall
4.
2.
You
They
will
have
will
moved.
(Review
60,
65,
69,
83, 85, 89, 94,
106-109, 114.)
We
1.
ing?
3.
are good soldiers.
They had
You have
2.
What were you
prepar-
kingdom.
seized [their] father's
5. The Roman cavThe Gauls will have

leave the place.
7. They had
fortifying the camp.
8. They
not seen the leaders, boys.
alry will find the wearied Gauls.
seen the danger and will

seen the danger and Avere
6.
have seen the Romans and are seeking peace. 9.

I shall have been I was
I shall be
I have been
;
been.
had
4.
10.
He
has
they have had
we had had we had

;
am
had
you have seen
we
been.
Roman Soldiers Building Rampart
LESSON XXIV.
PREPOSITIONS.
131. Prepositions.
frequently
make
Though
in Latin the case-endings
the use of prepositions, such as
In^
with,
from, hy, etc., unnecessary, yet they are not dispensed

with entirely.
45
PREPOSITIONS
132. Prepositions with the Ablative.

are found with only
and the
two
Prepositions
cases in Latin, the accusative
abhitive.
The following
pre])ositions
always take the ablative
a, ab, de,
cum, ex,
6,
sine, pro, prae.'
Before a vowel or h, ab and hot a, ex and not e, must

be used. Either form may be used before a consonant.
133. The Latin for From, From is expressed in

Latin sometimes by the aid of a preposition, sometimes by
the ablative alone. Thus,
De
but
loco
discessit.
Nos timbre
When
He
liberabis,
luitlidrew
from
the 'place;
you will free us from fear.
the verb denotes actual motion^
it
regularly takes
For the use with other verbs, consult the

Vocabulary. The Eule is given later ( 315).
The difference in the use of ab, de, and ex, all of which
mean from^ can be understood from the following
diagram, with the aid of the Vocabulary
a preposition.
^..o^
Cum, wlih^ besides expressing accom

134. Manner.
paniment (see 53, cZ), may also indicate the manner in
which an act is performed. Thus,
Magna cum, celeritdte veniam, I ioill come with great speed.

Cum may be omitted with the ablative of manner when
Also the prepositions absque, without, coram, in the presence of, and
up to; which are not used in this book on account of their infrequent occurrence in the Latin at first read.
'
tenus,
BEGINNING LATIN
46
there
just given,
magna
celeritate
135. Exercise.
Thus, in the sentence
in agreement.
an adjective
is
1.
would
good Latin.
also be
Ambassadors are coming from the

ex
town.
2,
You
the people without
will not fight for

pro
danger.
They have come about
3.
soldiers will
withdraw from the
peace.
walls.
5.
4.
Soon the
We have come
de
from the gates of Eonie.
6.
The general has come with
ab
number
a great
in-front-of
of soldiers.
the camp.
The cavalry had remained

The leaders are few in-
7.
8.
comparison-with the people.

in the
town
9.
without danger.
In winter Ave shall stay
10.
The hostages
come from the province with great

136. Exercise.
2.
Non
3.
Cum
dine
sine
1.
have
fear.
Prae numero Gallorum pauci sumus.
perlculo ante portas
oppidi manebimus.
salute legio in castrls mansit.
hominum de
will
loco
discesserunt.
4.
Cum
5.
multitu-
Multitudine
mllitum imperator oppidum oppugnabit.

137. Rule XIII.
Manlier
is
expressed by the ablative of
a noun
with the preposition cnnif or by the ablative of a
and an
adjective with or without
l.esso:n^
READING LESSON:
XXV.
LUDUS GRAECORUM.
In multls oppidls Graeciae et Italiae ludi erant.

columnis marmorels ornatus
noun
cum.
est.
Ludus
Statua Minervae ludum
READING lesson: LUDUS GRAECORUM
Nam
ornat.
Minerva dea sapientiae
doctus, dlscipuld verba
HomOri
virorum claroruin praedicat.
Magister, vir
Jlomerus pugnas
Discipulus verba magistri
recitat.
Liber magistri docti pulcher
iterat.
est.
47
Nam
est.
litterae
pulchrae librmn Ornant.

Magister puero litteras Graecas et numeros Graecos
monstrat. Tmn puer attentus notas stilo in cera tabulae
Magister et discipulus verba Homeri cantant.

Pulchra Homeri
Sinistra lyram tenent, dextra pulsant.
notat.
miu
In a GrUKEK School
verba virum et puerum delectant. Homerus clara GraecOrum proelia praedicat, constantiam virorum bellicosorum, patientiam equorum robustdrum laudat.
Magistri discipulos strenuos et attentos coronTs pulchrls
ornant.
Yiri in via
mium pulchrum
stris
severls
puerum
laudant.
invisa
Puer
laetus prae-
Pigritia discipulorum magi-
conservat.
Saepe verbis pueros pigros

Ignominia plagorum fllils
est.
vituperant et plagis castlgant.
virorum llberorum magna

Capilll
et
ocull
est.
puerorum Komandrum
Barbae magistrdrum longae
et albae sunt.
nigri
Puerl et
sunt.
virl
BEGINNING LATIN
48
Puerl non diu in ludo
vestlmentis longis ornati sunt.
In
sunt.
'
ludum
et ex ludo puerl
Servi pueris tabulas,
cum
commeant.
servis
lyras portant.
stilos,
LESSON XXVI.
PREPOSITIONS, CONTINUED.
tening from the
camp
2.
1. AVhy are the tribunes hasThe men will fight for (pro)
3. The consul withdre\y from
and daughters.
the province with much money. 4. You will not be
without a war. 5. They had filled the fields with
their sons
free
sol-
diers.
139. In and
in, on, at,
In,
Siih,
into,
to,
takes the
when the phrase tells avheek something is, the accusative when it tells whither something is going. Thus,
ablative
In oppido
Ablative.
manet,
est,
etc., lie is, stays, etc.,
in
the toivn.
Accusative.
Similarly
tells
tells
In oppidum venit, he comes into the town.

sub,
under, takes the ablative
when
the phrase
under what something is, the accusative when

under what something is going. Thus,
Pastor sub
Ablative.
a
Accusative.
arhore
sedet, Tlie
it
shepherd sits under
tree.
Felis sub
mensam
currit,
TJte cat
rims inider
the tahle.
140. Other Prepositions.

those mentioned in Lesson
sative.
The
difference
between
towards, with the accusative,
gram on the next

^
All prepositions other than
XX Y and
is
139 take the accu-
ad,
in,
and sub,
by the
illustrated
page.
See foot-note to Lesson
XX.
to,
dia-
PREPOSITIONS, CONTINUED
49
Copy and complete:
141. Exercise.
In winter we shall stay in the town without danger.

The general has come to town with a great-number
soldiers.
The legion stayed at-the-foot-of the
3.
1.
2.
of
sub
legion-
3f
mountain with safety. 4. The hostages will have come

from the province with great fear.
5. The legion had
timor3
The cavThen they
sent messengers to the consul about peace.
alry had remained in-front-of the camp.
withdrew from the place
to-the-foot-of a
6.
7.
mountain with a
sub
great-number of people.^
8.
With a few
troops the lieu-
hoininor f
tenant came under the walls of the town. 9. The soldiers

were fighting in a ditch under the walls. 10. They have
come to the gates soon they will have come into the
;
town.
142. Exercise.
ent puerl.
Ex
3.
1.
Patrum consilium cum
salute audi-
Sine imperatore legio in timore fuerat.

oppido ad consulem veniebant obsides. 4. Tum ab
op])ido
in
2.
provinciam
discessit
Gonsul.
5.
Milites sub
muros venerunt.
143. EuLE
motion)
^
is
When
XI Y.
The
which
people means "nation," use populus
sons," use the plural of homo.
'place to
expressed by the accusative with

;
{called the
ad
when
end of
or in.
it
means "per-
BEGINNING LATIN
50
LESSON XXVII.
PRESENT OF FOUR CONJUGATIONS.
THE PASSIVE VOICE:
144. The Passive Voice.
sentence such as
Tlu hoy 6tts the sohJUr, Puer militem
may
videt,
be changed so as to read
The
soldier is seen hy the hoy. Miles a pnero videtur.
The two sentences
state the
same
idea, but the
form of
changed. In the fii'st sentence, the verb

(videt) is said to be in the Active Voice
in the second,
in the Passive Voice (videturi.
Xotice the following
the statement
is
points
â)
miles,
[JA
Militem, the object of the active verb, has
become
the subject of the passive.

Puer. the sul^ject of the active sentence, has
become
in the passive a puero.

(c)
The verb has changed
its
form
in
both English
and Latin.
145. Person-eudingrs of the Passive.
follows
These are as
SINGULAR.
1.
-r
t?.
-lis.
3.
-tTir
PLVRAL.
-mur
-re
-mini
-ntur
146. Present of Four Conjugations.
To fonn the
present tense, the pei^son-endings are added to the present
stem as follows
son singular of
complete
fii*st
with the exception that in the fii*st performs the termination -r is added to the
all
pei*son singular active (as, active, video
pas-
Xotice the
videorV Compare carefully with
St em- vowel in the second pei^son singular of Declension III.
sive,
65.
THE PASSIVE VOICE

Terminations of the Present Passive.
CONJ.
61
52
BEGINNING LATIN
AmicI Gallorum a mllitibus appelad imperatorem cum salute duceris.
150. Exercise.
lamur.
3.
Pax
2.
1.
(luce
crebris litterls petitur.
4.
Castra loco
idoneo
Ydces mllitum defessorura a legato audiCiir

prlncipes appellamini ?
6.
untur.
7. Semper ab
8. Oppida fossis et muris muniuntur.
equitibus laudor.
ponuntur.
5.
XY. The agent aHer a passive verb is expressed
151. EuLE
by the ablative with a or ab,
LESSON XXVIII.
THE PASSIVE VOICE: IMPERFECT AND FUTURE TENSES.
by the people.
2.
into the camp.
towards the
3.
1.
The plan is called good

by guides out of the town
You are led

The Roman
soldiers are being led

Peace is sought by the
Letters are being written by the
fortifications.
lieutenant's brother.
5.
4.
beautiful girls to their brothers (use ad
common with
scribo).
the dative
is less
THE PASSIVE VOICE

tense-sign
-ba-,
as in 83.
53
the whole being added to the present stem
Thus,
lauda ba ntur, they
tvere being
praised, or they were praised.
164. Exercise. Write paradigms of the imperfect pasawait; perterreo, alarm; constitu5, station;
impedio, hinder; with English meanings of exspecto only,
according to the example in 153.
sive of exspecto,
165. Future Passive.
This tense
is
formed by adding
the regular person-endings of the passive to the same

tense-signs as for the future active, except that the second
person singular of the

in -be
ris (-be re).
first
and second conjugations ends
Thus.
ama be ris or ama be re, yoif will be

mone be ris or mone be re, you luill
loved.
he advised.
156. Exercise. By the aid of 89 write paradigms of

the future passive of the same verbs as in 154, withEnghsh
meanings of constituo, according to the example in 155.
157. Exercise.
The arms were awaited by the legions.

2.
The
be hindered by their arms.
3. The aid of a
large number of cavalry will be awaited. 4. The cavalry
1.
soldiers will
were being stationed in-front-of the camp.

5. The
minds of the Eomans were terrified by the forces of
the Gauls.
6. Aid will be sent to the soldiers by Caesar.
7. We shall not be alarmed by the words of the commons.
8.
Was
ter ?
9.
the fortification of the
We
shall
camp hindered by
be stationed before the gate.
centurion's father will not be praised
by the
the win10.
people.
The
BEGINNING LATIN
54
LESSON XXIX.
THE THIRD DECLENSION: NEUTER NOUNS;
CONSONANT STEMS.
158. Review Exercise. 1. The guide will be awaited
by the consul's brother. 2. We shall be stationed in front
3. 1 was alarmed and
of the rampart without our arms.
withdrew. 4. Why Avere you not hindered by the mul5. Were you not awaited by the
titude of the men?
general
159. Declension of Neuters General Rule. In all

neuter nouns, of whatever declension, (a) the accusative
and vocative are always the same as the nominative in
both singular and plural and (h) the nominative plural
:
(and consequently the accusative and vocative plural)
ahvays ends in -a.

ISêuter
160. Neuters of the Third Declension.
nouns of the third declension have for the nominative
singular the simple stem, no case-ending being added.
The genitive, dative, and ablative have the same endings
as other nouns of this declension.
The stem, however, is sometimes altered in some other
way than by the addition of a termination. Thus,
Stems in -in have nominative in -en, as
fLumeHf gen. flumin
Stems in
-us,
-er
and
-or
is,
river.
generally have the nominative in
as
o^Hs, gen. oper
is,
corpw.s, gen. corpor
The stem
capit-
work.
is,
body.
has nominative caput,
/iead.
161. Exercise. AVrite paradigms of the nouns given in

the precediug section, according to the rules stated in 159
and
160.
READING lesson: CASTRA ROMANA

162. Exercise.
videbantur.
cedebant.
erant.
2.
3.
impediebantur.
bamur.
7.
Agmen
hominum
10.
6.
Flumina
alta a defessis obsidibus
Milites defessi ab opere munitionis dis-
Et corpora
Milites
4.
1.
55
Romanl
5.
et
capita
Gallorum
Mfignis corporibus Gallorum perterre-
Nomina legatorum Gains

in agros
magna
in lato et alto fiumine arniis
et
Brutus erant.
Gallorum ducebant.
perterremur.
9.
Litterae sine
In lateribus castrorum sunt flumina
LESSOIS^
8.
Sceleribus
nomine
erant.
lata.
XXX.
READING LESSON: CASTRA ROMANA.
GermanI imperio Komano fmitimi erant.

Roman!
cum Germanis in ripTs Rheni et Danuvl ptignabant.
Copiae magnae Germnndrum bellicosorum saepe Rhenum
saepe
Gallic Chief in a Roman Camp
BEGINNING LATIN
56
fiuvium superabant. Itaque

Rhenl sinistram firmabant.
munitis
ttitae erant.
arma Eomanorum
Eomani
copiis validis
Copiae Romanae
ripam
castrls
Galeae, loricae, scuta, hastae, gladil,
erant.
Castra Komana muro, fossa, vallo, munlta erant.

Copiae Romanae in tentoriis albis habitabant. Ex muro
castrorum virl in agro per quattuor portas commeabant.
Multitudo armatoPortae viis latis coniunctae erant.
rum Komanorum in castrls erat. Etiam auxilia populoruni superatorum in castrls Romanis erant.
Copiae
Germanorum saepe ex agrls et ex latebris silvarum castrls
munitis appropinquabant. Oppugnabant vallum et fos"
sam castrorum.
Roman! saepe
rabant.
in ripa
Rheni
Tandem GermanI
expugnaverunt.
Romanos supeRomanorum firma
sinistra
castra
Sed in loco castrorum deletorum incolae
Multa
agrorum flnitimorum aedificia aedificaverunt.
oppida ripae RhenI sinistrae olim castra Romana fueIn via Coloniae, oppidi clarl, rulnae muri et porta
runt.
castrorum antiquorum conservata sunt.
Ancient Helmets
57
LESSON XXXI.
THE THIRD DECLENSION: /-STEMS.
man camp was a great work.
of the leaders in the letter.
were broad.
name
3.
On
of a goddess.
164. Third
wing
The
1.
2.
3.
fortification of a Eohave written the names
The
sides of the altar
the side of the altar was found the

5.
The
goddess' head was beautiful.
BEGINNING LATIN
58
The nominative
singular of
some
i-stems ends in
-es,
as in
caedes, gen. caedis, slaughter.
The
accusative singular sometimes ends in -im and the
ablative singular in
of each.
Turris,
-i.
toioe)\
has both
forms
Thus,
Ace.
turrim or turrem.
Abl.
turri or turre.
Write a paradigm
165. Exercise.
loundary (stem llni-).
166. Exercise.
of
finis,
m., endj
The remaining forces of the enemy Avill be seen by

the general's slave. 2. The soldier will be stationed in
3. You will not be alarmed by the great
the first rank.
The territories of the Helvetii
bodies of the enemy,
5. The arms of the enemy will be lost
were narrow.
6. The slaughter in (= of) the battle will be
in the river.
7. I shall not be alarmed by the great towers of
great.
the Eomans. 8. They will place the tower in-front-of
'
1.
tt.
the walls of the
little
167. Exercise.
oppido videntur.
petent
legfitl.
Turres hostium ab hominilnis in
1.
2.
3.
town.
Mox
Tum
pilcem ab imjêratore Eonulno

mllites
ad muros venient
et
turrim ante munltiones collocabunt. 4. Proelio magno

Copiae
5.
cum magna caede oppidum ex]nignabunt.
Galldrum Eomanos a flnilnis ndn prohibebunt. 6. Non
sine perlculo legati ex o]ipidd venerunt.
^
Plural in Latin.
THE PASSIVE VOICE
59
LESSON XXXII.
THE PASSIVE
VOICE:
PERFECT TENSE.
This tense is formed by combining the present tense of sum with tlie perfect passive
participle of the verb whose perfect we are forming.
168. Perfect Passive.
Thus, the perfect passive partici})le of laudo

lauda
tus, -a,
and the perfect passive

SING.
1.
laudatus sum,
2.
laudatus
laudatus
3.
PLUR.
es,
est,
is
-um, having been praised

is
inflected
/ have
you
heen praised, or
(sing.) have been
/ tvas praised.
praimd,
1.
laudati sumus, lue have been praised, etc.
2.
laudati
3.
etc.
he has been praised, etc.
estis, you (plnr.) have been praised, etc.

laudati sunt, they have been praised, etc.
JS'otice
that the participle agrees with the subject like
an adjective.
Thus,
The girls have been {were) praised
would be
Puellac^ laudatae sunt.
169. Formation of the Perfect Passive Participle.

This is declined like an adjective of the first and second
declension.
Its base is regularly formed by adding -t to
the PRESENT stem of the verb. Thus,
Con J.
I.
Con J. IV.
PRESENT STEM.
BASE.
lauda-
laudat-
laudatus,
audi-
audit-
auditus, -a,
PARTICIPLE.
In the second conjugation, the stem-vowel

to
-i,
as in
habitus (from habeo),
-a,
-um
-um
is
changed
BEGINNING LATIN
60
except in the case of the verbs mentioned in 108, as in

deletus (from deleo).
In the third conjugation, the stem-vowel
is
generally
dropped, as in
rectus (from rego).
170. The Principal Parts. The use of the last of the

now be clear. By cutting off the final
principal parts will
-um we obtain the base of the perfect passive participle.

This base is called the Supine Stem, and the part from
which it is obtained is called the Supine. The use of
the supine will be explained later, as well as that of the
second of the principal parts the present infinitive ac-
tive.
Eeview
Every form
41
and
107.
of the verb
is
made from some one
three stems which appear in the principal parts
of the
the pres-
ent stem, the perfect stem, and the supine stem.
171. Exercise.
name
Without referring
to the Vocabulary,
the principal parts of the following verbs, the stems of
which are given:

RESENT STEM.
da-
debe-'
THE PASSIVE VOICE
61
Write the stems of the following verbs,

parts of which are given
172. Exercise.
the
priiici})iil
moveo, niovere, movl, niotum.

disccdo, discedere, discessi, discessum.
vasto, vastare, vastavi, vastatum.
duco, dilcere, duxi, ductum.

appello, appellare, appellavl, appellatum.
perterreo, perterrere^, perterrui, perterritiim.
constituo, constituei'e, constitui^ constitutum.

impedioj, impedire, impedivi, impeditum.
peto, petere, petlvi, petitiim.
scribo, scrlbere, scripsi, scriptum.
173. Exercise. Write paradigms

mentioned in 154.
of the perfect passive
of the verbs
174. Exercise,
est.
2.
1.
Auxilium Gallis ab amicis datum
Castra loco idoneo posita sunt.
pellatae sunt pulchrae a puerls.
sumus.
5.
In castra missus
es.
6.
4.
3.
Puellae ap-
In oppido
relict!
A militibus audltl non
estis.
LESSON XXXIII.
THE PASSIVE VOICE: PLUPERFECT AND FUTURE PERFECT.
GENERAL REVIEW OF VERBS.
175. Review Exercise. Make a table giving the endings of the present infinitive and the supine for the four conjugations.
See 170.
This tense is formed by
176. Pluperfect Passive.
adding the imperfect tense of sum to the perfect passive
participle.
Thus,
laudati erant, they
had been praised.
BEGINNING LATIN
62
177. Future Perfect Passive. This tense is formed

by adding the future tense of sum to the perfect passive
participle.
Thus,
impediti erimus,
we
shall have been hindered.
178. Exercise. Write paradigms of the pluperfect pasmoneo and miinio and the future perfect passive of laudo
and duco, with English meanings of moneo and duco according
to the examples in 176 aud 177.
sive of
SOT.DTERS ON THE
179. Exercise.
MARCH
The legion will have been led-across.

2. The
enemy's flight had been seen. 3. The fear of the slaves
will have been noticed.
4. The camp will have been
surrounded. 5. You have not been seen by the few
defenders. G. I had not noticed the flight of the defenders
of the camp.
7. The camp was filled with defenders.
8. They were defending the place.
9. We had chosen a
suitable place.
10. The defenders will despair of safety.
1.
TUK THIRD
COiS.J
UOATION
63
LESSON XXXIV.
THE THIRD CONJUGATION: VERBS
IN -/a
THE THIRD
DECLENSION: MIXED /-STEMS.

180. Review Exercise. 1. The enemy had been surrounded by the Eomans. 2. The defenders of the walls
will have been chosen.
3. Safety was sought in flight.
4. The troops had been led-across the river (ace).
5. The
enemy's high tower is being filled with men.
181. Verbs in
from other verbs

and
These tenses are spelled exactly like the same
Verbs
-io.
in
differ
-io
of the third conjugation only in the present, imperfect,

future.
tenses in verbs of the fourth conjugation, with the follow-
ing exceptions
(a)
The
of the stem
is
never lengthened
capitis,
not
ca})Itis.
(h)
The second person
ative passive ends in
singular of the present indic-
-eris
or
-ere
caperis or
capere,
not
capiris, etc.
(c)
The present infinitive ends in
-ere
capere,
not capire.
182. Exercise. "Write paradigms of the present of capio,

take; the imperfect of facio, make, do ; the future of iacid,
Capio iiiid iacio should be given in both active and
throw.
passive; facio does not occur in the passive in the tenses given.
183. Exercise.
ris,
1.
capieris, capitur.
tur, iacietur,
Faciam,
3.
facio,
faciebam.
laciunt, iacient, iaciet.
iacientur, iaciuntur.
5.
2.
4.
Capelaci-
Capiar, iaciebar,
iacis.
184. Mixed '-stems. Some nouns of the third declenalthough they increase in the genitive (see IG-i),
sion,
BEGINNING LATIN
64:
have the genitive plural in -ium, and the accusative plural

Such are, especially
-is.
in -es or
monosyllabic bases ending in two consonants,
{a)
as
ur&-,
nocf-,
nom. urbs, gen.

nom. nox, gen.
plur. urbi
plur. nocti
um,
um,
f.,
i.,
city j
night,
nouns with nominatives in -ns and -rs, as

um, f., cohort
cliens, gen. plur. clienti um, m., client.
(b)
cohors, gen. plur. cohorti
185. Exercise.
1.
Missiles are
thrown from the walls
In four nights Ave shall be in the city.

3. By the help of the cohorts the men will be captured.
4. The javelins will be thrown in (into) the direction of
the wall.
5. We shall make peace with (cum) part of the
of the cities.
2.
Gauls.
LESSON XXXV.
READING LESSON: GERMANI ANTIQUI.
Germania antlquls temporibus non
dlvitils,*
sed multi-
tudine virorum f ortium nobilis erat. Silvae inviae omnium

'
generum bestiarum ferarum plenae
erant.
AgrI non
fer-
maria tempestatibus saevis horribilia erant. Caelum

triste erat
aestas erat brevis, hiems longa
dura. Mores Germanorum moribus Eomanorum simi-
tiles,
'
saepe nubibus
'
""
et
les
non
erant.
German!
fortes
non
in urbibus munitis, sed
in vicis aut in aedificiis singulis habitabant.

terls
pus venationibus et
Animus
^
The
of, 071
^
Neque
lit-
neque artibus delectabantur, sed per omne vltae temacer
bellis
occupatl erant.
Germanorum pacem diuturnum
ablative expressing a cause
account
of, or
is
placidam-
translated by from, with, because
a similar expression.
After words meaning like the dative
is
used.
READING LESSON
que non tolerabat.
65
Discordia acris et studium acre gloriae
multorum belloniiii ricrium causae erant. Ante bella

omnes viri convocabantur duceni coiiiniuneni copiaruni
pedestrium et equestrium creabant. Saepe popull magni
ex agrls sterilibus Germaniae emigrabant incolas agro;
AnCIKNT CtEUMANS
rum fertiliuni fugabant sedesque novas occupabant. Etiam

Cimbri
et
TeutonI olim propter sterilitatem agrorum in
Italiam migraverunt.
Proelils acribus cdpias
Romanorum
superaverunt. Sed turn Marius, imperator fortis Romanorum, copias novas comparavit, et GermanI cladibus gravibus superatl sunt.
66
BEGINNING LATIN
LESSON XXXVI.
THE THIRD DECLENSION: NEUTERS; /-STEMS. ADJECTIVES
OF THE THIRD DECLENSION.
The nominative ends
186. Neuters: i-stems.

or
-ar,
the final
-1-
of the stem being either
in
-e, -al,
changed to
-e,
as in
mare, stem marl-, sea,
or dropped, as in
animal, stem animali-, miimalj
calcar, stem calcari-, spur.
and
Such nouns have ablative singular in -i, nominative and
accusative plural in -ia, and genitive plural in -ium.
187. Exercise. Write complete paradigms of the nouns

given in 186, with English meanings of calcar. The genitive
plural of mare is marum, by an exception other neuters in -e
have -ium, according to the rule. Eeview 158, 159, 164.
;
188. Adjectives of the Third Declension.

are of three kinds
(1)
Adjectives whose nominative
ends in
-er
These
singular masculine
have three terminations
in the
nominative
singular, as
M.
(2)
Adjectives in
-is
N.
F.
acer, acr
is,
acr
e, Iceen.
have two terminations, as
M. & F,
N.
forti s, fort e, hrave.
(3)
All others have one termination, as

M. F. N.
audax, gQw. audac is, hold.

ingens, gen. ingent is, huge.
Adjectives of two and three terminations regularly have

the ablative singular in
-i.
67'
Adjectives of x)ne terinintitioii liave the ablative singular

in either
or
-i
-e.
All of these adjectives are declined as i-stems in the

plural.
See 164 and 186.
189. Declension of Ceêr.

nations are declined like
Adjectives of three termi-
acer,
dropping the
But
nominative singular masculine.

Thus,
retains the e throughout.
the
except in
swift^
celer,
celer, celeris, celere, etc.
The
genitive plural of celer
is
celerum.
Write complete paradigms of tne adjec-
190. Exercise.
tives given in g 188, 189.
Supply terminations
191. Exercise.
and translate, first learn-
to the adjectives
ing the Vocabulary.
Calcaria sunt
1.
acr-.
Roman Spur
fort-.
5.
Galll
Multa et
4.
Omn-
lit-
6.
muros ducebat.
192. Exercise.
1.
the animals were huge.

trian order
seen the
4.
5.
The bodies of
2. The eques-
was powerful.
bold
general's
3.
We
long
have
spurs.
The feet of the messengers are swift.

The rest-of the night seemed (passive
of video) long to the bold leader.

'
Omit
in translating.
Cli-
Aucohortem ad
terae a nuntio celer- mittentur.
Romanus
Omn3.
animalia sunt in marl.
in gent-
entes principis potent- non fuerunt
dac- legatus
2.
proelium equestr- viderunt.
Roman spur
BEGINNING LATIN
68
LESSON XXXVII.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.
Adjectives in their
193. Degrees of Comparison.
simplest form are said to be in the Positive Degree, as
latus, hroad, ^Wx, fortunate.
Adjectives Av^hose form denotes the 230ssession of the

quality in a higher degree are said to be in the Comparafelicior, more fortunate.
Adjectives whose form denotes the possession of the
tive Degree, as latior, hroader^
quality in the highest degree are said to be in the Super-
Degree, as
lative
latissimus,
broadest^
felicissimus,
most
fortunate.
194. Formation of the Comparative. The stem of

is formed by adding -lor- to the base
of the positive, as found by dropping the termination of
The comparative is declined
the genitive singular.
according to the rules for liquid stems (119), with the
the comparative
following exceptions
(<^)
in
The neuter nominative and
accusative singular end
-ius.
(5)
{c)
{d)
{e)
not
The ablative singular ends in -e or -i.

The accusative plural ends in -es or -is.
The genitive plural has -um, not -ium.
The nominative and accusative plural neute.' have -a,
-ia.
195. Exercise.
Write a paradigm of the comparative
degree of acer, keen.
196. Formation of the Superlative.

This is reguformed by adding -issimus, -a, -um, to the base. The
larly
inflected as a regular adjective of the first
superlative
is
and second
declensions.
COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES
The
superlative
is
0\)
sometimes translated by very.
Thus,
longissimus, longest or very long.
These form their comparais formed by adding

-rimus, -a, -um, directly to the nominative singular mascuThus,
line.
NoiiiiiiJitives in -et\
197.
tive regularly, but the superlative
SUPERLATIVE.
COMPARATIVE.
POSITIVE.
pulcher, -chra, -chrum
pulcherrimus,
pulchrior, -ius
-a,
-um
198. Exercise. Compare (that is, give the nominative

singular masculine of positive, comparative, and superlative)
the adjectives meaning high; free; hold; swift; brave; huge;
po'werful.
199.
How
to Express Than,
ways
{a) The word quam,
This
may
be done in
tAVO
than,
is
nouns com]mred being usually
used the second of the

in the same case as the
;
Thus,
first.
Caesar was braver than Pompeyj

Caesar fortior erat quam I*ofn2yeius,
(h)
When the first
inative
or.
of the contrasted
accusative case, quam
may
second word put in the ablative.

would then read
Caesar fortior erat
words
is
in the
nom-
be omitted, and the
The above sentence
Pompeid.
'
The ablative so used is called the Ablative of Comparison.

200. Exercise. Learn the Vocabulary. Use both the
methods described in 199 whenever possible.
1.
The time is
short
shortervery short.
inform Caesar (make Caesar more

battle.
all
3.
Trusty
the danger.
4.
more unfavorable
place.
We shall
certain) of (de)
men have informed

In the
2.
the
the Gauls about
summer they had come into a

5. The Komans were not bolder
BEGINNING LATIN
70
than the boklest Gauls.
6.
Seas are deeper than the
7. Not all boj^s are braver than girls.

The javelin was heavier than the heaviest sword.
9. The general's horse was higher than the lieutenant's.
10. The longest swords are shorter than the shortest
11. The Romans' ships were longer than the
javelins.
Gauls'. 12. The garrison will withdraw in the shortest
deepest rivers.
8.
time.
14.
13.
The
We shall
citizens
give the reward to the braver soldier.
fought with shorter swords.
15.
The
winter Avas very severe.
201. Rule XYI.

followed by
The comparative without
quam
is
the ablative.
KoMAN 8WOKD
LESSON XXXVIII.
ADJECTIVES: IRREGULAR COMPARISON.
202. Review Exercise. 1 Winter is the severest season
2. Horses are very swift animals.
3. The nights are longer in winter than in sumtner. 4. In
summer the nights are very short. 5. The towers will be
higher than the Avails.
.
(time) of the year.
203. Adjectives in -lis.

by adding
their superlative
tive.
Thus,
POSITIVE.
Six adjectives in
-limus to the
-lis
form
base of the posi-
adjectives: ikregulak compakison.
Form
204r. Exercise.
the comptinitive iind superlative
of the hist live adjectives in the above
the
71
and memorize
list,
list.
205. Irreg-ular Comparison. Memorize the following

of adjectives irregularly compared
list
bonus, good,
melior,
malus, bad,
peior, -ius, luorse,
pessimus, tvorst.
magnus, great,
parvus, small,
maior,
minor,
maximus, greatest.
minimus, least.
multus, mucli,
(No m. or
optimus, best.
better,
-ius,
greater,
-ius,
-us, less,
f.)plns,
206. Declension of Plus,
wore, plurimus, most.
(No m. or
Vliis
f.)
is
declined as follows
Plural.
Singular.
M.
N.
F.
pliires
pliis
How
AND
N.
pliira
pluris
pliirium
(wanting)
pluribus
plus
plures
plure (rare)
pluribus
(is)
plura
does this differ from other comparatives in the
inflection of the plural ?
See
194.
207. Cases witli PlTis, In the singular, plUs

noun, and is followed by the genitive. Thus,
plus friimenti,
In the plural,
word which
Pliires
it
more grain,
it
(literally,
more of grain).
agrees like other adjectives with the

Thus,
feminae quam viri sunt in oppido, There are more

in the toimi.
1. More grain; of more grain; with

More men of more men Avith more
Much time; more time; most time. 4. Many
208. Exercise.
men.
grain.
3.
a neuter
modifies.
women than men
more
is
2.
BEGINNING LATIN
72
ships
more
ships
the greatest Avork
many
very
;
ships.
5.
A greater work
a great work.
Decline together the Latin words for
209. Exercise.
the following.
1.
4.
Easiest work.
Older son.
ship.
8.
2.
Better advice.
Best plan.
5.
Youngest
sister.
3.
Our
ancestors.
6.
Smaller thing.
7.
Larger
9.
Better horse.
10.
Worse
garrison
^=i| ||i|l|ll||l|IHIIIII
IHIH
III
IIMIIIIII
IIIIIHIIMI
Ilk
Roman Ship
LESSON XXXIX.
ADJECTIVES: IRREGULAR COMPARISON, CONTINUED.
1. The greater part of the
defenders had left the town. 2.
had more time than
our brothers.
3.
The enemy have the most horses.
We
4.
We have the
best fortifications.
5.
The boys
are very
like [their] father (dative).
211. Defective Comparison. Some adjectives lack

the positive. Memorize the following list.
ADJECTIVES
prior,
IRKKtUJLAR COMPARISON
73
former, primus, first.
propior, nearer, proximus, nearest, next.

ulterior,
farther, ultimus, farthest.
The positives of the following are rare as adjectives.

They are frequently used in the plural, as nouns.
(exterus,
outward,)
exterior, outer,
extremus
(extimus)
(inferus, below,) inferior,' loiver, infimus
(imus)
(posterus,/o^/oz(;i//^,) posterior, latter,
^ /^,,^0/
^^^^'^^*^-
-.
^^^^^^^*
f
postremus
(postumus)
(superus, above,) superior, hUjhor, supremus
and summus
212, Adjectives Denoting a Part.
-.
.y,7.^/
Certain adjectives
regularly denote some particular part of the object they

describe.
These
are,
among
others, those
meaning
top of, summus;
bottom of, infimus;

middle of, medius
end of, extremus;
rest of, reliquus.
Thus,
summo monte, at the top-of the mountain.

Infimae valles, the bottoms-of the valleys.
In
Media
aestate, in
mid-summer.
Ad extremas fossas, 7iear the ends-of the ditches.

Cum reliquis copiis, with the rest-of the forces.
Notice that we should naturally expect the noun in
each of the above instances to be in the genitive.
^
inferior
means lower
in position, humilior, lower in stature.
74
BEGINNING LATIN
'
In media urbe ara mrixima erat.

1.
213. Exercise.
Extrema hieme castra movimus. 3. Copiae de locis
4. Kesuperioribus in locum inferiqrem discedunt.
2.
liqua
erat.
legio
nocte priore pro
Legatus
5.
cum
oppidi
portis
constitfita
quattuor cohortibus in
summo
colle est.
night.
last
On
a former night; on the first

Caesar was then in farther Gaul. 3. The poet's
214. Exercise.
2.
work was not
tioned half
1.
[his] greatest.
way up (=
in the
The legions were
4.
middle
Avay up the nearest mountain the rest
sta-
Half
of the forces were
of)
the
hill.
5.
seen
LESSON XL.
READING LESSON: TEMPLUM DELPHICUM.
Delus insula patria Apollinis et Dianae fuit, ibique
Sed temclarum Apollinis templum aedificatum erat.
et
splendore
tempi!
Delphic! superaplum Delium honore
Templum Delphicum ndn in campo, sed inter
batur.
saxa alta situm erat. Glim draco ferus custos loc! invi!
A dracone pastores necatl, agr! agricolarum vafuerat.
Sed Apollo perniciosum loc! custodem sagitstat! erant.
t!s cert!s
necaverat et templum
Laurea deo iucunda
marmoreum
erat, itaque
laureae pulchrae erant.
aedificaverat.
prope templum multae
Templum
Apollinis, silva sacra,
colores et odores grati florum variorum saepe a poetis
Graecis praedicati sunt.
Magna hominum multitudo
ex multis Graeciae c!vitaNam a Pythia,

sacerdote Apollinis, fortuna hominum et voluntas d!vina
pronuntiabatur. Homines pr!mum membra aqua sacra
tibus
templum Apollinis frequentabat.
COMPARISON BY THE AID OF ADVERBS
75
lavabant et capillos
laurea ornabant.
Turn templum intrabant; sed locum sacrum, ubi tripus Pythiae erat, non intrabant. Yapores terrae
Pythiam furore
cllvino incitabant.
tripodo sacro sa-
cerdos verba obscura

cantabat.
Tum
sa-
cerdotes oraculorum'
hominibus voluntatem Apollinis
periti
explicabant.
Ab
ho-
minibus gratis templum D e 1 p h i c u

imaginibus pulchrlS
aliarum regionum locum
THE Oracle of Delphi
ornabatur.
sacrum donis
Etiam reges
pii
pretiosis ornabant.
76
BEGINNING LATIN
Magis and Maxime, Just as in

more beautiful " and most beautiful,"
216. Comparison
we
English
say "
l>y
*'
and not " beautifuller " or " beautifullest," so in Latin

certain adjectives are
and maxime,
viost.
compared by the use of
idoneus, suitable;
maxime
This
or
is
magis, more^
Thus,
magis idoneus, 7nore suitable
idoneus, most suitable.
especially the case with adjectives ending in -ens
eius.
217. Comparison by JJmtfs and ilfimrwc.
way
is
In the same
possession of a quality in a less or in the least degree
expressed by the use of the adverbs minus,
minime,
minus
difficilis, less
difficult ;
minime
amount of the
by the Ablative.
Degree of Difference.
difficilis,
When
218. Degree of Difference.

trasted or compared, the
pressed
This
is
least difficult.
objects are condifference
Much and
little,
and
ex-
Thus,
quat'
when used with comparatives and
superlatives, are expressed
adjectives multus
is
called the Ablative of
Gains is four years older than Luciiis, Gains

tuor annls maior natu quam Lucius est.
difference.
and
less,
Thus,
least.
by the neuter singular
paulus, in
of the
the ablative of degree of
Thus,
Maria multd maidra sunt fluminibus (or quam flumina),

Seas are much larger than rivers,
Puer paul5 altior fratre (or quam
taller than his brother.
frater) est,
The boy
is
little
219. Exercise. 1. The enemy have lost a much greater

number of horsemen than the Romans. 2. The top of the
wall
is
little
lower than the enemy's tower.
3.
A less
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
active consul will not defend
for
(petd)
much
more
the least
grain.
difficult.
than the ditch.

wall.
9.
Lucius
7.
Griius
8.
is
5.
is
6.
4.
We
are-looking-
The work of fortification is

The wall is ten feet shorter
ditch
seven
is
five feet deeper
years
older
than
years younger than Galba.
six
mountains are
The
tlie city.
77
many
feet higher
than the
Lucius.
10.
The
than the tops of the
hills.
220. Rule XVII.

used
to
With comparatives
the
ablative
is
denote the degree of difference.
LESSON
XLII.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS.
221. Review Exercise. 1 The towers were a little
nearer to the walls than to the camp. 2. The longer work
.
is
much
3. We shall see the farthest town

The troops had been stationed in a
They are the nearest to the territories of
less difficult.
of the Gauls.
lower place.
the enemy.
4.
5.
Personal Pronouns.
digms.
Learn the following para-
78
BEGINNING LATIN
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
If the
case.
pronoun
is
used as an adjective,
79
it
agrees also in
Thus,
Ea uox
ultima erat hostibus.
That night
luas the last
for
the enemy.
That forest had been seen by them

have come from those hills, they
from a region nearer the sea. 3. You have given us
money, we will give you help. 4. Help will be given
5. That place is not very near them.
us by them.
226. Exercise.
but not by
us.
2.
1.
We
LESSON
XT.III.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
227. Review Exercise. 1. By you, friend, we shall be
but you will not be praised by us. 2. They have
seen us and we have seen them. 3. I will defend you, citizens you always have defended me. 4. By me our safety
shall never be despaired-of.
5. We were alarmed by them,
but they were much more (magis) alarmed b}^ us.
praised
228. The Pronoun Hic, Hie means this, and refers to

something near or connected with the speaker. Learn the
following paradigm
Singular.
80
BEGINNING LATIN
229. Exercise, Give all possible translations of the following forms, each of which occurs more than once in the
preceding paradigm.
1.
Hoc.
2. Jlls.
Haec.
3.
4.
Huius.
5.
HuTc.
Give the case, gender,

230. Exercise.
meaning of each of the following.
1.
7.
Hic.
Do any
Harum.
2.
Hunc.
Has.
3.
Hac.
8.
4.
Hanc.
Horum.
6.
number, and
Hos.
5.
Hae.
6.
Hi.
9.
of the above occur
more than once
lUe means that.

231. The Pronoun Hie,
means that^ but ille points out more emphatically.
the following paradigm
Is
also
Learn
Singular.
The
first
M.
p.
Nom.
ille
ilia
illud
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Abl.
illius
illius
illius
illi
illi
illi
ilium
illam
illud
illo
ilia
ilia
plural
is
N.
declined like that of an adjective of the
and second declensions.
232. Exercise.
Give
all
possible translations of each of
the foUoAving forms.

1.
7.
Ilia.
nils.
2.
8.
Hlud.
Illorum.
3.
Illius.
9.
lUae.
4.
Illi.
5.
Illo.
6.
Ilia.
10. Illam.
233. Special Uses. Hic may mean the latter^ and ille
When pronouns are used in complete agreement with nouns ( 225), they are called Pronominal
Adjectives. These usually precede the nouns with which
they agree. Ille sometimes follows its noun, however, and
then is generally to be translated the well-hnown, the
famous^ etc.
the for7ner.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS
81
LrESSON XLIV.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.
234. Possessive Pronouns.
The
genitives of the per-
sonal pronouns ego and tu are not to be used to express

Instead, the following possessive pronouns are
possession.
used.
They agree
in case, gender,
Learn the
thing possessed.
and number with the
list:
-um, 7ny, mine.

-um, your, yours (when addressing one person).
noster, -tra, -trum, our, ours.
vester, -tra, -trum, your, yours (when addressing more than
meus,
tuus,
-a,
a,
one person).
theirs (according to
suus, -a, -um. Ids, her, hers, its, their,
the subject of the sentence).
235. Possessive of the Third Person.

if
the subject
is
singular masculine
ject is singular feminine;
Suus
her or hers
means
if
Jds
the sub-
their if the subject is plural.
Thus,
Caesar sn7)s milites eduxit, Caesar led out his soldiers.
Mater suum filium amat, Tlie mother loves her so7i.
Galli urbem suani servaverunt, The Gauls saved their
city.
If the possessive case in the third person does not denote
THE SAME PERSON AS THE SUBJECT,

the genitive of
is,
ea, id,
Ellis milites eduxi,
instead.
HOt tO bo USOd, but

Thus,
SUUS Is
led out his soldiers.
eorum timorem? Bo you see

Reus laetus est, nam praetor vitam
Videsne
defendant is glad, for the

defendant's life).
6
judge
to ill
their fear?
eius servabit, Ths
save his life (i.e. the
BEGINNING LATIN
82
The
possessive of the third person
in Latin unless
it is
is generally omitted
emphatic, or unless the meaning would
not be clear without
it.
236. Exercise. 1. We shall lead out our forces. 2. I

have defended all my friends. 3. Have you led your cohort
across the river, Gains ? 4. Soldiers, did you lose your
swords
5.
The general has come
receive part of his legion.
6.
the lieutenant will
That general did not give
part of his forces to Titus.
237. Exercise.
1.
Eius mllites
illam
numquam
mox constiterint.
ximas invenerunt.
4.
ratore nostro dabitur.
2.
AmIcI vestri Eomam
In his regionibus silvas maTua tibi, mea mihi pecunia ab imjie-
viderunt.
5.
3.
Vestram urbem a plurimis
perl-
0, Cicero summus vir erat,

culls virtute sua defenderunt.
sed frater eius minus erat imlgnus. 7. Cicero fratrem suam
apud populum laudavit.

9. In
suam, manebunt.
constiterant.
10. Ilia
8.
Eomam, urbem
medio copiae vestrae
Copiae apud
illo colle
nocte ])lririmos cIvTs interfecerunt.
An Ancient Temple
READING lesson: MORES GERMANORUM
83
Summoning Germans to Battle
LESSON XLV.
READING LESSON:
MORES GERMANORUM.
Sacerdotes perltae et prudentes ante
pugnam
volunta-
tem deorum explicabant.

a virls
numquam
bus non
Consilium sapiens sacerdotum

repudiabatur. In pugna GermanI hosti-
disci pllna
belli
terribiles
erant,
sed
magna
hominum
multitudine, ingenti corporum magnitudine,

Animo forti Gerclfimdre saevo, fortitudine et audacia.
manI vulnera gravia et mortem tolerabant. Post pugnam
Nam laus virorum fortium et
vita victorum felix erat.
audacium sempiterna
erat,
et
convivils laetls praedicabatur.
vdrum
erat.
fugabantur.
Nam
carminibus poetarum in
Infellx
autem
vita Tgna-
ignavl ab omnibus vltabantur et

Itaque ignavi saepe morte voluntaria
BEGINNING LATIN
84
Captlvl auteni a victoribus ferls more
animain
effiabant.
cf ildell
in arls cleorum imniolabantur.
'
Tacitus mores duriores et simplicidres
cum moribus
comparat.
elegantioribus et mollioribus
Vita Germanorum asperior erat
Germanormn
Eomanorum
quam Boma-
norum.
Caelum Germaniae tristius, fier frigidior erat;
maria saeviora, tempestates vehementiores, silvae latiores
et densiores erant.
Aedificia agricolarum antlquis tem-
poribus non pulchriora erant
quam
hodie.
Sed corpora
Germanorum
vita asperiore et simpliciore firmabantur;
itaque robore
'
et
magnitudine
'
corpora
Romanorum
elegantiorum superabant.
Ancient Germans
LESSON XLVI.
THE RELATIVE PRONOUN.
238. The Relative Proiiovin. The commonest relapronoun is qui, who^ which, that. Learn the following
tive
paradigm.
^
The ablative (translated by in) is used here to sliow in what respect
This is called the Ablative of Specification.
the statement is true.
THE RELATIVE PRONOUN
85
BEGINNING LATIN
86
Thus, in the sentence just
with that of the antecedent.

considered, milites
is
is
nominative, subject of
accusative, object of laudavit.
erant,
but quos
Since a pronoun, as
its
a word
used for a noun (generally

of
repeating
necessity
the noun), its case is
the
to avoid
always the same as the case of that noun would be in
name
implies,
is
Thus, by substituting the antecedent
the same position.
for the relative in the
laudavit)
(milites
Milites
above sentence, we should have

fortes
erant,
The soldiers
{lie
praised the soldiers) loere hrave,
which
in
clear that the second milites
it is
is
the object of
laudavit.
1. We halted on a hill
the hill was
We halted on a hill which was very high.
241. Exercise.
very high.
3.
The
hill
the time
You
You
6.
T.
2.
on which we halted was high. 4. He has time;

short.
5. The time which he has is short.
is
will see a chief;
influence of the chief
The man
9.
the chiefs influence
money.
10.
is
a soldier
The man
whom
the general has given
mountains which Avere
men
we had already seen.

Avhom we gave money Avere not soldiers.
a soldier. 11.
higher than those Avhich
14.
him
We saw
to
is
saAV
great.
the general has given
money
to
is
whose influence is great. 8, The

whom you saw had been very great.
will see a chief
12.
13.
The
We
men Avhose influence Avas much greater than yours.

The men Avhom Ave saw Avere greater than you. 15. The
cities to
Avhich Ave
Avhich Ave
came
Avere smaller than those
from
had come.
242. Translation of That.
That must be translated

who or which can be
In the
substituted for it without affecting the meaning.
following Exercise be careful to apply this test.
by some form
of qui Avhenever
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE I'RONOUNS
243. Exercise.
man
that
That
1.
you saw
is
an
is illustrious.
illustrious
3.
man.
No one saw
87
2.
The
the signal
4. That prisoner gave signals

Those were the forces that were
that the prisoner gave.
that no one saw.
5.
returning to winter-quarters.
244.
EuLE XYII. The
in gender and number, hut

of the clause in
which
it
relative agrees with its antecedent
case depends on the construction
its
stands.
LESSON
XL. VII.
INTERROGATIVE AND INDEFINITE PRONOUNS.

245. The Interrogative
interrogative.
Relative.
in
English, the
as a relative
and
as an
Thus,
Is,
quern
vidisti, consul est,
you saw
he) tvhoni
Interrogative.
As
Qiiis.
same pronoun may be used both
Quejn
vidisti
is
Whom
The
man
(literally
the consul.
did you
see f
In the singular, however, the interrogative pronoun has
and quid instead of
quis instead of qui,
used as an adjective
noun. Thus,
Pronoun.
Adjective.
The
that
is,
unless
it
quod, unless
it
is
agrees with some
Quisvenit?
Who is coming?
Qui vir venit?
What man is coming?
interrogative rRONouN has no separate form for the
and quo being regarded as both masbut when used as an adjective, the
feminine forms are the same as in the relative as in
feminine
culine
quis, quern,
and feminine
What
italiae
city is
tJte
cccpital of Italy f
Quae urbs
caput est
246. Exercise. Write a paradigm of the interrogative

pronoun quis, in the singular only. The plural is like that
of qui.
88
BEGINNING LATIN
247. Exercise. 1. What were you saying? 2. At

3. To whom had he
(ad) what town did they arrive?
owed the money ? 4. By whose advice is he returning
to
the city
5.
What
general
Who
withdrawing from
is
?
7. By
man
placed the
whom
standard on the top of the hill ? 9. To whom was the
money given? 10. What was the height of the mound
winter quarters
6.
Avas the signal given
which you
248.
Avere
gave the signal
AVhat
S.
making ?
Qiiulam,
Aliqiiis,
The pronoun
Qnisque,
declined like quis (see 245),

one^ some,
except that in the singular feminine and in the neuter
aliquis, sorne
plural
it
adjective
is
has aliqua and not aliquae. When used as an

has aliqui instead of aliquis, and aliquod instead
it
of aliquid.
Thus,
Aliquod flumen, Some rive7\

Aliquis appropinquat, Some one
is
approaching.
Quidam, a certain, a certain one, some (but more definite
than
aliquis), is
-dam added;
declined like the relative qui with the suffix
the neuter singular
])ut in
it
has both quid-
dam and quoddam, the former being substantive and the

latter adjective.
Also, m is changed to n before d, giving
quendam, quandam, quorundam, quarundam, instead of quemdam, etc.
Quisque, each, each one, everyone, is formed hj adding
the suffix -que to
que, as
quis.
has adjective forms quique, quod-
It
well as the pronominal forms quisque, quidque.
The feminine forms quaeque,

only.
Compare 245.
249. Exercise.
3.
To
1.
each footsoldier.
are used as adjectives
certain city.
4.
^
etc.,
Everyone
Singular.
'
2.
Avill
Of some
come.
5.
hills.
Cer-
PRONOUNS, CONTINUED
tain ships
is
some
were seen
in the sea in the winter.
soklier's sword.
danger by
89
7.
6.
a certain general.
8.
He
all
praised each boy.
The enemy had taken some part of the town. 10.

have chosen a certain Gaul [as] leader of our forces.
9.
Amcient
This
They were defended from
We
Wak Galley
LESSON XLVIII.
PRONOUNS, CONTINUED.
quidam, and quisque
Write
paradigms
251. The Pronoun Ipse,
Ipse, ipsa, ipsum, self,

is
Pronoun.
except that
It is declined like
ille,
instead of -ud in the neuter singular.
252. Exercise.
aliquis,
myself^
called the Intensive
yourself^ himself themselves^ etc.,
lar only.
of
the last one in the singular only.
Write a paradigm of
See
ipse,
it
has -um
231.
in the singu-
90
BEGINNING LATIN
253. The Pronoun Sul.

themselves; but
itself^
it
Sui
means of himself^ herself^

from ipse accord-
differs in its use
ing to a principle given in the next section.
Learn the
following paradigm
There
is
Gen.
sui
Dat.
Ace.
Abl.
sibi
se or sese
se or sese
no nominative, and the singular and plural are
the same.
254. Use of Ipse and
Siil,
Ipse is
used for emphasis.
Thus,
Ipse
Sui
is
to the
of
its
He
said
(it)
legem
vidi,
J saw the king himself.
dixit,
Ijfsuiii
himself.
used only as a reflexive pronoun that

;
same person or thing
own
sentence.
It is
as that
is, it
named by the
refers
subject
only used in the third person.
Puella se laudavit, The girl praised herself.

sibi dant, TJiey give gifts to themselves.
Consul sat memor n5n est, The consul is not thoughtful of
Dona
himself.
The two pronouns may be combined.

Captivus ipse sese liberavit,
The
Thus,
jjrisoner
himself freed
dm self.
255. Exercise. Copy and complete:

1.
myself did this.
from
(a)
slavery.
self.
4.
We ourselves
5.
Why
3.
2.
He
The
citizens will save themselves
sent-away the tenth legion
it-
have seen the army-on-the-march.
does your king never restrain himself?
256. Reflexive of tlie First and Second Persons.

There is no separate reflexive pronoun of the first or sec-
TRONOUNS, CONTINUED
ond person.
are used.
91
Instead, the personal pronouns, ego
and
tu,
Thus,
We do not praiiê ourselves, Nos

You praise yoavself, Te laudas.
(ace.)
n5n laudamus.
257. Exercise. The Latin for / retreat is me recipid,

I take 7ny self hack. Write a paradigm of the pres-
WiQi'iiWy
ent tense of this verb, inchiding the proper reflexive form

number and person as exjDlained in 256.
for each
258. Exercise.
treated.
3,
of a mountain.
treated.
5.
4.
shall
1.
The tenth
retreat.
2.
We
had
re-
legion itself retreated to-the-foot-
You
yourselves will have often re-
The infantry
(footsoldiers) themselves
were
retreating.
liESSON XLIX.
PRONOUNS, CONTINUED.
259. The Pronoun
iste, ista, istud, is
IRREGULAR ADJE)CTIVES.
Iste.
declined like
The demonstrative jnônoun

ille.
See 231.
It means
(often Avith a scornful application) that-of-yours.

istud opus, that
work of yours;
istis
Thus,
amicis, to those friends
of yours.
260. The Pronoun Idem, Idem, eadem, idem means

It is formed by adding the suffex -dem to the
various forms of is.
The following changes occur
Instead of isdem we have idem.
Instead of iddem we have idem.
the same.
Before -dem,
261. Exercise.
becomes
n, as
earundem.
Write a complete paradigm of idem (see
222).
262. Exercise. 1. That liberty of yours is worse than

our slavery. 2. Those friends of yours have given the
BEGINNING LATIN
92
same advice.
same people.
3.
I will give that advice of yours to the
Those legions of yours are in the same

5. The same commander will lead those troops of
place.
yours out of the camp.
4.
Nine adjectives of the

263. Irreg-ular Adjectives.
and second declensions have the genitive singular of
all genders in -ius and the dative singular of all genders
Otherwise they are regular, except that alius has
in -i.
nominative and accusative singular neuter aliud and
Learn the following list
genitive alius (not al-ilus).
first
alius, other.
alter,
gen. alterius, the other (of two).
solus, alone, only.
totus, tohole.
ullus,
any.
nullus, no, none.

tlnus, one.
gen. utrius, tvhich (of two).
uter,
neuter, gen. neutrius, neither.
The
genitive singular of alius
the genitive singular of

TJnus
may
alter
is
may
rarely found.
Instead,
be used.
be used in the plural to agree with plural
words signifying a single object, such as

in the sense of alone^ a meaning whicii
castra,
it
and
also
shares with
solus.
264. Exercise.
Write paradigms of
alius
and unus,
in the
singular only.
265. Exercise.
other remained.
1.
2.
The tenth
By
holding back the enemy.

this Avliole city.
one year.
6.
By
5.
4.
legion withdrew; the
I was
Freedom has been given to
the aid of this cohort alone
One
3.
general completed that Avar in
Iso defenders were seen
flight alone Ave shall
have
safety.
on the
7.
Which
walls.
of the
athenae
READING lesson:
93
two is braver ? 8. Neither despaired of the satety of the

whole town. 9. They had never h^st any part of their
money. 10. lie wds leading the cohorts of another legion
across some river.
I.ESSON
L.
READING LESSON: ATHENAE.*

lâutae in navigio orae Atticae appropinqnant.
Prl-
mum
hastam auream Minervae spectabunt. Nam statua

deae aedificia oppidi superat. Athenae in tutela Minervae sunt." Olim enim Minerva et Neptunus de oppido certabant.
Neptunus incolls A thenar um eqnum bellicdsum
donavit Minervae donum erat oliva iucunda. Dono suo
Minerva deum sujêravit. Itaque in templo oppidi habitabat et semper habitfibit. Ego numquam statuam pulchram deae spectabo. Sed statua tui, Milrce, oculi mox
delectabuntur, nam cum amlcls tuls in Graeciam migrabitis.
Nam semper KomanI Athenas frequentabunt, quod
Atht'nae magistrae'' litterarum sunt. Olim Athenae
Sed virl
parvae, neque aedificils pulchrls ornatae erant.
;
magnas
Etiam Persae nonniQlIs
strenui divitias
in patiiam
proeliis
meam
portaverunt.
Ciraecos superaverunt.
Post primam Persaruni victoriam incolae Athenarum

etiam dea ex
timid! in Insulam flnitimam navigaverunt
templo emigraverat. Itaque Persae sine pugna in oppidum

penetraverunt et multa aedificia et templa Inflammaverunt.
Sed post victoriam Graecorum incolae remigraverunt et Athenas
aedificils, templis, statuis pulchris
verunt, murls latls et altis firmaverunt.

*
See View of Athens,
}>.
94.
'^
Translate as singular.
orna-
ALIUS
AND ALTER: CORKKLATWK
I.ESSON
ALIUS
LI.
AND ALTER: CORRELATIVE
1.
95
Vtili
USE.
have many books
wliicli
Both Caesar and Cicero were great

men; which-of-the-two was the greater ? 8. Did they liave
any enemies? 4. Neither had the same enemies as
have you seen
2.
which] the other [had].
267. Correlatives.
Latin has the other
Instead of one
alius
Instead of
another^
it
one
tJie
the other alter
the oilier^
alter.
has anotlier
another^
alius.
Instead of some
.
This legion ak)ne will not

one town.
5.
cFestroy the fortifications of
others, it
has others
others, alii
alii,
268. Shortened Expressions,
Instead of one said one
thing, another said another, Latin omits the
first
the sentence, and has only another said anotlier

aliud
'
In the
dixit.
same way, instead
in one direction,
other^s
another direction,
alii in
in another,
of
part of
tiling, alius
some fled
has others fled
it
aliam partem fugerunt, etc.
269.
Exercise.
Alii hoc, alii illud vTdOrunt.

1.
Altera i)uella librds, altera pecuniam laudat.
3. Alii
in aliam regionem venient.
4. Alius
b alio interfectus
2.
est.
5.
Alius bellum, alius pacem timet.
270. Exercise. 1. Some were on the right bank of

on the left. 2. Some withdrew to one
place, others to another.
3. One was cut off from safety
by a wall, but the other found the gate. 4. Courage is
this river, others
'
Tiling
and thmgs can be expressed by the neuter singular and plural
of an adjective (or pronoun), as here shown.
BEGINNING LATIN
96
praised
by some, money by
others.
5.
Some
of the
troops will be taken (led) to one camp, others to another.
271.
Summary
of
Words Meaning- "Other,"
Anothei'
The other (of two)
Others is alii.
is alius.
The others, the
is alter.
rest, is ceteri, or reliqui.
272. Exercise. 1. Others praise Caesar Cicero does

not praise him. 2. Are not the others cut off from flight ?
3. The tenth legion was stationed on the other bank of
the river. 4. Soon another legion will come to the same
;
river.
5.
Have
the rest of the
LESSON
enemy withdrawn ?
LII.
THE FOURTH DECLENSION.

273. Review Exercise. 1. Some saw the general alone,
saw both the general and his lieutenant. 2. There
were no defenders in the whole city. 3. One completes
the work, another is praised. 4. Some heard one [thing],
others another.
5. You will never have any liberty withothers
out a war.
274. The Fourth Declension. Most nouns of the

Fourth Declension are masculine. There are a few feminines and neuters. Masculines and feminines have the
following endings
THE FOURTH DECLENSION
The
djitive
instead of
97
and ablative plural sometimes end in

So always in arcus, low^ quercus,
-ibus.
-ubus
oak,
tribus, tribe,
275. Exercise.
276. Neuters.
as follows
Write a paradigm of
exercitus,
m., army.
Neuters of the fourth declension end
BEGINNING LATIN
98
LESSON
LIII.
THE FIFTH DECLENSION.

1.
Eoman army they had been

had the
the arrival of the
[right of] approach to (ad) the senate ?
his right
Caesar's
By
cut off from supplies.
hand the
soldier
army were both
will soon see the
had thrown a
2.
3.
spear.
infantry and cavalry.
Who
With
4.
5.
In
You
approach of the enemy's right wing.
281. The Fifth Declension, lôuns of this declension

are feminine, with the exception of dies, day^ and meridies,
nooii^ which are masculine.
In the singular, dies is sometimes feminine especially when
rather than any particular day.
;
fifth
declension are as follows.
N. V.
means a period of time

The terminations of the
it
THE FIFTH DECLENSION

1. What things have you in your right
The line-of-battle was drawn up in a great
plain.
3. All came under (into) his protection.
4. The
commonwealth is in danger. 5. We have lost that hope
284. Exercise.
hand?
2.
which we had.
of safety
things.
7.
Liberty
G.
is
the best of
all
The Gauls exchanged (gave among them8. For four days they were fortifying
For one whole day the soldiers were drawn
selves) a pledge.
the cam}).
up on a
has
9.
})lain
fleets
before the city.
10.
The commonwealth
and armies (express in two ways).
lUo die magnum proelium erat in GalOmnes cojnae hostium mstructae erant in planitie.
285.
lia.
Exercise.
Nostri pro castrls in acie constiterant.

publicae in eorum virtute posita erat.
civium,
magna
nostri'
et
f ugae
spes rei
erat fides
Mox quidam signum dedit,
spes hostium.
impetum
Omnis
Magna
aciem Gallorum fecerunt.
in
lUl
se dederunt, sed nostri fortes viri reverterunt in
urbem quam servaverant,
Laudem
verterat.
dedit imperator
et
illls
ab omnibus laudatl sunt.

quorum virtutem animad-
AliquI in proelio interfecti erant, sed hi pauci
Hostium autem maxima erat caedes.

pro salute sua flores in arls deorum ponunt.
erant.
286. EuLE XIX.
Duration of time and extent
Feminae
of space
are expressed by the accusative.

'
Nostri, vestri, etc., are regularly
men, troops, friends,
used as nouns with the meaning our
etc.
Box OF Books
100
BEGINNING LATIN
I.ESSON
L,IV.
NUMERALS.
287. Review Exercise. 1. The army will be drawn
up in a plain. 2. You will be cut off from these things.
3. In one day he will have saved the commonwealth.
4.
Caesar gave his protection to the hostages. 5, Others
v/ere held back by fear of these things.
288.
Niiiiierals.
The numerals
one^
two^
three,
etc.,
are called Cardinal Numerals.
The numerals ^r^?5,
second, third, etc., are called Ordi-
nal Numerals.
The
cardinals,
from four to a hundred
inclusive, are not
declined.
The declension
See 263.
Duo, tivo,
is
of unus, one, has been alrsady given.
declined as follows
M.
F.
N.
Nom.
duo
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Abl.
duorum
duarum
dudrum
duobus
duos (duo)
du5bus
duabus
duas
duabus
duobus
duo
duobus
duae
Tres, th7'ee, is declined as follows
duo
NUMERALS
In the singular (that
is,
Avhen
101
it
means
oiie
th(nisand\
an indeclinable adjective, and does not affect the

Thus,
case of the word which it limits.
mille
is
Mille militr.s venient,

thousand soldiers will co7ne.
Cum mille militibds venit, He came with a thousand soldiers.
In the plural, however (that is, when more thousands

than one are meant), milia is a noun, and is followed by the
genitive.
Thus,
Duo milia
sands of
Cum
Two thousand
soldiers (literally,
thou-
soldiers).
tribus milibus milit ?fii^ venit,
sand
Duo
milityf/w.
He came
luith three thou-
soldiers.
milia passu^f />i progrediuntur,
(literally,
They advance for two miles
thousands of iâces).
In the plural mille
is
Nom., Ace.
declined as follows
BEGINNING LATIN
102
Multiples of ten, from thirty
292. Multiples of Ten.

end in
to ninety inclusive,
number
is
1.
lirst
part of the
Thus, quinquaginta
easily recognized.
^^ fifty.
Give English equivalents of the
293. Exercise.
lowing
The
-ginta.
fol-
Trlginta.
ginta.
5.
2.
Octoginta.
Sexaginta.
6.
3.
Septuaginta.
4.
Nona-
Quadraginta.
294. Between the Tens.
Kumbers from twenty-one
to twenty-seven, thirty-one to thirty-seven, etc., are
formed
Thus,
on the same principle as in English.

thirty -two, triginta duo;
forty -four, quadraginta quattuor.
Twenty-eight, twenty-nine,
etc.,
are expressed accord-
ing to the principle of 291, " two-from-thirty," "onefrom-thirty," etc.
formed
But
ninety-eight
Besides this, just as in English
and twenty
unit
and ninety-nine are
like ninety-seven^ etc.
first,
duo
we sometimes say " four

may put the
" for twenty-four, so in Latin Ave
connecting
et viginti,
When any
it
to the other
by
et.
Thus,
two and twenty or twenty-two.
part of such a
number is declinable,
it
agrees
with its noun, whichever of the above forms be employed.

Unus in such a case is singular in form. Thus,
tjnus et viginti (or viginti unus) homines, twenty -one men.
Cum triginta duabus navibus, or cum duabus et triginta navibus,
ivitli
tliirty-two ships.
295. Exercise.
1.
Twenty-five paces.
2.
Thirty-four
Of ninety-nine miles. 4. In forty -two years.

paces.
6. Seventy5, The legion has marched eighty-six miles.
7. For sixty-three girls.
8.
Of fiftyseven bridges.
9. A thousand horsemen marched twentyeight laws.
3.
one miles.
10.
With
three thousand infantry.
KKADING LESSON
LESSON
103
L.V.
READING LESSON:
lUPPITER.
luppiter rex erat deoruni hominumque.

fuit Iiino,
reglna deorum
filia
lovis
Minerva
lovis uxor
lovl
erat.
a Graecis et a Komanis templa praeclara consecrfita sunt,

loveni Komani Patrem appellabant, quod animo patrio
mundum
et
genus hominum gubernabat. A love tempora aestatis hiemisque sepa-
Ex Olympo
rata sunt.
alto
luppiter agros imbribus
fulminibus
creabat,
re-
scelera
hominum malorum cast! g-abat,

bonis vltam beatani ddnabat.
Hospites in tutela lovis erant.
Olympia, locus sacer Peloponnesl, in rlpa dextra Alphel
Locus temaliorumque deorum et certaminibus Olympiis
fluminis sita erat.

plis
lovis
clarus
Campus
erat.
Ol3^mpiae
aedificiis
nemore
latus
amoeno,
praeclarls,
statuls
deorum ornatns
Etiam hominum me-
splendidls
erat.
In tub
Temple of Jupitek
moria
statuls
servabatur.
pulchrls
con-
Yictoribus enim
certaminum statuae aeneae vel marmoreae praemia roboris

pedum erantr. Sed lovis statua, opus Pliidiae
et celeritatis
artificis,
dine,
cetera artificum opera pulchritudine, magnitu-
maiestate superabat.
Splendorem auri
et eboris
BEGINNING LATIN
104
quae in ilia statua erant, ocull hominuni vix tolerabant.

Caput augustum, ocull seven, barba et capilli densi, sceptruni aureum, fulmen splendidum, sella regia potestatem
divinam et maiestatem patris deoruin hominumque significabant.
LESSON
LVI.
NUMERALS, CONTINUED.
296. Review Exercise. 1. There were two lines of
2. There are
battle drawn up (plup.) in that huge plain.
3. Sixty-eight is one
four things which the people fear.
Eighty-three is two more than
4.
less than sixty-nine.
eighty-one.
5. Fifty -four is twenty-five less than seventynine.
297. Multiples of a Hundred. One hundred is centum,

Multiples of a hundred end in -centi, -ae, -a,
and -genti, -ae, -a, and are declined as adjectives of the
first and second declension.
indeclinable.
298. Exercise.
Give English equivalents for the
fol-
lowing.
1.
5.
Octingentl.
Nongenti.
6.
2.
Trecenti.
Septingentl.
3.
7.
Sescenti.
4.
Quadringentl.
Ducentl.
8.
Quln-
genti.
299. Exercise.
1,
We have marched twenty-six
miles.
2. There were three hundred and thirty -five men
and four hundred and fifty-one women in the town.
3. There were five hundred and ninety-seven boys and
six hundred and sixty-one girls.
4. There were seven
hundred and fifty-seven slaves. 5. And so all the people
were two thousand, eight hundred and one.
ADVERBS
FOKMATION AND COMPARISON
105
300. Ordiuals. These are declined as adjectives of the

and second declensions. Most of them are easily
Thus,
recognized by their likeness to the cardinals.
eleventh is undecimus, from undecim, eleven.
first
301. Exercise.
ing
1.
5.
Give English equivalents for the follow-
Quartus.
Octavus.
Septimus.
2.
6.
Secundus.
Decimus.
3.
7.
Quintus.
Nonus.
Tertius.
Primus.
9.
10. Sextus.
302. Exercise.
1.
A third part of the state withdrew.
3.
On the second day, some ships were

Was the fourth legion much braver
1.
The
2.
4.
8.
sixth night
was
seen in the
than the
like the seventh (dat.).
sea.
fifth ?
5.
The
eighth legion was braver than the ninth, but the ninth Avas
less
T.
brave than the tenth. 6. Did you see the first attack ?
was the third king of the Romans? 8. There
Who
were seven kings of Rome. 9. The seventh, who was the

10. Twenty -three
worst, was called Tarquinius Super bus.
horses were seen in a large field by these two boys.
LESSON
ADVERBS:
LVII.
FORMATION AND COMPARISON.
303. Adverbs. Adverbs are words used

and other adverbs. Thus,
to limit verbs,
adjectives,
Limits verb.
Limits adjective.
Bene facit, He does

Minus idoneus est
well.
locus,
The place
is
less suitable.
Limits adverb.
Satis bene
well.
facit,
He
does sufficiently
BEGINNING LATIN
106
Many
304. Formation.
jective stems.
From
adverbs are formed from ad-
and second
by substituting -e for the
adjectives of the first
declension, adverbs are formed
termination of the nominative singular masculine.
From
Adjective,
lat us,
Adverb.
lat e,
-i-.
wide.
widely, far
and
tuide.
adjectives of the third declension adverbs are
formed by adding
in
Thus,
to the stem,
-ter
which regularly ends
Thus,
Stems
Adjective,
felix, fortu7iate.
Stem.
Adverb.
felici-
in -nt-
felici ter, forttuiately.
drop the
final
-ti-
Adjective.
prMens, prudent.
Stem.
Adverb.
prudenti-
In like
pruden ter {wot pnlde)iti
manner
audax,
hold,
Thus,
of the stem.
ter),
prudently.
has audac
(not
ter
au-
daci ter), holdly.
The
accusative and the ablative of both nouns and
adjectives are sometimes used as adverbs.
Thus, vulgo,
G07n7nonly, ablative of valgus, populace
easily, accu-
sative of
facilis,
accusative of
to
easy ;
pars,
; facile,
partim (see 164), iKirtly,
an old
part.
305. Exercise. Form adverbs in -e and -ter, according

the method explained in 304, from the following
adjectives.
1.
I)
Certus, certain.
rave.
4.
2.
Acer, sharp.
Yehemens, impetuous.
5.
3.
Fortis,
Gravis, heavy, severe.
306. Coinparison. The comparative of an adverb has

same ending as the accusative singular neuter of
the comparative of an adjective. Thus,
the
longe, far;
comparative longius, farther.
ADVERBS
The
FORMATION AND COMPARISON
superlative of an adverb
an adjective, with
-e
is
instead of the
107
like the superlative of

-us
of the nominative
Thus, the superlative of longe would be
singular.
longissime, farthest.
307. Exercise.
brother.
(Ud
it
2.
very
1.
You come oftener than your

known very widely. 3. We
You will reach (arrive at) the place
This thing was

easily.
4.
with-more-ditiiculty.
5.
We
shall
complete
the
work
very carefully.
308. Irregular Adverbs. Learn the following list of

adverbs which show some irregularity in comparison:
diu,
long (in time); diutius, longer; diutissime, longest.
multum (with comparatives, multo), much; magis, more;

maxime, most.
bene, tuell; melius, better; optime, best.
309. Exercise. 1. Bene nieum opus facio, tu tuum

2. Illo die Romani
longe melius, ilia simm optime.
diutius quam priore pugnaverunt.
3.
Satis acriter
hostes impetum in legionem fecerunt. 4. Fortiter autem
nostrl
runt.
impetum eorum
5.
sustinent et omnis in
Dill et acerrime pugnaverunt.
6.
fugam dedeMultum tu
autem maxime. 7. Hoc opus

8. Multo aegrius hostes in
fugam dedimus.
Planities est locus non maxime
9.
idoneus castris. 10. Ego saepissime eum vidi, tu minus
saeqe, ille autem multo saepius quam nos.
pugnavisti, magis ego,
ille
facillime a nobis factum
erit.
BEGINNING LATIN
108
LESSON
LVIII.
THE LOCATIVE CASE.

1.
Some do this far more
than others. 2. We do not see you often enough.
3. We withstood the attack of the cavalry with difficulty.
5. My friend
4. The signals were seen far and wide.
remained longer than I.
easily
311. The Locative, Instead of the construction given

names of towns and small islands, as well as the
nouns domus, liome^ and rus, the country^ are put in the
in 53, ,
locative case to indicate the place where.
The regular form
of the locative
is
the same as the
dative, exce])t in the singular of the second declension,
where
it is
like the genitive.
locative case
may
also
end in
In the third declension, the

-e
in the singular.
The locative of domus is domi, at home.

The locative of rus is ruri, in the country
from the
(as distinguished
city).
312. Other Expressions of Place.
The same
Avords
are put in the accusative without a preposition to denote
the place Avhither (see 139), and in the ablative Avithout

a preposition to denote the place Avhence. (See 133.)
There are more people in the city

There Avere many thousand citizens
in Rome.
3. From what country have you come ?
AYe
have come from Greece.
4. To Avhat city have Ave
come ? To Corinth. 5. In Carthage Avere many enemies
of the Roman people.
6. Our friends Avere not at home.
313. Exercise.
than in the town.
1.
2.
SOME IRREGULAR NOUNS
The Gauls sent

came from Gaul
uiiibassadors to Ital}^
to
Kome.
They
9.
summer.
to the country next
home by the consul.

many altars. 12. There was
lU9
8.
Ambassadors
will send the chilchxm
The messengers were

At Athens there were
man at Cures who became
10.
sent
11.
(was made) king of the Romans.
314.
Graecia
Exercise.
Rom am
1.
Ilure
in
missi erant
4.
5.
315. Rule XX.
3.
Athenis sunt,
R(")ma mfixima urbs
Graeciam revertent.
Galliam venient.
urbem
legati.
veniet.
2.
Mox Roma
unde mox
E
in
in
est in Italia.
The place from which is denoted by
the
ablative with ab, ex, or de.
Rule XXI. With names of towns and small islayids, and

words domns and ras^ the place tvhere is denoted by the
the
locative; the place to which^
sition; the place
by the accusative without a prepothe ablative without a prepo-
from which, by
sition.
LESSON
LIX.
SOME IRREGULAR NOUNS. THIRD DECLENSION:

GENDER RULES.
Caesar in the
city.
2.
1.
Cicero
Some came
is
in the countr}^,
here from one city,
3. Why did the troops withdraw

have been sent from Corinth to Carare coming from Athens to Italy.
others from another.
from
Rome ?
thage.
5.
We
4.
317. Declension of Dotmis, Domus, house, home, behaving all the forms of the fourth declension, has
in addition the locative, dative, and ablative singular, and
the genitive and accusative plural of the second declensides
sion.
no
BEGINNING LATIN
A Roman
318. Exercise.
is
Villa
Write a paradigm of domus.
The gender
feminine.
319. Declension of Vis, Vis in the singular means

The
In the plural it means strengtli,
foree, violence.
gender is feminine. It is declined as follows.
SINGULAR.
THIRD declension: gender rules

vocative, the nominative
plural
it is
111
being used instead.
In the
declined as follows.
:N'.
v.
dei, dii, di
CJen.
deorum, deum
Dat.
Ace.
Abl.
deis, diis, dis
deos
deis, diis, dis.
321. Declension of Seneoo.

With the exception of
the nominative singular, senex, old man, is declined as
though the stem Avere sen-. It is of the third declension.
322. Exercise.
Write a paradigm of
323. Declension of
Iter,
neuter of the third declension.
Iter,
senex.
jommey, march,
All
its
is a
forms, except the
nominative and accusative singular, are from the stem

itiner-.
324. Exercise.
Write a paradigm of
325. Declension of luppiter,

declined as follows
N. V.
iter.
luppiter,
Jupiter,
is
BEGINNING LATIN
112
Feminine are nouns ending in

-as, -es not increasing in the genitive,
ceded by a consonant.
-is, -us, -ys, -x, -s
pre-
lêuter are nouns ending in

-1,
-e, -a, -n, -ar, -ur,
-us
327. Exceptions to Rules of Gender. ^Nâmes of males

names of females feminine, independent
Thus rex, hing^ is
of any rule of gender by termination.
masculine, although by the rule it should be feminine.
There are very many exceptions to the rules given in
Memorize the following
326.
Xouns in -do and -go, and abstract and collective nouns
are masculine and
in
are feminine.
-15,
328. Exercise. Make a table, classifying the following

nouns according to the rales just given.
consuetudo,
liahit.
labor, toil.
agger,
mound.
altitude, lieight.
clamor, shout.
centurio, centurion (an officer).
marsh.
oratio, speech.
paliis,
celeritas, swiftness.
profectio, departure.
mors, death.
pax, peace.
329. Exercise. Give the adjectives in the following

sentences their proper terminations, and translate.
1.
luppiter pater deorum et magn- rex
hominum
appel-
3.
2. Agmen long- hostium a nostrls videbatur.
Corpus huius animalis parv- est. 4. Turres nostr- altiores
quam hostium erant. 5. Hieme noctes sunt longissim-.
labatur.
Stilus
READING LESSON
113
L.ESSON LX.
READING LESSON: AESCULAPIUS.
PropinquI olim ad
Aesculfipius deus mediclnae erat.
templum
plorabant.
taverunt.
commeaverunt, et del auxilium iiiiIn templo statuam marmoream del specOculls

Figura del baculo sustentabatur.
Aesculfipi
placidis benevolentia del
si-
gn ilicabatur. PropinquI turn

gallum, porcmn,
portaverunt.
agnum
Ita
ap-
victimis
pulchris Aesculilpium placabant.
Ara
erat,
quae ab
del
pomis
orniita
aliis iani
data
erant qui in templo fuerant

et deuni imploraverant. Pro-
pinquI bestias immolaverunt;
deuni
Turn
delectabant.
deum imploraverunt.
noster aegrotus
est.
"
Avus
Medicus
autem morbum non sanavit

itaque te donis et votis pla-
Avus semper pius

dona nostra non repuTu aegrotis semper
diabis.
benlgnus fuisti; animo procavimus.
fuit
morbum avi sanabis!

avum hoc periculo llbera-
pitio
Aesculapius
Si
templum tuum etiam postea donIs pulchris ornabiDeo vota horum propinquorum grata erant, avum
aegrdtum sanavit. Tum omnes deum laudaverunt qui
vim morbl malam superaverat avumque suum sanaverat.
veris,
mus."
BEGINKING LATIN
114
LESSON
L.XI.
DEPONENT VERBS.
POSSUM.
330. Review Exercise. 1. The habit of toil is good

men. 2. The mound was eio:hteen feet hio'h. 3. With
might and main (" highest strength," summae vires) the okl
men withstood the attack. 4. By forced (great) marches
Caesar came to the town. 5. The gods hear the shouts
for
of those
who
are in the battle.
331. Deponent Verbs. Verbs which are passive in

form but active in meaning are called Deponent. Thus,
Conor means / avi trying.
There are only three principal parts of deponent verbs,
since the perfect active stem does not appear in the passive.
These are as follows
:
The first person singular of the present indicative.

The ])resent infinitive.
The first person singular of tlie perfect indicative.
(ci)
{]))
ic)
Thus,
Conor, conari, conatus sum.
These give us the two stems
present, cona-,
and supine,
conat-.
332. The Verb Possum,

that
is, it is
made by
which means
able.
This
is
Whenever the form
begin with s, the final t of

possum and not potsum but
;
pot- is
pot-,
sum would
changed to
Write a paradigm
and future tenses.
333. Exercise.
of
s.
Thus,
potes, poterant, etc.
Possum means / am able^ or lean.

/ was ahle, or / could.
ent, imperfect,
a compound of sum
prefixing to sum the syllable
The imperfect means

of possum in the pres-
DEPONENT VERBS.
POSSUM
334. Perfect System of Possum,

f is (li*()|)pe(l
potui,
In
115
tlie perfect, tlie
not potful.
335. Exercise. Write

and future perfect
perfect,
paradigm of the perfect, plu-
of possum.
336. Use otTossufii,
Possum is followed by the present

as in English.
Thus,
infinitive,
can come
The endings
ctble
to
come, Venire possum.
of the present infinitive, active
are as follows.
gation in the
= I mn
ISôtice particularly
passivê.
PASSIVE.
ACTIVE.
Conj.
Conj.
Conj.
Conj.
and passive,
that of the third conju-
I.
-are
-ari,
as laudari.
II.
-ere
-eri,
as
III.
-ere
-i,
lY.
-ire
-iri,
monerL
as mitti.
as mUniri.
337. Other Verbs Taking- an Infinitive.

Like post7'y^ aUern^^ and debeo, oicgJU, are followed by
sum, Conor,
the present infinitive.
338. Exercise.
to follow you.
men.
4.
1.
3.
We shall be able
They had not been able to see the old

make forced marches. 5. You
6.
He
will have been able to en-
They cannot choose a commander.

9. The line
could not be drawn up. 10. They will be able
courage his [men].
We could
of battle
2.
Caesar could not
ought to try to come.
8.
I<3an set-out.
to retreat to a hill.
work which
7.
not draw up the line of battle.
11. I
was trying
have not been able to

[to do].
What
12.
finish the
The work ought
can you say
to be finished in time.
13.
ing can be said.
ought to try to see the city where
Caesar dwelt.
15. I
14.
Noth-
116
BEGINNING LATIN
339. Exercise. 1. Conarl debemiis boni esse. 2. In

omnis regiones, Caesar, te sequemur.
3. Yos ducere pos
sum
in eas terras in qnas inulti venire cunatl
non potuerunt.
4.
In terrain venire non possum in qua
5.
sunt, sed
Mllites decimae legionis coliortabatur.
mi amice,
tti,
habitas.
LESSON
LXII.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD: PRESENT TENSE. HORTATORY

SUBJUNCTIVE AND SUBJUNCTIVE OF PURPOSE.
340. The Subjunctive Mood.
In certain expressions,
the nature of which will be explained later, Latin uses a
mood called the subjunctive, instead of the indicativa

The subjunctive mood has four tenses only present, im-
perfect, perfect,
and pluperfect.
341. Formation of
present subjunctive
is
tlie Present Subjunctive.

The
formed by adding person-endings
to the present stem, altered as follows
Conj.
Change the stem-vowel
I.
-a-
to
-e-;
as
ame
(pres-
Conj. IL
ent stem ama-).

Add -a- to the stem-vowel -e-, shortened from -eaccording to 12, ^; as monea tiir (present stem
Conj. III.
Change the stem-vowel
mone-).
Conj.
-e- to -a-; as rega tis (present stem rege-).

Add -a- to the stem-vowel -i-, shortened from -ias in Conj. II ; as audia mini (present stem
IV
audi-).
A
the
first
simple
first
way
to do this
is
as follows.
Change the
person singular present indicative to
conjugation,
-a-
in the second, third,
-e-
-6
of
in the
and fourth, and
riORTATOKY AND PURPOSE SUBJUNCTIVE
add the regular person-endings, using -m

person singular of the active.
I.
This
-t,
or
-a-
-nt,
342.
The
ame
in;
or
-e-
monea
II.
in
117
the
first
Thus,
ni; III. rega
m; IV. audia m.
will be shortened to -a- or
-e-
before -m,
as above.
Present Subjunctive of Sum and rossuni.

sum is formed by adding
present subjunctive of
person-endings to
341.
si-.
That of possum
The stem-vowel
is
is
shortened as in
formed according to the method
explained in 332.
343. Exercise. Write paradigms of the present suband passive, of laudo, timeo, mitto, and audid,
junctive, active
and of the present subjunctive active of sum and of possum.
344. Meaning- of the Subjunctive. Sometimes the

Latin subjunctive is rendered by an English indicative,
sometimes by the aid of an auxiliary verb, as inay^ mighty
let^ etc.
The translation in any given case depends
ON THE KIND OF CLAUSE IN WHICH THE SUBJUNCTIVE IS
FOUND.
345. Principal and Dependent Clauses.
Some
of
the uses of the subjunctive are found in principal clauses
which are complete sentences in themMost subjunctives, however, are found in dej)endselves.
ent clauses that is, in clauses connected to the main
sentence by a relative or interrogative pronoun, or by
conjunctions other than and, for, hut, or, and their
that
is,
in clauses
equivalents.
346. The Hortatory Subjun<5tive.
The present
sub-
junctive in a simple sentence or in a principal clause
may
be translated by the auxiliary
Legati pacem i>eâtf, Liet
tlie
let.
Thus,
ambassadors seek peace.
BEGINNING LATIN
118
The subjunctive when

Subjunctive, because
so used
is
called the Hortatory
urges or exhorts to an action.
it
Ne
used instead of non as the negative of this construction.

Thus,
Ne veniamus, Let us not come,
is
The Sulyunctive of Purpose.
34t7,
by the conjunction
ut ne), tJiat
clause
con-
ut,
be connected to another clause

that, in order that, negative ne (not
Thus,
7iot, lent.
may
taining a subjunctive
Legates mittemus nt pacem petant, Wc shall send amlassadors that theij niny seek peace.
Venid ne hoe facias, I am coming that you may not do this ;
01% lest you do this.
The
subjunctive so
called the Subjunctive

pose, because
used
of
is
Pur-
states the pur-
it
pose or aim of the subject in

the principal clause.
348. Exercise.
ing
2.
let
He
attack
is
He is com-
1.
him attack the town.

coming that he may
the
leave troops
the citizens.
town.
;
let
4.
troops that they
the citizens.
5.
3.
shall
them defend
I
shall
leave
may
defend all
The general is
waging war; let him save the

state.
6. The general is waging
war that he may save the state.
7. The defenders are throwing
javelins
let not the town be
taken.
8. They are throwing
javelins that the town may not
;
soldier with pilum
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
IMPERFECT TENSE
119
be taken. 9. I am giving money to the men let them

not hinder us. 10. I am giving tiie men much money
lest they hinder us.
;
Mllites sunt fortes.

1.
2.
Mllites
349. Exercise.
3. Imperator mllites laudat, ut fortes sint.
sint fortes.
5. Imperator
4. Yos, mllites, laudabo, ut fortes sitis.
nos laudabit, ut fortiter pugnare possimus.
350. Rule XXII.

in the
first
mand.
The present subjunctive may he used

an exhortation or com-
or third person to express
The negative
is
ne.
may he expressed hy the suhjuncintroduced hy utj positive, or ne, negative.
Rule XXIII.
tive
Purpose
L.ESSON
liXIII.
THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD: IMPERFECT TENSE.

351. Expression of Purpose in English. In English,
Thus, instead
is often expressed by the infinitive.
purpose
of saying
/ am
we
comifig that
I inaij
/ am coming
to see you.
see you,
should say
This, however,
must not be imitated in Latin. The transabove sentences would be the same
lation of both the
Venio ut
te
videam.
Use the EngUsh infinitive in translating

the Latin subjunctive of purpose whenever possible.
352. Exercise.
1.
Ne
mllites impedifimus.
impediamus.
3.
Aciem pro
2.
Ilaec dlco ne mllites
castris instruat.
4.
legatum mittet ut copias pro castris instruat.

tem faciamus ut imperator legionem traducat.
tor
Impera5. Pon-
BEGINNING LATIN
120
353. The Imperfect Subjunctive.

This tense is
formed by adding the syllable -re- to the present stem,
followed by person-endings as in the present tense. A
simple way to accomplish this (except with deponent
verbs) is to add person-endings directly to the present infinitive active.
Thus, amare gives amare m,
etc.
354. Exercise. Write paradigms of the imperfect subjunctive active and passive of laudo, timeo, mitto, audio, and
capio.
355. Tense of the Subjunctive. In the subjunctive

must be employed when
is in any tense which
principal
clause
the verb of the
of purpose, the imperfect tense
Thus,
denotes past time.
They came
me
to see
me {=
that they might see me), Venerunt ut
viderent.
After any tense denoting present or future time, the

present subjunctive must be used, as already noticed.
356. Exercise. 1. We did not come to learn this fact.

The troops advanced to join battle Avith the Roman
3. We were throwing missiles to keep back the
cavalry.
enemy from the camp. 4. I shall give a signal that the
2.
chiefs of the senate
may
come-together.
5.
He will not be
able to understand these things.
357. Imperfect Subjunctive of Sum and Possum

of sum is formed by adding
person-endings to esse-. That of possum does not follow
the principle previously laid down, being formed by adding person-endings to posse-. Observe that the infinitive
has the same peculiarity, being posse (not potesse).
,
The imperfect subjunctive
INDIRECT QUESTIONS
121
Write paradigms of the imperfect sub-
358. Exercise.
junctive of sum and possum.
359. Exercise. 1. Imperator aciein mstruxit, ut proelium committere posset. 2. Numquam tela conieci ut te
perterrere possem.
3.
Convenimus ut civitatem servare
Equitatus paulo longius progressus erat, ne

hostes impetum in latus apertuni nostrl exercitus facere
possemus.
possent.
4.
5.
Haec omnia
dixl, milites, ut fortes essetis,
civitjltenique servare possetis.
300. Exercise.
1. In the first sentence of 359, change

change the tense of posset according to
Make similar changes in the subjunc 355, and-translate.
tives of the other sentences, after the principal verbs have
been altered as indicated below. 2. Change conieci to coni-
instruxit to instruit,
ciam.
3.
Change convenimus
progressus erat to progressus
to conveniamus.
erit.
5.
Change
4.
Change
dixi to dicimus.
L.ESSON LXIV.
'
INDIRECT QUESTIONS.
In the two independent
361. Indirect Questions.

sentences
WJio is coming?
will
tell
you,
Who is coming f is a Direct Question. If, however, we

combine the two sentences so as to make the question a
dependent clause, as in
/ will
tell
you tvho
is
coming^
dependent interrogative clause, tv/io is coining, is called

an Indirect Question. As has already been seen, direct
questions have their verbs in the indicative. Indirect questhis
BEGINNING LATIN
122
have their verbs in the subjunctive.
tions
Thus, the
first
sentence above would be

Quis venit ? Tibi dicam ;
while the second would be

Tibi dicam quis veniat.
Follow
this principle carefully in the next Exercise, ob-
serving the rule for the tense of the subjunctive given in
355.
us
362. Exercise. 1. Why was he coming ? 2. He told

why he was coming. 3. Who was following us ? 4.
We
know (not knoiv, nescio) who was following

are you going? 6. They will ask (rogo)
Where
us.
you (ace.) where you are going. 7. Where am I coming
from {where
from, unde). 8. I will not tell them
did not
5.
where
out
I
10.
am coming
from.
9.
Why
were they setting
They did not understand why they were
setting
out.
363. Exercise. 1. Quis est ? Non tibi dicam quis sit.

Ubi eras ? Non mihi dixisti ubi esses. 3. Dixit nobis
cur venire non posset. 4. Tibi dicere non possum cur non
5. Scisne, amice, quo
saepius veniam ut te videam.
2.
venias ?
364. Exercise. After changing the principal verbs of

363 as indicated below, make the necessary changes in the
was done in 360, and translate. 1. Change

dixisti
2. Change eras to es
nescio to nescivi.
Change dixit to dixerit. 4. Change possum to
Change Scis to Sciebas.
subjunctive, as
est
to erat
to dices.
3.
poteram.
5.
365. EuLE
the subjunctive.
XXIY. An
indirect question has its verb in
'
'
READING LESSON
123
I.ESSON LXV.
READING LESSON: GALLIA ANTIQUA.
Gains lulius Caesar, clarissimus imperator Eomanus
librum de bello Gallico scrlpsit, quod ipse in Gallia gesserat. Ex hoc libro haec
de Gallia discimus.
Gallia est omnis divisa
Unani
partes tres.
earum partium incolunt
Aliam partem
Belgae.
incolunt AquitanL Tertiam partem ii incolunt
in
qui ipsorum lingua

tae,
""
Cel-
Latina lingua Galli
appellantur.
Ill
omnes
Institutis,' legi-
lingua,"
bus," inter se/ differunt.
Gallds ab AquTtanis Ga-
rumna flumen dividit.

(t alios
a BelgTs Matro-
na et Sequana flumina
ITorum omnidividunt.
um
fortissimi
sunt Belgae.
catores commeant, atque ea
minare
solent.
Proximi
cultu atque htimanitate
Minime saepe ad
eos merimportant quae animos effesunt Germanis, quibuscum
provinciae longissime absunt.

'
The neuter of an adjective or pronoun, used alone, often means

^ Ipsothing." Thus haec here means " these things " (or facts).
' In language, etc.
rum lingua: i?i their own laru/uage. Literally?
The ablative is here used to show in uhat respect something is ti'ue. 80
* Inter se:
also in lingua, Note 2. (Ablative of Specification.)
from
one another. Literally?
^Quibuscum; regularly written instead of
*
**
cum
quibus.
BEGINNING LATIN
124
continenter bellum gerunt.

Qua de causa Helvetii
quoque reliquos Gallos virtute'^ praecedunt, quod fere
cotidianls proeliis cum Germanis contendunt.
'
LESSON
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
J.XVI.
PERFECT AND PLUPERFECT TENSES.
366. Perfect and Pluperfect Subjunctive. The performed by adding -eri- to the
perfect stem, and employing the regular person-endings
fect subjunctive active is
Thus,
of the active.
amav
eri
m,
etc.
fu eri m, etc.
The
-isse-
pluperfect subjunctive active
is
formed by adding
to the perfect stem, with the usual person-endings.
Thus,
rex
isse
potu
The
perfect
m, etc.
m, etc.
isse
and pluperfect subjunctive passive are

by combining the present and the
formed, respectively,
imperfect subjunctive of sum with the perfect passive par-
Thus,
ticiple.
Perfect.
monitus sim, etc.
Pluperfect.
auditus essem, etc.
367o Exercise. Write paradigms of the perfect subjuncsum and the phiperfect subjunctive of possum, botli of
course active and of the perfect subjunctive passive of laudd
and the pluperfect subjunctive passive of mitt5.
tive of
368. Tense Rule.

present,
clause
The perfect subjunctive, like the

used only Avhen the verb of the principal
some form denoting present or future time.
is
is
Qua de causa
'
Virtute
Note
bee
re<jûlarly
3.
written instead of dS qua causa.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD
The
pluperfect subjunctive
of the principal clause
Review the
is
some
is
125
used only when the verb

denoting past time.
t'orni
rule given in g 355.
369. Applieiitiou of Tense Kiile to Indireet QuesIn indirect questions, the })resent and imperfect
subjunctive denote action occurring at thk same time as
that ex])ressed by the main verb the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive, action occurring before the time of the
main verb.
By this rule / clonH hioiv what he ivas doing would
have to be Nescio quid fecerit (not faceret). Nescio quid
fecerit may also, of course, mean I donH know luhat he d'ul^
IclonH know lohat he has done^ etc. In other forms of the
tions.
indirect question the tense of the English will generally
be a sufficient guide.
Observe the operation of
this rule
in the following Exercise.
Imperator a mTlitil)us quaesTvit cur

370. Exercise.
non longius progress! essent. 2. Quiscpie intellexit cur
senatus convenisset
eommissum non
committeretur
convenlret.
sit.
4."
3.
Nescio cur proelium
Quis cognoverat cur proelium

esset ?
5. Scisne quae sit
0. Aegre dicere possum quot
eommissum
altitudo illius aggeris?
homines in hoc oppido sint. 7. Quaero a te, miles, quam

longae sint fossae. S. Dicere non possum, GaT, id quod
me rogas. 9. Dicere non possum quid rogaverit. 10.
Rogavit cur dicere non posses possetis quam altl essent
murl et quo die copiae ex urbe profectae essent.
371. Exercise. 1. We don't know who set the town

on fire. 2. They asked us what place we had reached on
our journe}^. 3. I will tell the hostages wh}^ I have
followed them. 4. Will you think about Avhat you have
done ? 5. Did you think about what you were doing ?
BEGINNING LATIN
126
Do you know by whom the town Avas set on fire ?

me where the troops had been led from-here
8. Do you know where they are being led from
(hmc).
6.
7.
lie told
'?
9.
I don't
know where they were
king's messenger inquire of
(a)
led from.
10.
Did the
you what you had written
LESSON LXVII.
IRREGULAR VERBS
VOW, NOLO, MALO.
MENTARY
372. Void, Nolo, 3Ialo.
Learn the following forms
of void, toish^ he willing; nol5, not
prefer, would
THE COMPLE-
INFINITIVE.
^vis/l,
he umvillingi malo,
rather.
PRESENT INDICATIVE.
(=
vols
nolo
vis
vultis
non vis
non vult
nolumus
non vultis
volunt
nolunt
velim
velimus
velis
velitis
velit
velint
vellem
vellemus
velles
velletis
vellet
vellent
vult
volumus
lion volo)
malo (= magis volo)

mavis
mavult
malumus
mavultis
malunt
PRESENT SUBJUNCTIVE.
n5lim, etc.
malim, etc.
IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.
noUem,
etc.
mallem, etc.
The imperfect and future indicative of these verbs are

formed regularly, after the method of the third conjuga-
IRREGULAR VEKIJS
from the stems vol-,

See 83 and 89.
tion,
etc.
nol-,
and
127
mal-, us volam,
nolebam,
The })erfect, pluperfect, and future perfect tenses are

formed regularly from the stems volu-, nolu-, and malu-.
The present
are
infinitives
Eevievv
nolle, malle.
velle,
353, and notice that the rule for formation of the imperfect subjunctive by the aid of the present infinitive active
applies to all verbs.
373. Complementary Infinitive. Volo, nolo, and malo,

and conor, may take an infinitive to complete
their meaning.
This is called the Complementary Infin-
like possum
Thus,
itive.
Do you
Visne rus tre?
tvish to
go
to tlie
cotintry?
374. Exercise. Tell where eacli of tlie following forms

made; tell whether it is formed like a regular verb or not,
and translate, unless it be a subjunctive.
is
1.
3.
Yis;
Yolo
runt.
non vis; volebas.

2.
Yult volet; velit.
mallem volumus. 4. Mrdam vultis malueYellemus voluerimus voluissemus velle.
;
5.
375. Exercise.
were unwilling to
peace.
men
4.
Shall
of yours ?
home.
G.
(mecum.')
voice.
8.
5.
1.
We
fight.
3.
wished to come.
The
citizens prefer to
They
make
away
those
you be unwilling
I don't
to send
know why you
2.
wish to return
He had been unwilling to come with me

7. He told why he did not wish to hear your
Then I asked him why he had not chosen
rather {preferred) to withdraw.
which you have wished.

with us ?
10.
9. I will try to do that

Don't you wish to come
^ Witli the personal

pronouns ego and tu, witli the reflexive
generally with the relative qui, cum is enclitic (see 25).
sui,
and
BEGINNING LATIN
128
LESSON LXVIII.
IRREGULAR VERBS:
THE SUBJUNCTIVE OF RESULT.
Fid.
370. Fio. The verb fio is found only in the tenses

It means to hecome^ to
formed from the present stem.
It thus takes the place
liappeii^ to he made^ to he done.
of the passive of facio, which is not used in the present,
imperfect,
For
of
fi5,
and future
tenses.
the perfect, pluperfect,
See 182.
and future perfect tenses
the regular ])assive forms of
facio
are used
factus
sum, etc.
The
and subjunctive
indicative
of fio are regular, as of
the fourth conjugation, except that the vowel
i remains
long before another vowel unless the i is followed by -er-,
forming an exception to 12, h. Thus,
fiunt; fiet; but fierent.
The
37 7. Exercise.
present infinitive
is
irregular
fieri.
paradigm of the present, imperfect, and future indicative, and the present and imperWrite
ix
fect subjunctive of fio.
378. Subjunctive of Result.
how
We
the subjunctive introduced by ut
purpose.
The subjunctive with
have already seen
may
express
aim or
ut is also used to express
the eonse<inence or result of an action, which, of course,

may or may not be what was aimed at. Thus, in the
sentence,
Puer tam
celeriter cucurrit ut exanimaretur,
fast that he got out of

it
is
The hoy ran
so
bf-eath,
unlikely that getting out of breath was the boy's
purpose.^ but
is
evidently the result of his rapid pace.
the other hand, in
On
IRKKGULAK VERBS
Milites tain fortiter
129
pugnaverunt ut laudarentur, The soldiers

ihat they were praiHed^
fouijld, HO valiantly
likely that they
it is (juite
may have
commendation
fought with the idea
though the Latin does not

definitely state this, but merely that the giving of praise
was a consequence of their conduct, whatever its motive.
of receiving
379. Difterences in
Constructions,
negative of the subjunctive of purpose

of the subjunctive of result
Hoc
Purpose.
facimus,
not
Hoc
Result.
is
While the
the negative
Thus,
ut non.
ue culpemur,
{a)
is ne,
loe
do this that we
may
he blamed.
ut non culpemur, We do this

that we are not blamed.
tain bene facimus,
so tvell
{])) The subjunctive of result is very often preceded by

some word in the main clause meaning 59, such, or the
like
as tam in the sentences above.
380. Result Clauses Used with Certain Verbs.

is used as the subject of verbs meaning
clause of result
hajppen.
A
to
Thus,
Accidit ut esset plena luna,
It)
happened that there was a full
it
" in the Latin, the real con-
moon.
Notice that there
is
no "
struction being
Predicate.
Subject.
That-there-ivas-a-full-moon
happened.
381. Tense Kule. The rules already learned

and 368 apply also to the subjunctive of result.
382. Exercise.
totlus Galliae esset.
orem
feci,
1.
Accidit ut ed tempore
2.
Eo
prlnceps
consilio te de his rebus certi-
ut civitatem ex hostibus servarem.
gessT, cives, ut
is
in 355
3.
Sic
rem
omnis a communi periculo defenderem.
BEGINNING LATIN
130
4.
Hoc
consilium cepi, ut vos omnis a periculo hostium
defenderem.
Quis vos, cives, de nostra caede
5.
certi-
ores fecit ?
383. Exercise. Distinguish carefidly between purpose

and result clauses, especially in the negative.
It
1.
two
happens that the leadership of Gaul
chiefs,
whom
one of
the other hostile.

f
abl.
3.
2.
(of
whom
one)
It
may
happened that a meeting of the
by the
consul.
held by
friendly to us,
not this be done with this design
AVill
without cum), that the prisoners
called
is
is
4.
Let
in-such-a-way that no one
all
not be freed
chiefs
was being
these things be done
may wish
to withdraw,
5.
These things were done that you might not wish to

leave the city. 6. We shall inform Caesar of (de) this
matter.
of
7.
Will they not be informed of the departure
the Gauls?
Several of the Gauls
8.
9.
formed of our departure.
pened that Ave did not become
By this
Eoman
had been
misfortune
citizens.
in-
it
hap-
10.
Was
not this plan formed in the general council of the Gauls
LESSON LXIX.
IRREGULAR VERBS:
384. Fero,
QUESTIONS WITH NUM.
Present Stem.
The
hring, etc.
FERO.
Fero
means hear^ carry,

and subjunctive
tenses of the indicative
are regular, with the following exception

indicative
is
dropped before
ferres (not fereres)
The same
Avhich
in the present
and the imperfect subjunctive, the stem-vowel
is ferre
r,
s,
or
fers
t.
Thus,
(not feris)
fertur (not feritur)
etc.
principle applies to the present infinitive,

(not ferere)
in the passive,
ferri.
IRREGULAK VERBS
131
385. Exercise. Write paradigms of the present indicaand imperfect subjunctive of ferd, active and passive.
(The imperfect and future indicative and the present subtive
junctive are regular as of the third conjugation

feram, etc.)
ferebam
386. Perfect and Supine Stems. The perfect stem

is tul-, the supine stem lat-.
The perfect, pluperfect,
and future perfect are formed regularly from these stems.
of fero
387. Exercise. Write a synopsis, that is, the first person

singular of each tense of fero, active and passive, indicative
and subjunctive, formed from the perfect and supine stems.
388. Questions with
form
You
are introduced
lish is all
Num.
do not wish
by num.
Questions of the general

come,
to
The
not
do you
do
the Eng-
yo\i of
represented by the num in Latin.
Thus, the
above would be
Num
389. Exercise.
venire vis?
The words
to be translated
by num are
in italics.
1.
The grain
is
not being gathered, is
not report this matter, will yoit f
were suffering slavery
[at the
3.
it
2.
You
will
They asked why we
hands]
of
the Eomans.
The bridge which we made over that river will not

have been removed, will it?
5. Then they wished to
retreat.
Did
6.
you not ask Avhy the Komans had made
war on the Gauls ? 7. I neither asked why they were
making war nor do I wish to know. 8. For I prefer to
be informed by others.
9.
They have not brought a
4.
larger supply of grain to us than to them, have they f

10.
And
they do not wish to
people, do they?
make war on
the
Roman
'
;
BEGINNING LATIN
132
390. Exercise.
1.
Num peclem referent elves RomanI ?
2.
Omnls
3.
Nuntiuiii a cap tl vis ad civisrefert:
adfers
res
cont'erant
banc rem perferant.

culo essetis.
})otest.
9.
10.
domibiis
in
4.
Mllites signa Inferre vult.
5.
inferres.
quae
7.
suls
sunt.
Quid, serve, hue
Neque sciunt cur
6.
Hostis vestros sustull, ne in peri-
Haec ad te
Nam non sine
8.
Xum iiaec me
detull ut beilum
po])ulo
ill!
proelio res publica defendl
ad imperatorem deferre
vultis ?
LESSOX LXX.
READING LESSON:
Apud
Helvetios longe nobilissimus fuit et ditissimus
Orgetorix.
suis
HELVETIORUM CONIURATIO.
Is coniilrationem nobilitatis fecit.
persuasit ut
de
finibus
suis
Civibus
cum omnibus
copiis
natura Ilelvetil continentur.

Una ex parte ' flumine Klieno latissimo atque altissimo
continentur, qui agrum Helve tium a Germanis dlvidit
exlrent.'*
-LTndique
loci
ex parte monte lura altissimo, qui est inter

Sequanos et Helvetios tertia ex ])arte lacu Lemanno et
flumine Rliodano, qui provinciam Roma nam ab Helve tils
dlvidit.
Ita flebat ut non facile finitimis beilum Inferre
Pro* multitudine hominum angustos finis
possent.
habebant. Tuna multas res comparabant. lumentorum
et carrorum quam* maximum numerum coemebant.
Sementis quam maximas facie bant. Cum proximis clviBiennio eae
tatibus pacem et amicitiam conflrmabant.
altera
'
res confici poteraut.

^
Persnadeo takes its object in the dative.

Una ex parte on one side. Literally ?
:
Quam with a supei-lative means as possible.

numerum means as great a number as possible.
''
^
'
From
exeo.
In comparison
Thus, quam
iDilh.
maximum
IKREaULAR VERBS
133
LESSON Lxxr.
IRREGULAR VERBS:
EO.
391. The Verb 0, The present stem of

is changed to e- before a, 0, or u.
Thus,
eo, go, is i-.
This
earn, eo,
it
cunt; but imus.
The imperfect indicative is ibam, etc.

The future indicative is ibo, etc.
The perfect stem is i-. Sometimes v
iv-, but the other is more common.
ii-
often contracts to
i-,
giving
isse
for
is
added, making
iisse (or ivisse), etc.
392. Exercise. Write a paradigm of the present indicative, and the present and imperfect subjunctive of eo, treating
it
as a verb of the fourth conjugation except in the cases
mentioned above. Write, also, a synopsis of those tenses of

the indicative and subjunctive which are formed from the
perfect stem.
Passive forms need not be given, though they
are sometimes found.
1. We 'have gone many miles to-day.
To-morrow we shall go from home. 3. Yesterday
the army (agmen) went through the fields of the Gauls
without any mischief. 4. On the following day we asked
them where they had gone. 5. Why do you not ask me
where I am going ? 6. We do not know where they
went. 7. They did not know where we had gone. 8. Do
you wish to go with me ? 9. They are going to a mountain the character of which they do not know.
10. Do
you not know the character of the place to v\^hich you
393. Exercise.
2.
are going ?
2.
3.
394. Exercise. 1. Quot mllia passuum hodie Tstis ?

Ad fossam pervenimus (piae ducentos pedes pertinebat.
Nam mllites nocte proxima collem muniverant in quo
BEGINNING LATIN
134
summo
castra ponebant.
4.
Postridie eius diel per finis
hostium magnis itineribus ibanius, ad urbem quandam

quae ab inimicissimis Gallls incolebatur. 6. Heri opus con6. Naturam loci
feci totum quod tu me facere volebas.
timemus per queni domum ibimus. 7. Augustus enim
8. Yix per hunc
est at(iue paludibus undique continetur.
Ktintium
quem ad
perveniemus.
9.
salutem
ad
locum
audiveram.
10. 'Neme attulisti heri a compluribus alils
que meliores neque fortiores virl inveniri possunt quam ii
quos in nostro exercitu habemus.
LESSON LXXII.
THE IMPERATIVE MOOD.
395. The Imperative 3Ioocl. The Imperative is the
name given to those forms of the verb which are used in
giving direct commands, as
Advance!
396. Formation.
Break through the line!

The imperative is formed by adding
the following terminations to the present stem, as found

by removing the termination -re (or -se) of the present
infinitive active.
Active.
SINGULAR.
Present.
Future.
2.
PLURAL.
THE IMPERATIVE MOOD
135
The
third conjugation changes the stem-vowel to -i- in

forms except the second person singular present, where
it is -e-, and the third person plural future, Avhere it
becomes -u-.
all
The fourth conjugation adds
-u- to
the stem- vowel in
the third person plural future.
397. Exercise.
and
active
and
Write paradigms of the imperative,

arm, deleo, destroy, capio, take,
passive, of ariii5,
audio, hear.
398. Imperative of the Irregrular Verbs.

The imperative of sum is formed by adding the terminations to
the present stem,
future
The
es-.
third person plural of the
is sunto.
Possum, void, and malo have no imperative.
and
Dico, duco, faci5,
fero
have
die, due, fae,
the singular of the j^resent, instead of dice,
The other forms
and
fer
in
etc.
of the imperative of fero follow the
principle stated in 384.
The imperative
of fi5 follows the rule for the fourth
conjugation active.
See 376 for the quantity of the
-i-.
Nolo has an imperative like the fourth conjugation,

with the exception of the form ndlunto.
E6
an imperative of the fourth conjugation.
iias
It
follows the principle given in 391 with regard to the

form of the stem- vowel.
399.
active of
Exercise.
sum and
eo,
Write paradigms of tlie imperative

and the imperative active and passive
of fero.
400. Translation of the Imperative.

The present
is translated by the ordinary English impera-
imperative
tive.
The
future
is
translated
by
you, he, they,
etc., shall;
BEGINNING LATIN
136
as in the following translation of the imperative of eo,

go.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR.
Present.
2.
go (said to more than
go (said to one
one person).
person).
(
Future.
2.
you shall go (to

one person).
3.
he, she,
\
(
it,
you shall go
than one).
(to
more
they shall go,
shall go.
401. Use of the Imperative. The present imperative

the form most commonly used. Some ver])s, however,
use the future either exclusively or commonly. Laws and
solemn commands emplo}^ the future imperative.
is
402. Exercise,
3.
Habeto tuas
1.
Yenl mecum.
res {j^rojyerty).
2. Tte,
amici,
domum.
SequiminI, milites.
-1.
6. Civis
Conare, puer, onine conficere opus tuum.
annate, nam hostes ap})ropincpiant. 7. Armaminl, cives,
5.
rem publicam
8. Delete Carthaginem,
Yestros exercitus atque vestra
10. Castra munite, milites,
praesidia hostibus ostendite.
ut
vos vestrosque interliciant.
hostes enim mox venient
ut
defendatis.
popull Ilomani liostem.
9.
LESSON LXXIII.
THE INFINITIVE MOOD.
403. Formation of the Infinitive.
There are three
present, perfect, and future.

The terminations of the present have already been
learned.
Review 337.
active is formed by adding
(l)) The perfect infinitive
tenses of the infinitive
{a)
-isse
to the perfect stem, as
{c)
The perfect infinitive
amav
isse,
passive
is
to
have loved.
formed by combining
THE INFINITIVE MOOD

the present infinitive of sum with
tlie
137
perfect passive par-
have heen loved.

(d) The t'utui'e infinitive active is formed by adding esse
to the future pai'tici])le, as amaturus, -a, -um esse, to he ahoiU
ticij)le,
to love.
-fiias
{e)
as amatus,
-um
-a,
(The future
esse, to
formed by substituting
])articipU3 is
for -us in the ])erfect passive
])artici])le.)
The
is
future infinitive passive
present infinitive passive of eo to

(see lYO), as
amatum
404. Exercise.
active ami
tive,
iri, to
formed by adding
tlie
tlie
accusative su[)ine
he about to he loved.
Write complete paradigms of the
iiifiui-
passive, of moneo, advise; dico, say; capio,
take; and audi5, hea7\
405. Uses of the lufiuitive.

uses of the infinitivê in Latin
There are four common
as Complement, which has been

Besides the verbs
Review 378.
there mentioned, the complementary infinitive is used
{a)
The
Infinitive
already explained.
after
debed, ought; auded, dare; constitu5, decide; incipio, hegiuy
and other verbs whicii, like these, are felt to be incomplete without the name of scmie other action to which
they lead.
(/>)
The
infinitive
may
verb, particularly of sum.
Pro
be used as the Subject of another

Tlius,
patria //orl est decorum,
To die for
{oiws) native land
is nohle.
{c)
The
tense of
the
sometimes used instead of a
indicative, in spirited description.
Ilistcn-ical Infinitive,
{d)
use
infinitive is
tlie
is
The
])ast
This, called
need not be considered here.

This
infinitive is used in indirect quotations.
explained in the following section. Only the uses

(ct) and {d) are employed in the exercises of
described in
this book.
BEGINNING LATIN
138
406. Indirect Quotations.

ment, such as
Cicero
is
If
someone makes a
state-
consuly
We
may
the statement may be reported in two ways.
give the exact wokds of the speaker, using quotation
Thus,
marks.
He
This
is
said, ^'Cicero is consul.'^
called a Direct Quotation.
Secondly, we may give the substance of the remark,

but change the form of the expression. Thus,
{a)
(&)
This
is
He
He
said that Cicero was C07isulj or

said Cicero to be consiiL
called an Indirect Quotation.
Indirect quotations in Latin are always like
{h)
above.
It is therefore necessary to change an English sentence

beginning " he said that," etc., into this form before it can
Thus, the above sentence would
be translated into Latin.

be Latin
Dixit Ciceronem consulem esse.
ITotice that, in
accordance with the rule in Latin,
Ciceronem, the subject of the infinitive

tive.
Cdnsulem
ject, Ciceronem.
is
1.
() Distinguish
complementary infinitives
infinitives in indirect quotations.
first literally,
Dicit
in the accusa-
(See g 73.)
407. Exercise.
from
esse, is
a predicate noun agreeing with the sub-
then in the form of
hostis
fugere.
gratias agere debemus.
2.
4.
Translate the latter
(a) in 406.
Fugere nolumus.
3.
Dis
Dicit nos dIs gratias agere
Eruptionem facere incipiunt. 6. Dico eos

eruptionem facere. 7. Bellum Romanls Tnferre constidebere.
tuimus.
5.
8.
Quis dicit
nos
bellum Komanis inferre?
THE INFINITIVE MOOD, CONTINUED
Ego
9.
10.
dico vos bellum
Dicunt hostis
Romanis
in proelio
inferre
139
constituere.
plurima vulnera accipere.
(h) Change the following sentences into the form of (b) in

405, then translate into Latin.
11.
He
says that the soldiers are weary.
that their friends wish to go. 13.

are fortifying the camp.
general
is
brave.
make
dares to
408. Rule
15.
14.
The
The general
They say
12.
We say that the
soldiers
soldiers say that the
says that the lieutenant
an attack on the enemy's line-of-battle.
XXY.
The
subject of
the infinitive is in
the accusative case.
liESSON LXXIV,
THE INFINITIVE MOOD, CONTINUED.
409. Tense of the
Infinitive,
tive denotes action occurring
(a)
The present
indicated
by the verb
406, it
clear that the speaker said that Cicero
is
of saying.
at that particular time.
made by
(5)
it
If,
The
infini-
at the same time as that

Thus, in the sentence in
translation, then,
was consul
would be
the present infinitive, as given above.
however,
we had
He said that Cicero had been consul,

would mean that Cicero had held the consulship
be-
fore the time of speaking. Action occurring before the

time of speaking is expressed by the perfect infinitive.
Thus,
Dixit Ciceronem
to
have been
consulem fuisse
(literally.
He
said Cicero
consul).
(c) The future infinitive denotes action occurring aftei?

the time of the verb of saying.
The construction is
BEGINNING LATIN
140
rendered in English by the auxiliaries shall and should^

and tcould. Thus,
will
Dixit Ciceronem
Cicero
would he
consulem
futurum esse, He mid that

He said Cicero to be about
consul (literally.
to be consul).
passive infinitives,
an adjective with the subject

In the future active and perfect
the participle always agrees, like a
predicate adjective,
Avitli
Here futurum agrees
like
accusative, Ciceronem.
the subject of the infinitive.
410. Exercise. Change the following sentences into

forms capable of literal translation into Latin then translate.
;
1.
He says that the enemy hold the town.
that the soldiers have fortified the camp.
say that the
way
many miles.
6.
Avas long ?
4. I
said that
2.
3.
They say
Didn't you
we had marched
He says that the troops Avill come.
6.
He
said that they Avould come.
411. Exercise.
eral
1.
form
Translate each sentence first in the genand afterward in the form of (a).
of (b) in 406,
Dicit exploratorem
Galium
esse.
2.
Dicit explora-
3. Dixit hoc latus

tores rem ad imperatorem detulisse.
4. Dixit legatum subsicastrorum longissimum esse.
dium misisse. 5. Dicunt Gallos aedificia incensuros esse.
7. Dicimus
6. Dixit exploratores aquam petlturos esse.
8. Dixit legates missum irl.

acceptum irl.
Dicunt Gallos obsides missuros esse. 10. Dixistine eos
obsides
9.
obsides misisse ?
412. Exercise.
You
1.
He
says that reinforcements will
you would come. 3. They say

that we set the building on fire. 4. Who says that the
scouts are coming ? 5. Who had said that the scouts
were coming ?
be sent.
2.
said that
THE INFINITIVE, CONCLUDED
14
LESSON I.XXV.
READING LESSON:
MORS ORGETORIGIS.
Orgetorix Ilelvetius regiimn in clvitfite sufi occupare

causam coniurationem aliorum prlnci-
volebat, et ob earn
pum
Galliae fecerat, qui
facere volebant.
Ill
Aedul
cus Sequanus.
idem
erant
'
in suls
quoque civitatibns
Dumnorix Aeduus,
et Casti-
et Secjuanl erant cTvitates Galliae
potentes.
Helvetil antem nescnrerant quid Orgetorix facere vellet.
Ea
res est
ils
Tuni Orgetorlgem
per indicium enuntiata.
ex vinculls causam dicere coegerunt.

""
Yenit dies causae
hominum
eripuerunt.
est.
dictionis.
Ad
indicium Orgetorix
milia decern undique coegit, qui euni perTculo
Tum
civitas armis ins
suum
exsequi cdnUta
Subito advenit nuntius qui Orgetorlgem
esse dixit.
mortuus
Neque quisquam
mortuum
modo
potuit quo
dicere
esset.
LESSON LXXVI.
THE INFINITIVE, CONCLUDED.
413. Verbs Followed by the Indirect Discourse.
The general name for the accusative and infinitive construction after a verb of saying
is
the Indirect Discourse,
or Oblique ^"ârration.
Other
than
verl)s
dico take this
construction.
It is
used with verbs of saying, thinking, and feeling, to

(Such are
describe that which is said, thought, or felt.
^
Neuter
the
same thing.
To
])lead his case.
BEGINNING LATIN
142
verbs meaning
see,
tell^
inform^ thinh^ suppose,
helieve, feel,
k/iow, /tear.)
414. The Use of

such a sentence as
ffe
J^êgo,
Instead of dico
says that he
Latin prefers to use nego,

Negatse venturum
tuill
Se,
non
in
not come,
Thus,
deriy.
esse (not, Dicit se
415. The Use of
,When
non venturum
he, she,
it,
esse).
or they in the
indirect quotation refers to the subject of the verb of saying, thinking, or feeling, the accusative of the reflexive
sui
is
used.
When
meant, forms of
He
is
someone
than the subject

are to be employed. Thus,
is
said that he would come, Dixit se venturum
means that the speaker

If, however, we had
Dixit
it
else
would mean that he
said that- he himself
emn
venturum
would come.
esse,
said that some other person
would
come.
416. Exercise. 1. I believe that we shall conquer.

Do you think that they are about to make a sortie
from the gates ? 3. Did you suppose that we should rout
the enemy's infantry to-day ? 4. They did not think they
were heard by the children. 5. They said that they would
not inform their father.
2.
417. Complementary Infinitive and Clauses of PurReview 351; 373; 404, . In the following Exerdistinguish carefully between complementary infinitives
and clauses of purpose, and remember that the latter take
the subjunctive in Latin.
pose.
cise,
THE
Add
hid^
to the
command^
list
INFINITIVP],
CONCLUDED
of verbs given in 373
143
and 404
iubeo,
order.
1. Do you wish to receive favors from

They came to conquer our native land. 3. I do
not wish you to believe that the Gauls were routed.
4. He commanded his lieutenants to send reinforcements.
5. Reinforcements will come soon to save the redoubt.
418. Exercise.
us
2.
419. Indirect Statements and Indirect Questions.

413.
In the following Exercise,
405
361
distinguish carefully between indirect statements and
indirect questions.
Observe that the indirect question
always has some interrogative word, as lohy, whether, who,
etc., to introduce it, and that the indirect statement is fre-
Review
quently introduced by
420. Exercise.
1.
that.
He
for (pro) our kindness.
thank you yesterday.
said that he wished to
2.
I don't
thank us
know why he
didn't
The general has been informed

that the army has suffered another disaster. 4. Did you
hear what disaster it had suffered ? 5. I saw that they
3.
were placing redoubts at-the-ends-of the ditches (see

212); but I did not ask why the redoubts were being
placed there.
421. Exercise.
interfectum
quam
Iri ?
1. jûis
2.
eum ab illo
Romanos pelli
credidit
GallTs
adulescente
posse
num-
Quis rogavit quot vulnera in illoproelio

acerrimo a mllitibus acce]ita essent ? 4. Ostende mihi,
defesse miles, illud vulnus quod accepistl.
5. Liberl
credunt fratrem suum fortissimum esse hominum.
putavT.
3.
BEGINNINtr LATIN
144
L.ESSON LXXVII.
THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE.
422. The Gerund. The gerund is a verbal noun corresponding to the English infinitive in -ing. It is declined
as a neuter oi" the second declension, in the genitive, dative,
accusative,
The base
which
is
and ablative singular onlv.

is formed by adding -nd- to the present stem,
shortened or otherwise modified as shown beloAV.
THE GERUND AND GERUNDIVE

fugere poterimus.
Diem
Beneficia tua accipiendo servl tul
Magnam spem
habent Gallos superandi.

imperator
dicet
captlvos omnes interficiendi.
fact! sumus.
10.
8.
145
9.
425. The Gerundive. Transitive verbs with an object

usually employ a form called the Gerundive instead of the
gerund.
The gerundive has the same base as the gerund,
but it is completely inflected as an adjective of the first
and second declensions.
The use of the gerundive may best be understood by
comparing two expressions. Thus, the phrase
the fear of losing
may
money
be translated in either of the following ways
{a)
Gerund
(b)
Gerundive
metus pecuniam amittendi.
To change
to this construction, put both
words
in the case of the
make
the gerundive agree in gender and
the noun.
gerund in the
first
sentence
but
number with
Thus,
metus pecuniae amittendae.
Both
(a)
and
{b)
are rendered alike in English, although
a literal rendering of
The gerundive,
(h)
would he^fear of to-he-lost money.
as has been said,
transitive verbs with
is
usual in the case of
an object after a preposition it

;
only construction allowed.
is
the
Thus,
for completing these things, ad has res conficiendas (never

c6nficiendfm).
426. Exercise. Eewrite sentences 6-10 of Exercise 434,

changing from the gerund to the gerundive construction.
10
BEGINNING LATIN
146
LESSON LXXVIII.
PARTICIPLESo
A participle is a verbal adjecThus, in the expression I saw the hoys p^âyiîgr
427. The Participle.

tive.
the participle jplaying is clearly a verb, because it

has an object, hall; at the same time it is an adjective,
because it describes ho])s they are playing boys, not
hall^
Avorking boys or sleeping boys.

Participles in Latin
have three tenses present, perfect, and future.
:
428. Formation of the Present Participle.

The
is declined as an adjective of the third
declension, having one termination. See 188. The stem
is formed by adding -nti- to the present stem of the verb,
which is shortened or otherwise modified as in the case
of the gerund.
See 422. The nominative singular is
formed by dropping the -1- of the stem and adding s;
am5 giving amans, capio capiens, etc. Thus,
present participle
PARTICIPLES
147
tive participle in -ing ; but the English participle
precise than the Latin.
The
it is
clrild
is less
Tlius, in the sentence
ran
liome, ci'ying,
clear that the child cried
while he was running
but
in the sentence
Passing
the meaning
the first door, he stopped at the second,
evidently that he first passed one door,

THEN stopped at another. In Latin, only the first of the
above sentences would use a present participle. In other
words, the present participle in Latin must denote an acis
VOLNG UOMAiNS TlAYING
tion occurring at
iJAi.i.
the same time as the action of the main
verb.
431. Exercise. Select those sentences in which the parmight be literally translated into Latin, according to
the principle just explained.
The sentences are not to be
ticiple
translated.
1.
The
soldiers
fell,
fighting bravely.
the request was wrong, he refused to grant
ing of success, they gave up the attempt.

his knees,
dow,
he begged for mercy.
5.
Feeling that
2.
it.
4.
3.
Despair-
Falling on
Passing a shop
was attracted by an advertisement.
G.
Avin-
Passing
BEGINNING LATIN
148
the church, he reached the corner.

expectedly, he found the house on
magazine, coming
home from
weeks in Maine, hunting.

shouting and gesticulating.
the
10.
Y.
Coming home
un-
bought
this
fire.
8.
office.
I
9.
I spent six
They rushed up
to
us,
432. Agreement of the Participle. Since the participle is an adjective, it agrees in gender, number, and case
with the word which it describes. Thus,
agmina sequential
the armies following
(nom. or ace.
pi.
neuter).
feminarum
flentium, of the
weeping women (gen.
pi.
femi-
nine).
433. Exercise.
referebant.
2.
1.
Milites fortiter pugnantes
Yiros magnas
res
Ilium discedere conantem continuit.
3.
entes ab exploratoribus videntur.

centibus
magna praemia
pedem
audentes laudamus.
5.
4.
Hostes veni-
Militibus proficis-
dabuntur.
The stem of the presbut the nominative singular

of course, the neuter accusative singular.
434. Present Participle of Eo,

ent participle of eo
is -lens
also,
435. Exercise.
is eunti-,
Write a paradigm of the present parti-
ciple of 60.
I.ESSON LXXIX.
PARTICIPLES, CONTINUED.
436. The Perfect Participle.
Review the
rules for
the formation of the perfect participle, found in 169

and lYO. This participle is regularly passive, and corre*
Deponent verbs have active
form.
participles as well as those of passive
149
sponds to the English past participle, or to the longer form

with the auxiliary having been. Thus,
having been seen (not
visus, -a, -um, seen, or
'^
having seen").
In deponent verbs, however, the perfect participle

tive.
(See 331.) Thus,
secutus, -a, -um,
1.
LegatI ad
Distinguish carefully between deponent
Caesarem
missi
auxilium
petiverunt.
datum
erat de con-
Quest! quod {because) auxilium non
cilio discesserunt.
3.
imperator
se
5.
dixit
Auxilium ab
iis
MortuI milites laudantur.

vltam
se condiciones pacis
tatem postulant
pro
ab
Legatus negat
6.
Obsides a
8.
Gallos ante lucem
el
esse.
Equites hostes secuti

10.
Moriens
daturum.
postulates audivisse.
ils
Galli.
4.
esse
docti obsides retinent
nuntiant
interficiunt.
patria
petltum non dabitur.
man! calamitatibus
9.
ac-
having followed (not ''^having been followed").
437. Exercise.
and other verbs.
2.
is
impetum
7.
quorum
Crasso
Ro-
liber-
retenti
in castra facturos
magnum numerum eorum
Progress! autem ad castra ab
i!s
relicta
nihil inveniunt.
438. Ablative Absolute. When the participle cannot

be made to agree Avith any noun in the sentence, a device
called the Ablative Absolute enables us to keep the participle in the tense desired.
Thus, if we have the sentence
Hearing
this,
we know
that hearing
( 430).
But having heard
is
he went aioay,
really equivalent to having heard

is
fect active participle of audio.
active,
We
and there
is
no
per-
therefore recast the
sentence in the form
This having been heard, he went away,
BEGINNING LATIN
150
and translate
this
homing been heard in the ablative. Thus,
Roc audit o
discessit,
439. Exercise. Recast the participial phrases as in the

preceding example, and translate by the ablative absolute.
1.
Having conquered the Gauls, Caesar
to Italy.
Having kept back the
3.
his arrival.
tenant
return
Seeing the danger, at daybreak the enemy
2.
retreated.
will
4.
knew
ISTot
hostages, they feared
having sent reinforcements, the
that he would not be praised.
destroyed Carthage, the
Romans thought a
5.
lieu-
Having
great danger
had been removed.

440. Exercise. Notice that the ablative absolute is not
used when the participle can agree with the subject, object,
or other noun of the sentence with which it is connected.
1.
2.
Gallis
superatis,
Caesar in Italiam profectus
condiciones pacis acceperunt quae a
Galll superati
Caesare constitutae erant.

tus
domum non
est.
3.
Caesar in Italiam profec-
multis diebus pervenit.
4.
Caesare in
Italiam profecto, Galll bellum Germanls inferre parabant.

5.
Quis Gallos superatos defendet
LESSON L,XXX.
READING LESSON: HELVETIORUM PROFECTIO.
Post Orgetorigis mortem Helvetii nihilo minus e finibus
Ut spem reditionis tollerent, oppida
frumentum
et vicos et privata aedificia omnia incendunt
comburunt. Sic paratiores erant ad perlcula subeunda.
Quisc|ue trium mensium molita cibaria donio efferre
suls exire conantur.
iussus est.
^
Translate this gen. by for.
PARTICIPLES, CONCLUDED
Cum
flnitimi
151
Helvetils ibant KauracI et TulingI et Latobrigl

et Boios, qui trans Khenum incoluerant et in
agrum Noricum
triinsierant, socios
'
sibi adsciscunt.
Erant itinera duo quibus domo exire potuerunt.

per Sequanos, angustum et
luram
et
difficile
flumen Ehodanum.
Romanam, multo
erat, inter
IJnum,
montem
Alterum, per provinciam
quod ibi Rhodanus flumen

Itaque hoc itinere proficlsci vole-
facilius erat,
vadis transiri potest.

bant.
L.ESSON LXXXI.
PARTICIPLES, CONCLUDED.
441. Present Participles iii the Ablative Absolute.

These are not so common as perfect participles in this
construction still they are found. Thus,
;
Romani signa intulerunt, Gallis acriter resisfentibus, The

Romans advanced to the attack, the Gauls bravely resisting,
442. Exercise.
1. Hostibus appropinquantibus, nosconatu destiterunt. 2. Militibus castra munientibus,

Gain oppidum expugnare conabantur. 3. Imperatore
mllites suos
cohortante, acies a legato Instruebatur.
trl
4.
5.
Te, Catilina, sublato, tanta pericula non verebimur.

Catilina proficlscente omnes laeti erimus.
443. Participle Omitted. Two nouns, a noun and a

pronoun, or a noun and an adjective, may stand together
in the ablative absolute, no participle being employed. In
translating such expressions literally, the
be inserted.
Te
word
lei7ig
may
Thus,
duce, salvi erimus,
You
*
[being) leader,
\_As] allies.
we shall be
safe.
::
BEGINNING LATIN
152
Marco Messala et Marco Pisone

Helvetii domos suas relinquere constituerunt.
444. Exercise.
consulibus,
1.
Romulo rege, Roma urbs condita est. 3. Consule vivo

urbem reliquit. 4. Populo Romano socio vestro,
ctir, Galll, Germanos veremini ?
2.
Catillna
445. Translation of the Participle. The participle

It makes a compact aroften used instead of a clause.
rangement, such as Latin is fond of but literal translation of a participle generally makes poor English, and can
is
easily be avoided.
(a)
a subordinate clause with when
Hoc
auditd, discessit,
ally,
(p)
Thus, substitute
When he heard
this, he
withdrew
(liter-
This having been heard, etc.)
a subordinate clause with ince

Hostibus appropinquantibus, c5pias castris educere noluit,
Since the enemy was approaching, he did not like to lead
his troops out of camp (literally. The enemy approaching, etc.)
{c)
a coordinate clause with and

C5pias castris eductas pro muris instruxit, He led the troops
out of camp and dreiv them up before the walls (literally, He dreic up the led-out troops, etc.)
{d) a relative clause

Expl6rat5res praemissi reverterunt, The scouts who had been
sent ahead returned (literally. The sent ahead scouts,
etc.).
Other conjunctions can also be employed, such as if

and although. Of course, one can only tell which one to
In transselect by consideration of the Avhole sentence.
from Latin into English, these substitutions should

be made wherever the literal rendering of the participle
gives the slightest effect of awkwardness.
lating
"
PERIPHKASTIO CONJUGATIONS
153
446. Exercise.
Translate the dependent causes by parsentence would become " We having

set out, satv," etc., and the second, ''These facts having been
learned, my friend," etc.
Thus, the
ticiples.
1.
When
Ave
had
of a mountain.
embassy,
attempt.
my
3.
first
set out,
When
2.
we saw
enemy on the top
he learned the opinion of the
friend said that he
Although
the
would cease from
their allies
his
have been subdued,
waging the war with the greatThe enemy were routed and overhas not been seen by our friends,
nevertheless the Gauls are

est (summus) courage.
come.
we are
5.
4.
If this signal
all in
new
peril.
447. Exercise. Retranslate 433, 437, 440, and 444,

applying the principles of translation explained in this
Lesson.
448. The Future Participle. This is chiefly used in
forming the so-called First Periphrastic Conjugation,
which will be explained in the next Lesson.
LESSON L.XXXII.
PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS.
" Periphrastic
449. Meaning" of " Periphrastic."
means roundabout in expression, and in Latin is applied
to forms of the verb made by combining the future participle or the gerundive
with tenses of the verb
sum.
450. The First Periphrastic Conjugation. The First

is formed by combining the
future participle (see 403, d) with the various forms of
The future participle can be translated alout to,
sum.
Periphrastic Conjugation
BEGINNING LATIN
154
going
to^
and case
intending
to,
likely
In number, gender,
etc.
to,
agrees with the subject.
it
Profectur^fs
est,
He
is
out, is likely to set out, is
about
going
She intended,
Profecttira erat,
451. Exercise.
1.
Thus,
to set out,
intends
lie
to set
to set out, etc.
etc., to go.
They were going
to leave off fight-
ing (battle). 2. We are about to go to him. 3. They are

going to bring back the hostages who fled yesterday.
4. We intend to ])romise everything that they have demanded. 5. They said that they were going to protect
our rights.
452. Subjunctive of the First Periphrastic ConjuThis is used in certain situations which require
a future subjunctive. It is most commonly employed
when the time of an indirect question is later than the
time of the verb on which it depends. Thus,
gation.
am
I don't knoio ivhat I

quid facfurus shn,
I didnH hnou) rvhat she
nescivi quid factnra esset.
We asked when
going
to
do
was going
they tvould come,
(or sJiall do), nescio
to
do
(or
tvould do),
Rogavimus quando ven-
tUf^l essent.
In indirect questions of this type the form of sum is

to be determined by the tense rules already given.
See
355, 368, 369.
453. Exercise.
new
ship will be.
would
be.
3.
Had
1.
I don't
2.
He
know what the name of the

know what the name
did not
they heard at what time they would
reach the bank of that river ?

doing were doing will do.
them what
to do.
had been doing
4.
5.
Tell
me what you
are
not wish to tell

was doing was going
I did
PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATIONS
155
454. The Second Periphrastic Conjugation. This

formed by combining the gerundive with forms of sum.
It is literally translated according to the following model
is
Mittendus
This
is
est,
He
is
to-he-sent.
equivalent to either he must he
to he sent, or he
has
sent,
or he ought
to he sent.
In this construction the gerundive, being really a prediThus,

cate adjective, agrees with the subject
Mittend^* est
means She must
455. Exercise. Translate each

ways as possible, according to 454.
he sent.
sentence in as
many-
2. Iter ad ripas
1. Gentes Gallicae opprimendae sunt.
Rheni fiuminis faciendum est. 3. Imperium Romanum
defendendum erat. 4. Estne imperium Pompeio dandum ?
5. Multa flumina sunt transeunda.
456. Dative of the Agent.

phrastic the agent
ab,
is
but by the dative.
Mihi
With
the second peri-
expressed, not ]by the ablative with
Thus,
mittendus
est,
He must
he sent
hy me,
457. Translation of the Second Periphrastic. The

second periphrastic is a passive form, as will be seen by
observing the translations of the Latin in 454 and 456.
In English, however, it is better as a rule to employ
active verbs Avith
^niust,
ought, have
to, etc.
Thus, the
sentence
Caesar i omnia iino tempore erant agenda,
which, literally rendered,

All things ivere to he
is
is
done by
Caesar' at one time,
better translated
Caesar
had
to
do everything
at one time.
BEGINNING LATIN
156
In the same way, the illustrative sentence in 456

would be translated / 'must (or have tb^ or ought to) send
Notice that in these freer renderings the subject of
etc., is represented in Latin by
him.
the auxiliary must, ought,

the dative of the agent.
458. Exercise. Eetranslate Exercise 455 according to

the suggestions in 457, supplying in each sentence except
the fourth a dative of agent with the periphrastic form, as
follows: in sentence 1, supply Caesari; iu 2, nobis; in 3,
in 5, exercitui.
mihi in 4, a popul5 R5man6
'
459. Exercise.
Kecast the following sentences in the

passive, so that they are capable of literal translation into
then translate.
Latin, according to the model just given
;
We must
1.
tell
my
bring these things to pass.
friends that I shall go
have to leave oif the

favors of {from) me.
battle.
5.
to
them
4.
soon.
He had
2.
ought to
3.
We shall
to ask
many
These things must be done at
once.
460. Second Periphrastic of Intransitive Verbs.

an intransitive verb, or a transitive verb used in-
When
put in the second periphrastic, the gerunalways put in the neuter singular. Thus,
transitively,
dive
is
is
We must go, n5bis eundum est (literally, it must he gonehy us).

I must see, videndura est mihi (literally, it must be seen by me).
Verbs used in this way are said to be used impersonally,
because they have as subject no word, such as noun or pronoun, to which the distinction of person can properly
apply.
2.
461. Exercise. 1. Ad eum nobis adeundum est.

Semper mihi vincendum est. 3. Cras tibi domum venien-
In such a sentence, where there might be doubt as to which of two

datives was the dative of agent, it is customary to put the agent in the
ablative with a or ab, as in other passive constructions.
'
THE SUBJUNCTIVE IN COMMANDS AND WISHES
dum
est.
potest.
4.
5.
Non
illl
querendum
Captlvis inoriendum
402. Eule
XXVI.
The
est
157
quod vincere non
est.
agent with
the
second peri-
phrastic conjugation is put in the dative.
LESSON
THE SUBJUNCTIVE
Commands
463.
mands
L.XXXIII.
COMMANDS AND WISHES.
IN
in tlie Third Person.
are expressed in English by the use of
Such comlet
or shall.
Thus,
Let
all
They shall
keep silence.
receive their reward.
In Latin such commands are expressed most frequently

in the third person of the present tense.
Thus,
by the subjunctive
Let the legion advance-to-tlie-attachy Legi5 signa
This
is,
( 347).
first
inferat.
same as the hortatory subjunctive

By some the term hortatory is confined to the
of course, the
person, while the use in the third person
Jussive (from iubeo, iubere,
The
When
iussi,
third person of the future imperative

it
does occur,
it
may
is
called
iussum, coimnand).
is
rarely used.
be translated exactly as the
subjunctive would be in the same situation.
464. Prohibitions.
Prohibitions, that
is,
commands
not to do something, are not expressed
by the imperative
one of the following ways
with a negative, but in

{ci) Noli or nolite with the
infinitive.
Thus,
Don't leave the camp, Noli (or ndlUe) castra relinqiiere.
This means
(Noli
is
there
is
used
literally.
Be
unwilling
when one person
more than
one.)
is
to leave
the
addressed, nolite
camp.
when
BEGINNING LATIN
158
Ne with the second person of the perfect

The above sentence would then read
(h)
tive.
Ne
subjunc-
castra reliqueris (or reliquerltis),
465. Exercise. Translate the prohibitions in the following sentences in both the ways given in 464. Give both
singular and plural forms in every case where the command
or prohibition is in the second person.
Set out.
1.
Do
Let us not set out.
not set out.
Let
them set out. 2. Give. Don't give. Let me give. Let

him give. 3. Command. Let them be commanded.
Let us command. Do not command. 4. Flee. Let them
flee.
Do not flee. 5. Let us not come. Let him not
come. Let them not come. Come. Don't come.
In Latin, as in English, there are two
One is to use a verb
meaning wish, etc., with the complementary infinitive (or
sometimes an ut clause). Thus,
460. Wishes.
common ways
of expressing desire.
/ wish
to go, Ire volo.
I wish
that he
may
The second Avay

an exclamation.
come, Volo ut veniat.
is
to express the wish in the
form
of,
Thus,
Utinafn adesset
!
If only we had not come ! Utinam ne venissemus
Would that I might see Mm! Utinani eum videam
.O that he loere here
In Latin a wish of this form

thQ subjunctive. If positive, it
utinam
is
if
negative,
by utinam
is
expressed, as above,
is
regularly introduced
ne (or
by ne
alone).
by
by
This
called the Optative Subjunctive, or the Subjunctive of
Wish.
(a)
and
is
The present subjunctive

translated
third example.
refers here to future time,
by the auxiliary may or might,
as in the
THE SUPINE.
(h)
is
The
VARIOUS EXPRESSIONS OF PURPOSE
i)luperfect subjunctive refers to ])ast time,
translated
by the English past perfect
159
and
(i)lui)erfect), as in
the second example.
The imperfect subjunctive refers

and is translated by the auxiliary were
(6')
tense of the subjunctive of

{(l)
The
to he),
perfect subjunctive
to present time,
(that
is,
the past
as in the last example.
is
not to be used in this
construction.
467. Exercise. 1. ITtinam ne morarentur

2. Utinam
ad colloquium veniat 3. Utinam ne nos adessp vetuisset
4. Ne fiat ut calamitatem accipias
5. Utinam omnes
linguam Latlnam discatis
!
1. Would that our friends were presonly the enemy had delayed
3. If only
I had learned the Latin language [when] a boy (appositive)
4. If only he does not forbid us to go to the
conference
5. If it only does not happen that they have
delayed
468. Exercise.
ent
If
2.
LESSON LXXXTV.
THE SUPINE.
VARIOUS EXPRESSIONS OF PURPOSE.
469. The Supine. There are two supines an accusaand an ablative. The accusative is sometimes called
the Former Supine, and the ablative the Latter Supine.
For the formation of the supine, see 170.
:
tive
470. The Accusative Supine. The supine in -um is

an accusative of limit, naming the action at which we
aim in doing something. Thus,
Non veniam
te visum,
/ ivon't come
to see
yon.
BEGINNING LATIN
160
becomes a method of expressing purpose aim and

purpose being the same thing.
From its nature as an accusative of limit, it can only
be used with verbs of motion, such as come^ go^ send^ and
It thus
the
like.
471. Exercise.
purpose clauses.
1.
2.
Use accusative supines
They send ambassadors
We have come to
our country.
3.
to
to translate the
Caesar
ask
to
demand the
the senate to
help.
liberty of
They are going to the general to complain
because he has kept back the hostages.
4.
Scouts came
announce that the enemy were at hand. 5. You met

on that day to beg liberty from those whose slaves you
to
were.
The supine
472. The Ablative Supine.

fourth declension ablative
same stem
as the supine in -um.
RESPECT things are easy or
It is
difficult,
right or wrong, and the like.

infinitive in English.
Mirabile
dictu,
in -u
formed from
singular,
used to
tell in
is
the
what
pleasant or unpleasant,
It is translated
by the
Thus,
wonderful
to
tell
(literally
loonderful in
the telling),
473. Exercise.
Translate the
infinitives
by
ablative
supines.
1.
3.
This
is
not easy to do.
Such things are very
2.
It is
wonderful to hear.
difficult to tell.
474. Expressions of Purpose. We have thus

three methods of expressing purpose.
far
had
{!))
and ne with the present and imperfect subjunctive;

ad with the gerund or gerundive;
(c)
the accusative supine.
{a) ut
THE SUPINE
VARIOUS EXPRESSION OF PURPOSE
161'
Thus, the sentence
He
may
sent a messenger to ash help
be transhited
(d)
Nuntium
Nuntium
{c)
Niintium misit aueiliinn petlfum.
()
misit
ut auxiliufn peter et;
misit
ad
aujciliuiti
petendum ;
There are two other common ways of expressing purThus, the above sentence might be rendered by qui
pose.
with the subjunctive, instead of the ut chiuse

(d) Niintium misit
literally, he sent
The
a messenger ivho should ash
method
fifth
gut anxiUiim peter et;
of expressing the
help^.
same idea
is
by the
use of causa (or gratia), /(^>r the purpose^ following the genitive of the
gerund or gerundive.
{e)
Niintium misit auxill petendi causa;
literally, he sent
sahe)
Thus,
of ashing
a messenger for the purpose (or for the
help.
475. Exercise. Translate the purpose clause of each

sentence according to the method in 474 which is indicated
by the letter in parentheses.
1.
Now
the conquered citizens are coming to hand over
their swords
and
in order that they
enemy.
3.
shields
may
{a).
2.
Encourage the
not hesitate
{a)
soldiers,
to pursue (inf.) the
We have come to resist {h).
4.
Cavalry were
them {d\ 5. Messengers came to

that hostages would be sent.
6. We have
also sent to pursue
announce
(c)
delayed three days in order to

7.
to
hear your message
(J).
The Gauls also are coming to hand over the hostages

you {a). 8. The two generals will meet at this place
{e).
9. Now they
meeting for the purpose of hearing the
for the purpose of holding a conference

will call (convocd) a
BEGINNING LATIN
162
embassy
(Z).
10.
The
soldiers
raised their shields for the pur-
pose of defending their heads
from
(a)
the enemy's missiles {a).
476. Exercise. 1. Concilium

convocetur ut Gallorum legatio
a principibus audiatur.
2.
Nolite scuta amittere, mllites,
ne nemo credat vos

proelio
fuisse.
3.
fortis
in
Nunc more-
mur
ad obsides accipiendos
ill!
tradere volunt. 4.
quds
Concilium convocavit praemiorum dandorum causa. 5. Caesar Gallos docuit se diutius
morari non posse frumen ti exspectandl causa.
Roman War Horse
LESSON LXXXV.
READING LESSON: HELVETII RHODANUM FLUMEN
TRANSfRE PROHIBENTUR.
Caesar Helve tios per provinciam Ire nolebat. MaximTs
ab urbe in Galliam ulteriorem contendit, et
ad' Genavam pervenit. Eo" Helvetii legatos ad eum
itineribus
'
mittunt, qui dicerent
'
se sine tillo maleficio iter per pro-
Caesar autem negavit se hoc concesvinciam facturos.^

surum,'* et a lacu Lemanno ad montem luram murum
Nihilo minus Helvetii transire
fossamque perduxit.
conabantur. Alii naves iunxerunt, quibus flumen translalii rates fecerunt alii vadls RhodanI, qua minima
rent
*
'
That
is,
subjunctive
finitives.
Rome.
See 474
To the neighborhood
((/).
Esse
is
of.
'
Adverb.
often omitted in
Why-
compound
in-
SUBSTANTOVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE

altitudd
autem
fluminis erat, perrumpere conabantur.
mnnitione et iiulitum concursu et

pulsi sunt, atcpie hoc conatu destiterunt.
opei'is
163
Omnes
telis re-
LESSON LXXXVI.
SUBSTANTIVE CLAUSES OF PURPOSE
THE SUBJUNCTIVE
AFTER VERBS OF FEARING.
:
477. Substantive Clauses of Purpose.

Clauses of
purpose are used as the object of certain verbs which in
English take the infinitive. Thej are called substantive
clauses because they are like substantives (nouns) in being
used as the object of a verb.
Such verbs are those meaning

rogo
commayid, advise, per stiade, as impero, moneo, persuaded,
(a) ask, as petd, postulo,

(b)
hort
or.
The use
of this construction
is
seen in the following
example
Eos monuit ne
He advised them
irent,
not to go (literally,
that they should not go).
478. Exceptions.
lubeo,
command, and veto, foi'hid,

and take the infinitive.
are exceptions to the above rule,
Thus,
Eos
ire vetuit,
He forbade them
to go.
The consul asked him to leave the

forbid you to return home.
3. The commander urged
commanded his men to fight
with the greatest courage. 4. I shall demand that they
479. Exercise.
city.
all
2.
advise
1,
you
thank us for this favor.

(dative) to come.
him
5.
We
could not persuade
BEGINNING LATIN
164
480. Subjunctive after Verbs of Fearing. Another

kind of substantive clause is that Avhich is used as the
The subjunctive with ne is
object of verbs of fearing.
used with verbs of fearing to denote the thing which it
Thus,
is feared may happen.
Timed ne superemur, / am afraid
may) he co?iquered.
The subjunctive
that (or lest)
we shall (or
Avith ut is used Avith verbs of fearing
to denote the thing Avhich
it is
may
feared
not happen.
Thus,
Timed ut superemus, / fear that we shall
(or
may) not
conquer.
When
tiie
verb of fearing
regularly used instead of
itself is
ut.
negatived, ne non
is
Thus,
Caesar non veritus est ne hoc facere non posset, Caesar did
not fear that he should not be able to do this.
Ne
hoc
Yereor ne hoc
4. Timeo ut ad
5. Itaque nunc non timeo ne non fiat pax
nos revertat.
6. Quis nos longius in finis
inter Romanes et Gallos.
hostium progredi vetabit ? 7. Milites petlverunt ut im8. Timeo ne nihil
pedimenta in castrls relinquerentur.
9. Timebat ut se adesse cognosceretur.
ibi inveniatur.
10. Yeritus ne hostes de adventu suo certiores fact! essent
fierent,
Caesar milites prima luce proficlsci iussit.
481. Exercise.
flat.
3.
1.
Utinam ad nos mox
flat
2.
revertat
482. Exercise. 1. I am afraid that you may become

accustomed to flee (inf.).
2. They forbade us to Avithdraw from the toAvn. 3. I urge you to leave nothing in
the place. 4. They urged them to give up their arms.
5. I Avas afraid that my enemy would urge you not to
come.
THE DATIVE WITH SPECIAL VERES
liESSO]^
165
LXXXVII.
THE DATIVE WITH SPECIAL VERBS.

483. Dative with Special Verbs.
Many verbs which
are transitive in English are intransitive in Latin.

are
especially
verbs
meaning
to
lieljp^
These
harm^ please^
coinmand^ obey^ persuade^ yield^ and the like,

which regularly have words denoting persons as their
objects, and whose action would naturally affect the welfare or the pleasure of such persons. In Latin, these
verbs have their objects in the dative, to indicate this
displease^
unusual interest of the object in the action of the verb

for the dative, with its
which
meaning of toorfor^
is
the case
an interest.
At .the end of this Lesson will be given the rule of
syntax which covers such cases, in the form in which the
grammars state it. It is important to remember, howis
best able to express such
ever, that not all verbs of pleasing, etc., take the dative,
and that the rule has very many exceptions.
way
is
a verb
The
safest
to notice whenever, in a vocabulary or dictionary,

is
said to take the dative,
and to commit the
memory.
fact
In this Avay it is possible very soon

to have at one's command a useful list of verbs which are
transitive in English but intransitive in Latin.
In this Lesson the following verbs belong to the class
just described (meanings in the Yocabulary)
carefully to
credo
impero
noceo
pareo
persuaded
placeo
BEGINNING LATIN
166
484. Dative with Prepositional Compounds.

For
the same reason that the verbs described in the last section take the dative, it happens that many (but not all)
verbs compounded with prepositions take the dative.
These prepositions are ad, ante, con-,' in, inter, ob, post, prae,
sub, super.
In this connection should be learned the paradigm of

on Forms preceding the
prosum, given in the chapter
In this verb pro- becomes prod- before a
Vocabularies.
vowel, as
prodest.
Sometimes such verbs allow both a direct and an

Thus,
direct object.
praeficio,
^j>/ti^t't^
in
commcmd
of^
in-
has
the person Avho is })laced in command in the accusative,

while that of which he is commander is in the dative.
Thus,
Caesar placed Galha
in charge
of the cavalry , Caesar Galba>/i
equitat//i praefecit.
Adiuvo, help;
^QlQQib, please,
iubeo,
command^ order;
veto, forhid,
and
charm, are followed by the accusative, form-
Keview
ing an exception to the principle just stated.

417 and 478.
485. Exercise. 1. You have helped me now I will

help you (use both adsum and adiuvo). 2. They persuaded
Don't injure those who are trying to
3.
us to come.
benefit 3ôu. 4. Caesar commanded the Gauls to send grain
5. Labito him (se) by river (use both imperd and iubeo).
;
enus is-in-command-of the tenth legion.
6.
Who
placed
in-command-of that legion (dat.) ? 7. Have they

8. Let us obey the
made- war-on the Roman people ?
10. This thing
9.
I
do
not
believe
3ôu,
Cassius.
laws.
does not please the commons (use both delecto and placeo).
him
(ace.)
con- is for cum.
It also
appears in the forms
co-
and
com-.
THE ABLATIVE WITH CERTAIN DEPONENTS
167
486. Exercise. 1. Civibus persuasit ut e flnibus suis

exirent.
2. Adulescens magno exercitul praefectus est.
Magnis rebus is praeerit qui sibi imperare potest.
3.
4. lis placemus quibus prosumus.
5. Huic homini proderam quod mihi adiuverat. 6. Ilia res non me delectat.
7. lussus sum hostibus populi Roman! nocere.
8. Quis
mihi imperabit ut illis noceam ? 9. Num illl adulescenti
parebunt ill! quibus praefectus est ? 10. Semper el parent
quod is semper iis adfuit.
487. Rule XXYII. Most verbs meaning to benefit or
injure, please or displease, yield or persuade, obey
or com-
mand, trust or distrust, serve or resist, envy, threaten, pardon,

and spare take the dative of the indirect object.
Rule XXYIII. Many verbs compounded with
the preposi-
tions ad, ante, con-, in, inter, ob, post, prae, sub, a7id super take
the dative of the indirect object,
L.ESSON L.XXXVIII.
THE ABLATIVE WITH CERTAIN DEPONENTS.

CLAUSES. ADVERBS OF PLACE.
488. Ablative with Certain Deponents.
CUM-
Instead of
the accusative of the direct object, the deponent verbs

utor, fruor, fungor, potior,
ablative.
and
This does not
vescor are followed
mean
by the
that Latin ever put the
object in the ablative case, but merely that the
Romans
thought of these verbs in such a way as to make it natural

to use an ablative with each of them.
Thus, where we
think of enjoying something, they thought of getting enjoyment hy means of something. Accordingly, where we
should say He enjoys life, they said He gets enjoyment hy
means of life, Vita fruitur. In the same way, we can
think of
utor,
use,
as equivalent to
emjploy m^yselfi
BEGINNING LATIN
168
/ perforni^ as / husy myself; potior, / gain possession of as I am made a possessor (by means of the thing
possessed) vescor, / eat, as / feed myself.
fungor,
489. Exercise.
may)
sovereignty of
They
2.
Gaul.
all
use ships to (with which they
We
siiall
3.
What do
gain possession of the
The Roman
senate enjoys
5. This
?
great
for
his
country.
performed
very
services
has
great power.
man
1.
cross the river.
4.
those animals eat
490. The Uses of Cum,

three principal meanings
The conjunction cum has

when (cum Temporal), since
(cum Causal), and although (cum Concessive).
When
cum means
since or altJiongh,
it
takes the sub-
junctive in all tenses.
When
cum means when,
it
can take the subjunctive in

In all other tenses it
the imperfect and pluperfect only.

is
used in the indicative.
491. Meaning- of Cam,

In cum-clauses it is frequently necessary to judge by the context whether the
cum means v^hen, since, or although. The same thing is
Thus, " I wouldn't go when
equivalent to '' I wouldn't go since
true of the English when.
wasn't asked "
is
When
wasn't asked."
is
often equivalent to although in
the same way.
492. Exercise.
veniemus.
tur,
2.
1.
Cum
Cum
nos
viceris,
in
fidem tuam
gentes Gallicae victae esse crederen-
periculum erat ne alium et mains bellum in Gallia

3.
Cum talia mihi polliceretur, non
esset.
gerendum
credidi
eum
tanta efficere posse.
essent, imperator
5.
Cum
velim.
4.
pacem omnibus
sententiam
meam
Cum obsides traditae

legatls pollicitus
rogabit, el
dicam quid
est.
fieri
SUBORDINATE CLAUSES
Adverbs of Place.
49*}.
r {a)
Where
means in
Learn the following
tvhat place, as Ubi es?
list:
Where are
~\
{h)
*
I
There.
quo means to what place, whither, as Quo vadis?

Where are you goi7ig f
means iu that place, as Ibi sunt libri, The

books are there.
(b) eo means to that place, thither, as E6 pervenimus, Wê arrived there.
(a) ibi
C (a)
Here.
ubi
169
<
[ {b)
means in this place, as Hie amicos nostros

Here loe found our friends.
Hue meaDs to this place, as Cur hue venisti ?
hie
ir\NhmmVi%,
Why
have you come hither (here)
from what place, from where, is unde.

Thence, from that place, from there, is inde.
Hence, from this place, from here, is hinc.
Whence,
494. Exercise. 1. Where is the money that I gave

you ? 2. Here are the books that we lost. 3, I will send
the children there.
4.
"Where Avill you send them?
will
not
They
be
5.
sent here.
6. Where are they coming
from ? Y. The army is in camp.
It will soon withdraw
thence.
There are the men whom we saw. 9. They
8.
went from here. 10. From there we set out for Kome.
LESSON LXXXIX.
SUBORDINATE CLAUSES.
495. Classification of Tenses.
In the indicative
mood, tenses which refer to past time are called Historical
(or Secondary) those which refer to present or future time
;
are called Principal (or Primary).

In the SUBJUNCTIVE mood, the imperfect and pluperfect
are called Secondary
the present and j)erfect Primary.
BEGINNING LATIN
170
The rules already given

dependent clauses are all
covered by one general principle, called Sequence of
Tenses, which may be stated as follows
When the subjunctive is used in a dependent clause,
its tense must be secondary if that of the verb in the
main clause is secondary, and primary if that of the verb
496. Sequence of Tenses.
for the use of the subjunctive in
main clause is primary.

This means, of course, that in any given case we have
only two tenses of the subjunctive from which to choose,
in the
and must select the one Avhicli seems most nearly to convey our meaning.
(a) The present and imperfect subjunctive are to be
used Avhen the action occurs at the same time as that of
the main verb.
(h) The perfect and pluperfect subjunctive are to be
used when the action occurs before that of the main verb.
{c) If the action occurs after that of the main verb,
either the first periphrastic conjugation
in indirect questions, or the present
tive, as in clauses of
is
to be used, as
and imperfect subjunc-
purpose, and clauses with verbs of
fearing.
1. Since the Roman empire is so great,
not try to crush the Roman legions.
,2. "When
Caesar came into Gaul with a military command, do you
497. Exercise.
let us
know how many
supposed that he would subdue the

short a time?
3. Although your
[fellowj-citizens know how many your crimes have been,
they do not wish you to die. 4. Since you have assured
us that you will bring these things to pass, we will try to
Gallic
tribes
believe that
in so
you can do
into that country,
should
cross.
we
it.
5.
did not
A\^hen we were marching

know how many rivers we
SUBORDINATE CLAUSES
.5^
Ô^^
rP
171
BEGINNING LATIN
172
Most subordinate clauses are inThe exceptions are relative
498. Conjunctions.
troduced by conjunctions.
clauses
and
indirect questions.
by
Some conjunctions, as quod,
others, as ne, by
and cum, sometimes
take the indicative and sometimes the subjunctive. Each
one must be learned separately. Following are rules for
some of the commonest
are regularly folio Aved
the subjunctive; others
the indicative
still,
as ut
{a)
ftuamquam, although^ takes the indicative.
(b)
Postquam, after, takes the indicative, generally in the
perfect tense.
It
often better to translate
is
it
by the
pluperfect in English.
{c)
XJbi
means when
mood and
as well as cohere.
tense with ubi
meaning when
The
is
rule for the
the same as for
postquam.
Ut with the indicative does not introduce a clause

The tense follows the
of purpose, but means as or when.
same rule as postquam and ubi.
{e) Dum meaning while generally has the present indicative but it often evidently refers to past time and must
Dum with
then be translated by a past tense in English.
the subjunctive may mean until or provided that, accord\<1)
ing to the general meaning of the sentence.

(f) Si, if, and nisi, tmless, if not, follow rather complicated rules, which are better reserved for a later stage.
They sometimes take the indicative and sometimes the

The sentences containing si and nisi which
subjunctive.
are given below need no special rule, however.
499. Exercise.
1.
Si
metum
habetis, cives, cur
non
non
fugitis ?
2.
Msi
poterat.
3.
Imperator ubi milites hortatus
est ut fortes
Dum Romae
sum, Cicero-
aderat, orationem Ciceronis audire
essent, signa inferre
iussit.
4.
READING LESSON
nem
saepe
Postquaiii
mus,
audivl.
eo
5.
perveni-
relictum
castra
invenimiis.
173
6.
Quam-
non credo,
banc tamen tibi pecuniam dabo. 7. Caesar
quam
tibi
ut suos a Gallls superari vidit, equitibus ius-
ut auxilium ferrent.
sit
Cum
8.
nihil te timere
socium
dicas,
volo te
meum
in hoc periculo
esse.
9.
fortiter
sterent,
Milites
cum
equitibus
resi-
impetum tamen
non poterant.
Eques Romanus
sustinere
Dum
haec geruntur, impetus in, sinistrum latus

tum est ab ils qui in summo colle constiterant.
10.
fac-
LESSON XC.
READING LESSON: VIA PER SEQUANOS.
Kelinquebatur una per Sequanos
invltis
cendum
Ire non poterant

erat.''
Cum
his
nam
Hac via Sequanis

angtistias agmen du-
via.
per
sua sponte persuadere non pos-
legatos ad Dumnorigem Aeduum mittunt, qui

apud Sequanos plurimum poterat.* Per hunc a Sequanis
impetrant ut per fines suos Helvetios Ire patiantur. Turn
set,
1 See
443. ^ See 454. ' See 487.
Translate, " was most powerful."
Literally,
was able
the most.
BEGINNING LATIN
174
obsides inter se dant
hibeant
Hi
autem cum
'
in
SequanI, ne
Helvetil, ut
'
itinere Ilelvetios pro-
'
sine malelicio et iniuria transeant.
Aeduorum
fines pervenissent, agros
qua re Aedul ad Caesareni legates

miserunt, qui de iniuriis Helvetiorum quererentur.
vastilbant
eoriini
'
LESSON
XCI.
ACCUSATIVE, GENITIVE, DATIVE, ABLATIVE.
500. Two Accusatives.

and teacliing, as rogo and
With some verbs of asking

two accusatives may be
doceo,
used, one of the person (Direct Object)
thing (Secondarj^ Object).
and one of the
Thus,
Consul senatum sententiam rogavit, The consul ashed the

senate
its opinio?i.
In the passive the direct object
is
made
the subject and
put in the nominative, while the secondary object remains

in the accusative.
Thus,
Senafits a consule sententiain rogatus

ashed its opinio7i by the consul.
est,
The senate was
With peto, postuio, and

Postulo ; Quaero,
with a or ab should be used rather
than the double accusative construction. This ablative
Thus,
is often rendered in English by of.
501.
JPeto ;
quaero, the ablative
Pacem ab imperatore
petebant,
They were legging peace of
the consul.
Ne
prohibeant: as a guarantee that they should not restrain;

transeant
as a guarantee that they should pass through.
"Hi: when a pronoun is ambiguous in English, the noun for which it
stands shoukl be substituted. Here hi means the Helvetii. ^The imperfect is sometimes to be rendei;ed began to
'
ut
ACCUSATIVE, GENITIVE, DATIVE, ABLATIVE
175
1. Eomanus Galium linguain Latinam

Komanus Gallicam linguam a duobus servis
docetur.
Pacem ab imperatore petivimus.
3.
502. Exercise.
docet.
2.
Gallicis
JSTon
4.
non
vis.
quaeram, non postulabo a te id quod mihi dare

5. Pax a legato quaeslta est.
503. Genitive and Ablative of

noting a quality
Qualitji.
A noun de-
may
be put either in the genitive or

ablative to describe another noun.
Thus,
summa auctdritate, a man of very great in-jiuence.

mdns magnae altittidinis, a mountain of great height,.
vir
noun so used
must always have an
^g
adjective in agree-
ment.
5O4
1.
He
Gauls
were
great
of
2.
Exercise.
said that the
men
courage.
Did you ask why

were
ditches
the
of
such
length?
(tantus)
Are
two towns of
the same name ?
4. The
bodies of
the Germans were
3.
there
of so great size that
the
Roman
Reader
soldiers
were not willing to join battle with them.

5. We shall
send a messenger of great swiftness of foot (feet) to
inform the citizens that they have been saved.
BEGINNING LATIN
176
505. Dative of Service (Purpose). Certain nouns are

put in the dative in Latin where in English we should
expect a predicate noun. Thus,
Tu mihi magno
ally, foi'
auxilio
a great help,
You
es,
are a great help
to
me
(liter-
etc.).
Such nouns are frequently abstract, and never plural.

An example of the same sort of construction in English
It shall be to the Lord for a
is found in the Bible
name, for an everlasting sign which shall not be cut off."
'^
(Isaiah, 55
13.)
506. Exercise.
1.
Put the predicate nouns
in the dative.
Those things were sent wdiich
(a use) in (ad)
war.
2.
Avere advantageous
Their shields were a hindrance to
3. The tenth legion

a protection to the baggage. 4. Caesar said
that he would provide for this (this would be a care to
him). 5. You have come [as] a safeguard to your friends.
the soldiers in crossing the river.
was
left [as
507. DatiAê of the Possessor. Sentences with ?iave

may be translated by the aid of the dative
with sum as well as b}^ habeo. Thus,
(not auxiliary)
We have many friends
besides being rendered

Multos amicos habemus,
may also
be translated
Multi amici nobis sunt (literally,
The dative when
so used
is
Many friends
are
to us).
called the Dative of the
Possessor.
508. Exercise.
1.
Met us
calamitatis nobis
non
est.
Quis tanta est virtute ut numquam timeat ne pectinia

sibi aliquando {sotnetime) non sit ?
3. Cui est gladius ?
2.
TRANSLATION EXERCISE
4.
Cuius est hlc gladius
5.
111!
erant, quibus in perlculls aderat.
1Y7
Romano multl
6. Hic magna
clientes
auctori-
tate est vir, cui plurimi sunt servl.
509. Ablative of Separation.
With verbs
of depriv-
which one is
deprived. This is called the Ablative of Separation, and
appears in English either as an object (as in sentence 2
below) or as a phrase with of or from^ as in the other
ing, the ablative is used to denote that of
Thus,
sentences.
MUrus defensoribus nMatus
est,
The wall was stripped of
defenders.
510. Exercise.
Do
1.
The army lacked grain.

zens of arms. 4. They said
2.
soldierSo
5.
You have
not deprive us of freedom.

They have robbed the citi-
3.
that the wall was stripped of
freed us from great fear.
LESSON
XCII.
TRANSLATION EXERCISE.
511. The Latin Order. In reading a Latin sentence,
always try to take in the thought in the Latin order first;
then, after
yourself,
clear what the Latin means., say to

Noav, hoAv should I say that same thing if I
you are quite
*'
Avere telling someone else about it?"

If your second
statement really expresses the same idea as the Latin, and
a good translation; no matter

Avhether every word of the Latin has a corresponding
is
good English,
word
On
it
is
in English, or not.
word of the Latin may

by an English word, and yet
the other hand, every
be exactly
rendered
the result be worthless

it
as translation;
either because
does not give the real thought of the Latin, or be13
BEGINNING LATIN
178
such as no sane person would ever

Suppose,
to make this clearer, we take an example.
In the second
chapter of the first book of Caesar's Gallic War occurs
" His rebus fiebat, ut et minus late vagarentur,
this sentence
et minus facile finitimis bellum inferre possent; qua ex parte
homines bellandi cupidi magno dolors adficiebantur." Let us
first make a metaphrase of this passage
that is, a wordfor-word rendering, keeping as close as possible to the Latin
" From
order.
should then get something like this
these things it happened that both less widely they wandered, and less easily on their neighbors war to bring
were able from which part men of warring desirous
with great pain were affected." Iôw, it is fairly easy
cause the English
is
use for the purpose of expressing his thoughts.
We
make out the meaning from this metaphrase, but

both order and phrasing must be changed before it can
be called a translation.
Beginning with odd-sounding
expressions, we should probably agree that the following
changes need to be made change less widely they wandered to their movements were more restricted / less easily
were able to found it more difficidt / hring war to make
war / from which part to on which account / men of
warring desirous to those men who were fond of loar; were
affected with great jpain to were greatly annoyed.
Eecombining the above, we obtain this result From,
these circumstances it happened, hoth that their movements
were more restricted and that they found it more difficult
to make war on their neighhors j on which account those
men who were fond of war weiê greatly annoyed.
It is more than likely that you feel that you could
to
*
Then, the idea of
Literally, from which direction; that is, source.
source naturally suggesting cause, the rendering /row which cause or on
which account becomes justified.
179
improve on the wording^ of this in some particular, and

you have a perfect right to do so, provided that yoa do
not destroy the sense of the Latin and that you use good
English.
512. Exercise.
of the following
Give both a metaphrase and a translation
quam secum
Interea ea legione
habebat, mllitibusque
Lemanno, qui
qui ex provincia convenerant, a lacu
in
flumen Rhodanum Influit, ad montem Itiram, qui fines

Sequanoruni ab Helvetils dividit, milia passuum undevlginti,
murum
in altitudinem
Eo opere
perducit.
communit, quo
pedum
facilius,* si se invito
prohibere possit.
sedecim, fossamque
perfecto, praesidia disponit, castella
Ubi ea
dies
transire conarentur,'
quam
constituerat
cum
ad eum reverterunt, negat se posse

uUi per provinciam dare.
legatTs venit, et legatl

iter
liESSON XCIII.
513. The Compound and the Complex Sentence.
The tendency of Latin is to use the complex sentence, that
is, one containing subordinate clauses and participial expressions, to a much greater extent than in English.
Our
own
language, on the other hand,
sentence, or of
is
fond of the simple
two or more simple sentences connected
merely by the coordinating conjunctions, such as and,

hut, and/<9/', which have no subordinating power.
Such
a sentence is called a compound sentence. This fact has
1
quo
facilius
more easily
ahould.
= ut eo
.).
more easily to
(literally, whereby
Render this subjunctive by the auxiliary
facilius, the
Abl. abs.
BEGINNING LATIN
180
an important influence on translation, as will be seen

later.
Much of the difficulty

when we learn that
514. Long- Latin Sentences.
of a long Latin sentence disappears
such a sentence is generally composed of a succession of

subordinate clauses, each of which is a sentence in itself,
inasmuch as it contains both subject and predicate, and is
to be translated
much
like
any other short
sentence, with
care to get in the connective (subordinating conjunction

or relative).
To make this statement
clear, in the
following
from Caesar, Belhim Gallicu7n^ I, 27, the

The
clauses (with one exception) are separated by dots.
sentence, taken
a relative clause. It is indicated

because relative clauses are often,
as here, inserted in another clause to explain some word in
clause in parenthesis
in this different
is
way
that clause.
Qui cum eum in itinere convenissent
cissent
eos in e5 loco (qu5

iussisset
seque ad pedes proie-
pacem petissent "... atque

suum adventum exspectare
suppliciterque locuti flentes
turn
essent)
paruerunt.
515. Exercise. Make a metaphrase of the above Latin

sentence, translating the subjunctives as though they were
the same tenses of the indicative.
510. Exercise. Translate the following sentences, which
have been made by removing the conjunctions from the
subordinate clauses above, and treating them as simple senThis also involved the changing of the verbs from
tences.
the subjunctive to the indicative.
1.
111!
eum
proiecerant.
in itinere convenerant.
Suppliciter
3.
locuti
2.
pacem
Se ad pedes
petlverant.
4.
Eos in eo loco suum adventum exspectare
5.
Paruerunt.
*
Contracted for petivissent.
iusserat.
181
517. Note on Qn7. Latin is so fond of subordination

and close connection of clauses that it often begins senThis almost never occurs in
tences with a relative.
English, and is impossible when there is a subordinating
conjunction as well. Such a combination, therefore, as the
ftui cum of the long sentence above should regularly be
rendered as if it were Et (or Sed or Nam) cum ii, etc. In
other words,
is
we may
consider that the following equation
true wherever the relative sounds

(et,
qui
618. Exercise.
nam,
in English
< sed,
(
awkward
V is
etc.,
(or
ille).
Make
the best English translation you

can of the long sentence above, which is here reprinted with
the ordinary punctuation.
Qui cum eum in
itinere convenissent, seque
proiecissent, suppliciterque loctitl flentes
atque eos in eo loco quo turn essent

exspectare iussisset, paruerunt.
ad pedes
pacem petlssent,
suum adventum
LESSON XCIV.
519. The Broken Sentence.
Latin
may
express
by the use
"When we consider that
of a single complex sen-
tence ideas which English Avould express
simple sentences,
it
by the use
becomes clear that the best
tion can frequently be obtained only
of
transla-
by breaking the
complex sentence of the Latin into two or more simple

sentences when rendering in English. In this Lesson Ave
shall first take a number of simple sentences, then combine them into a complex sentence, and lastly separate
BEGINNING LATIN
182
the complex sentence into smaller members with a view

to obtaining the best English rendering.
520. Exercise.
1.
2.
Belgae
Give a metaphrase and then translate:
paulisper
apud oppidum
Agros Remorum depopulati
aedificiaque incenderunt.
sunt.
3.
morati
Omnes
sunt.
vicos
Ad castra Caesaris omnibus

Ab mllibus passuum minus
4.
contenderunt. 5.
duobus castra posuerunt. 6. Ea castra amplius mllibus
passuum octo in latitudinem patebant. 7. Ilaec res f umo
copiis
""
atque ignibus significabatur.
621. Exercise.
Give a metaphrase, and translate.
Itaque, paulisper
apud oppidum morati, agrosque Ee-
morum
depopulati, omnibus vicis aedificilsque quos adire
poterant incensis, ad castra Caesaris omnibus copiis contenderunt, et ab milibus passuum minus duobus castra
posuerunt quae castra, ut fumo atque ignibus significabatur," amplius milibus passuum octo in latitudinem.
;
patebant.
522. Exercise. The Latin is broken into shorter senmanner of Enghsh. A few new words, in-
tences, after the
dicated by
italics,* have
been introduced.
apud oppidum morati agros ReItaque

Postqnam omnes vIcos aedifisunt.
morum depopulati
paulisper
ciaque quae adIre poterant incenderunt, ad castra Caesaris

omnibus copiis contenderunt, et ab mllibus passuum minus
duobus castra posuerunt. â castra, ut fumo atque Igni-
bus significabatur, amplius mllibus passuum octo in
lati-
tudinem patebant.
^
Cum is often omitted in expressions
Ablative of accompaniment.
denoting numbers of troops. 'Âdverb. Translate aivay. Ût with the
INDICATIVE means as or when; it means that only with the subjunctive.
ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION
183
LESSON XCV.
ANALYSIS AND TRANSLATION.
523. To Distinguish the Clauses.
It should
now
clear that in reading Latin the division into clauses
is
be
of
Having once determined what

a clause, and noticed the meaning and
the utmost importance.
words belong
use
of
in
the connective, the translation of
the
clause
becomes comparatively easy; and by translating clause

after clause, the rendering of the whole sentence is accomis the great essential, but in
be intelligently done, the following suggestions are made.
{a) Eemember that each clause has its own verb.
plished.
Practice of course
order that practice
may
(h) Try to find the subject of that verb, and the object
and adverbial modifiers if there are such.
conjunctions and rela(c) Look out for connectives
and remember that while conjunctions are sometives
times found in Latin after one or more words of the
clause,
they will regularly stand
first
in
the transla-
tion.
524. Exercise.
Answer the questions placed
after the
following Latin sentence.
Hostes ubi de expugnando oppido et de flumine transeundo spem se f ef ellisse intellexerunt, neque nostros in
locum inlquiorem progredi pugnandl causa viderunt, atque ipsos res frumentaria deficere coepit, concilio convo^
cato, constituerunt
(a)
What
optimum
esse
quemque domum
reverti.
are the subjects of intellexerunt, viderunt,
coepit,
constituerunt?
(h)
When
a coordinating conjunction
^
From
fallo.
(et,
neque, etc.)
BEGINNING LATIN
184
subordinate the second

second has no subordinating conjunction (ut, cum, etc.), the verb of the second
clause Avill depend upon the subordinating conjunction in
Thus, ]]7ien I came and sate him^ 1 did
the first clause.
connects two clauses,
must
if
the
not recognize hiin^
first is
If the
also be subordinate.
means when
came and when
saw
mind, what are the verbs in

the above Latin sentence which depend upon ubi ?
the
(c) What is the principal verb of the sentence
one Avhich has no connectives ?
him^
etc.
Keeping
this in
525. Exercise.
spem
1.
Spes
liostes
se fefellisse intellexerunt.
3.
fefellit.
Spes eos
2.
Hostes
de
fefellit et
flumine transeundo et de expugnando oppido.
4.
Nostrl
locum pugnandi causa non progrediuntur.

Yiderunt nostros in locum iniquiorem non progredi.
Eos res frumentaria deficere coepit.
7. Concilium
in iniquiorem
5.
6.
8. Optimum
convocaverunt.
est quemque
9. Constituerunt hoc optimum esse.
vertl.
tuerunt
optimum
526. Exercise.
esse
domum quemque
Make
a metaphrase
the Latin sentence in 524.
Romans Sacrificing
domum
re-
10. Consti-
reverti.
and a translation of
EXERCISES FOR CLASS DRILL
EXERCISES FOR CLASS
185
1>RILL.
The Numbers correspond to the numbers of the Lessons

with which these Exercises belong.
]âme the Latin vowels.

and give their pronunciation.
What is meant by long vowel ? short vowel ? long syllable ?
How many syllables has a Latin word ? What is
meant by quantity in Latin ? When is a syllable long ?
When short ? Define Antepenult Penult. Do you
know the name for the last syllable of a word ? On what
syllables does the accent never fall ?
Give the rule for
{a)
Eecite the Latin alphabet.
Spell the
list
of diphthongs,
the accentuation of Latin words.

(h)
Pronounce : amabat,
erat, speT,
impero, Gallia, bonus,
hoc, rex, pristinus, exercitus, Capys, velle, absens, caelum,
autem, proelium, Caesar, caput, Yergilius, subveho, inferunt, fuimus, cognitum, temporis, honoris, operis, geretis,
gereris, ferre,
consu^tudinem, Latlnus.
11.
{a)
Give
case,
momher^ and meaning : oppida, oppidum,
puellas, legatos, videt, vident,
amicum, amlcus^
puella, por-
portam, habet, amicos, puellam, puellae, portae, legatl, legatus, habent, porta, legatum, puellas, muri, muros,
murum, murus.
tas,
2.
Pronotmce and translate : L Legatl mil rum vident.

Legatus portas videt.
3. Amici
oppi(huii vident.
4.
Amid ])ortam
{]))
dum
cum habet
7.
5. Amicus portas videt.

Oppida muros habent.
9.
Portam habet murus.
vident.
portas habet.
legatus.
(>.
Oppi-
8.
Ami-
BEGINNING LATIN
186
(c)
What nouns
in Latin are neuter ?
the terminations of Latin nouns
Of what use are
Do any English
words
add a termination to show that they are in the objective
Explain the differcase ? Name any you can think of.
ence between natural and grammatical gender. When
does a verb have the termination -nt ? When -t ? Can a
Latin verb be said to agree with its subject ? Can an
English verb
III.
(a)
1.
Roman!
portas parvas vident.
Yidetne Eo-
2.
manus fossas longas ? 3. Romanus multos amicos habet.

Puellae
4. Nonne puellae parvos gladios vident?
5.
parvae gladios vident. 6. Oppidum fossas longas et muros
altos habet.
Y.
Multlne Romfinl gladios longos habent
Gladios parvos habent
8.
parvum gladium
11.
habet.
EomanI
paucl.
Romanus
parva portam yidet.
10. Pyiella
Yidentne amlcl fossam latam?
amicos multos habent
9.
12.
Nonne
legati
meant by " syntax ? " How do we know

Avhat ending an adjective should have ? In 31 the subJudging
jects in sentences 3 and 5 were not expressed.
by these sentences, what kind of subject need not be expressed in Latin ? A footnote to the same section says
do
that besieges and is besieging are the same in Latin
both forms refer to the same time ? Do you know of any
special names which English grammar gives to these two
(h)
What
is
forms
Give the rule for the agreement of adjectives.

lY.
(a) 1.
numerl,
Oppugnat, oppugnatne
numerorum.
3.
oppugnant.
Copiae
telorum.
2.
humerus,
4.
Inopiae

frumentl.
5.
Copia pecuniae.
pecuniam habent.
7.
Filiae
9.
Nonne amici puellarum
pecuniam habet.
Flliae pecuniam habet.
habent? 10. AmIcI pu-
6.
8.
tela
187
Filia
ellarum tela videt.

(h)
When may
the subject of a Latin verb be omitted
Has the verb any means
of indicating the subject
when
the subject is omitted?

Define Genitive.
Give the
Latin for daughter daughter's daughters'; of daughters
of the daughter; of the Eoman's daughter;
of the
;
Eomans' daughters
of the
Eoman's daughters' weapons.
YI.
(a) 1. Filius,
filio,
fllils.
2.
Puella, puellls, puellae.
Feminae praemia filiis dant.

4.
Feminae praemia
filii dant.
5. Datne feminae filius magnum praemium
amico ? 6. Gallus pecuniam habet. 7. Nonne pecuniam
amico debet ? 8. Tela legatis dant. 9. Magnus numerus
Gallorum pauca praemia habet. 10. Parvum numerum
praemiorum Eomanis dat legatus.
(h) Give the principal parts of the Latin verbs meaning
besiege; have; see; hear; give; owe; send; fortify.
Give
also singular and plural forms of each verb, according to
the rules in 41. Make an English sentence containing a
direct object and an indirect object with to; another with
a direct object and an indirect object without to. What
3.
is
the case of the direct object in Latin
object ?
Can we
whether a noun
tell
by the ending
is first
? of
the indirect
of the dative plural
or second declension
Give the
termination of the dative plural for both declensions.
What
case-endings are alike in declension I
sion II ?
In Declen-
BEGINNING LATIN
188
YII.
Oppidum
{a) 1.
bello expugnant.
periculo belli liberant ?
Provinciam
4.
tino
anno periculo
legatum pecunia periculo

provinciam periculo
2.
Nonne populum
Legati copiae
3.
liberant.
ilberat.
7.
6.
pugnant.
pilis
belli liberat.
5.
Copiae
Pecunia legatus
Populus
pills
pugnat.
9. Populum inopiae
8. Populus fossa oppidum munit.
10. Oppida Gallorum murls
periculo pills liberant.
muniunt.
How
(b) When do the dative and ablative end alike ?
Mention any Latin verbs
can they be distinguished?
you can that require a dative to complete their meaning.
Mention any verbs often used Avith the ablative.
VIII.
cum Komanis
Galll In castrls
(a) 1.
terls
cur non mittis
gnat
5.
6.
Inopia
7.
Nonne
4.
2.
Panlit-
Cur non gladio cum inimico
pu-
3.
Yenitne nuntius Gallorum cum copia frumenti

frumenti
Muros
9.
Puellae
What
Romanes
oppidum Romrml non expugnant.
castra periculo liberant ?
muniunt.
10.
pugnant.
Nuntios cum
expugnant.
els horls castra gladiis
et portas
8.
Castra muris longis
castrorum fossa muniunt.
belli periculo
pecunia liberant.
Describe the four uses of

(b)
Lesson.
In English, does in
the ablative given in this
ever denote anything except "time when" and "place
where ? " Mention any instances you can think of. Have
any
is
a preposition
rules been given as yet for the translation of these
other uses
Does
wit?i
ever denote anything in English
except means and accompaniment?

when to use cum in Latin ?
How
can
we
tell
189
IX.
Give the nominative, vocative, and accusative, singular

and plural, of the Latin words for Roman, girl, town.
Translate: 1. Galle, legatum audls. 2. Pecuniam, filia.
3. Quid, amice, debes ?
does the vocative singular end in -e?
Gallo das.
When
Is the
vocative ])lural ever different from the nominative plural
What
What
is
Latin vocative?
English corresponds to the
in
the meaning of the verb-ending
-o?
-mus? -nt?
-s?
Define " present tense." Tense means time is

it, then, accurate to
say that the present tense represents the action of the verb as occurring at the present
time ?
-t ? -tis ?
XL
Contendit nonne contendit ? legati contendunt.
Gallusne regnum
3.
Copias castris' non continet.
5. Regnum Galoccupat ?
4. Quid, amice, occupas ?
lorum occupo. 6. Castra ponimus. 7. Castra in regno
Puellae periculum belli timent.
Gallorum ponunt.
8.
10. Quid, filia, paras ?
venitis.
9. Venis, veniunt,
{a) 1.
2.
Define paradigm, conjugation, person-ending, verbIn which conjugations does the stemstem, stem-vowel.
vowel disappear before the ending of the first person
singular ? What is the stem-vowel of the first conjuga(b)
tion ? of the second ? of the fourth ?
What
added to
is
the stem-vowel in the third person plural of the fourth

conjugation ? The stem -vowel is obtained by cutting off
the termination
-re
of the infinitive (see 41)
to
the stem-vowel changed in the third conjugation ?
what
is
Which
conjugation keeps the stem-vowel unchanged throughout

the present tense
*
Which one changes
it
throughout
Latin here says hy where English would use
i7i.
BEGINNING LATIN
190
XII.
(a)
1.
ntlntil ?
bonus?
7.
IS'until
esne
2. Suntne servi
Timetne servus proelium?
Puella nonne est bona ? 4. Nonne poeta est
3.
5.
? estis
(h)
Poetae sunt bonl.
sunt defessl.
;
est.
10.
6.
Filiae sunt bonae.
legatum timent.
nonne sumus ? sum
Ntintil
8.
Sumus
Give the person-endings of the present
tense.
9.
;
Es
sunt.
Name
the difference between the person-endings of sum and
The verb-stem
of sum is es- in
found without change ?
In what forms is u
In Avhat forms is the e dropped ?
think
any
reason
why the u should
of
added ? Can you
be present in these forms ? Define predicate, predicate
Explain the difference
adjective, predicate noun, copula.
between a predicate noun and an object. Can you think
of any other verbs than be, in English, which are followed
by a predicate nominative? Can you give or make a
rule covering the verbs which take a predicate nomina-
those of regular verbs.
what forms
of the present
is
this
tive ?
XIII.
Cur puer crebros nuntios mittit ? 2. Nuntii

non habent. 3. NuntI gladius longus est. 4. Popu5. Vir fill agrum filiae dat.
lus deabus pecuniam dat.
7. Mel filil, quid nuntio
6. Ml fill, nonne es bonus puer ?
nostros non damns.
libros
defesso datis ? 8. Poetae bono
(a)
1.
gladios
9.
Libros nostros liberls virls damns.
puer, multa sunt perlcula.

est.
12.
10.
Consilium
In proelio, ml
virl
bonum puero
In agrls nostrls ere bra sunt proelia.
poetae longi sunt.

15.
1 1.
14. Liberl
13. LibrI
poetae consilium audimus.
In oppido nostro paucae sunt portae.
16.
Yirumne
puervidet?
videt.
17.
Videtne puervirum?
Yir ])uero consilimn
19.
dat.
191
18.
Yir puerum
20.
Vir puerum
perlculo iiuignd llberat.
Wliat
{!))
What
in -er
is
meant by
" declining " a
noun or adjective
the ending of the base of second declension nouns
is
How
declining ?
plural in
regularly
can one
when
tell
to omit the e before r in
Name two nouns having dative and

-abus.
What would these cases be if
ablative
formed
Account for the irregular form which is in use.
Why is the genitive of nuntius spelled with one

genitive of regius,
roijal^
singular of Rdmanus
has two
puer; meus
i,
while the
Give the vocative
genders)
(all
Commius;
vir; dea; bellum.
XIY.
{a)
Manebas
1.
manent
batis.
bam.
7.
Tum
9.
ndn
12.
3.
Scribunt
4.
scribe biis
manebamus manes. 2. Manebant

Maneo nonne manebam ? mane-
manet.
cur scrlbebant
scrlbebatisne
Arae pulchrae
6.
erant.
agros pulchros yident.
videbat?
11.
Magnum
scrlbit.
Scribitis
Scribis
5.
scribd
scrlbe-
Tribuni aras videbant.
8.
10.
Cur poeta aram deae
proelium
agrls
in
erat.
Puellae et feminae perTculum virorum videbant et
13. Tum populus castra muru et fossa munit

oppidum perlculo llberat. 14. Liberabat llberabant
muniebant muniuntne ?
liberant.
15. Muniebat
timebant.
et
Define attributive adjective

appositive
tense.
time is represented by the imperfect tense ? Give
the rule for the case of an appositive. Decline together
(U)
What
as appositives Cinna legatus,
Cinna
the lieutenant.
;
;
BEGINNING LATIN
192
XYI.
(a)
1.
videbas
ptlgnas
Scrlbunt;
scribebant;
vides.
Munies
3.
oppugnabas
dabimus.
gerebam
ne
9.
Manemus
gerfimus.
vastabunt.
moves.
13.
inveniebam.
invenis.
(h)
liberabo.
datis
Gero-
7.
ponetis
Op-
4.
;
timetis.
Continebunt
10.
moves
movebatis
invenlmus
movebis
vastabam
movebas
movent
movebo.
What
jugation
Dabas
movebitis
invenies
munis.
inveniebamus
Inveniemus;
Yastat; vastant; vasta-
11.
Movetis
Invenltis
manebimus.
14. Yiistas
16.
invenient
12.
pugnant
Contendis
8.
veniemiis
contendet; cur scribe bam

bant
Yidebis;
2.
5.
niuniebas
oppugnabis.
Nonne mittet
6.
scrlbent.
does the ending
What
signify in the second con-
-et
in the third
and fourth?
stem-voAvel obtained from the infinitive
IIow
is
What
the
conju-
gations are alike in the terminations of the future tense ?
How
tion
can one distinguish a future of the second conjuga-
from one of the
one of the fourth
By
tense ?
A future
first ?
What
the present
time
is
Do
B}^ the imperfect ?
from
of the third
denoted by the future

these
same names in your English grammar

What are the differences, if any ?
tenses have the
XYII.
(a)
Servant
1.
perterreo
4.
Servabis
erant.
6.
servabant
perterrebam.
;
perterrebatis
Ero
erimus
servabunt.
Perterres
3.
;
servatis.
snuius.
7.
2.
Perterrebo
servabas
5.
Eris
Erit
servas.
erunt
erat
est.

Eritis; estis;
8.
sunt
enitis.
193
Eras; es; erant.
9.
10.
Sum;
eram.
Are the person-endings regular in the future tense

of sum ?
In what conjugations is -o the ending of the
In what forms
first person singular in the future tense ?
In what form is it
is eri- the stem of the future of sum ?
eru- ?. In what tenses of what conjugations is -unt found in
In what forms of sum is it
the third person plural ?
found ? What position is occupied by -que in a Latin sentence ? What is a word called Avhich is so written ?
(h)
XYIII.
(a)
1.
Erantrie leges plebis
civitatis milites perterrebit.
servabunt?
4.
Dux magna
Plebs bellum timet.
5.
nostrae servamus.
10.
Nonne pax longa

when
perterrebat.
8.
7.
Duces
Legibus bonis salutem
civita-
Mllltes
9.
bonum ducem
petunt.
erit ?
Define consonant- stem
(h)
pueros
voce
Itaque pacem petent.
6,
praemia mllitibus dant.

tis
pens
Komanae bonae ? 2. Dux

3. Nonne principes plebem
or d comes before
i-stem
s
base.
in Latin ?
What
hap-
cor g? porb?
How may we learn from the Vocabulary the stem of a

noun of the third declension ? Has the stem been the
same as the base in the nouns of this declension studied
thus far
(<?)
state ;
Decline together the Latin words meaning our
good leader;
Roman commons
(the last in the singu-
lar only).
XIX.
Yident viderunt videbunt.
oppugnabo.
3. Audit
oppugnavl
(a) 1.
13
2.
Oppugnabam
audiet
audivit.
;;;
BEGINNING LATIN
194
4.
Dedit
isti.
Misimus
6.
munlvere
levit.
dabat
dederunt.
mittimus; mittebam.
munient.
Gessimus
9.
8.
quistis.
cupavit
paraverunt
posul.
14.
15.
Timuisti
19.
18.
Complevit
erit; erat; fuit.
What
Servaverunt
;
de-
Relinquimus
13.
petiverunt
16. Inve-
vastavit
compleve-
complemus
Oc-
nonne venit ?
complevimus
relinquitis; rell-
perterruistl.
runt.
debu-
Muniverunt;
10,
11. Kellquisti;
llberilvistl
Manserunt manent mansi.

invenimus movimus.
17. Movemus
nonnevenit?
nimus
relinquit.
;.
Contendis; continebas: continuit.
12.
;
debes
7.
Expugnaverunt
rellquit
rellquimus; relinquis.
Debuistis
5.
est
20. Flet; flevit; flebatne?
from the
Give the stem- vowel of the present for
each conjugation. (This vowel is called the Characteristic.)
When is a long stem-vowel shortened? What
two kinds of action are denoted by the perfect tense in
Latin ? Does the perfect in English have the same uses ?
Give the endings for the perfect tense. Are any of these
the same as the person-endings previously learned for the
other tenses ? Hoav is the perfect stem formed from the
present in each of the four conjugations? How can one
learn the perfect stem of a verb from its principal parts ?
(h)
tenses of the Latin verb are formed
present stem ?
XXL
(a)
1.
Laudem
equitibus
dederamus.
principum Gallorum magna fuerat.
Yocem
3.
2.
Auctoritas
Multl
obsides
iam audiviram. 5. Pedes

equitum defessi non fuerant.
6. Poeta virtuti militum
laudem magnam dederat. 7. Petebam petent petlveramus. 8. Scrlpseras scrlbam scripsisti. 9. Manebat
venerant.
4.
mllitis
; ;;
manserat
manseraiit.
Servaveriitis
).
195
servaveramus
servaveram.
(h) What time is indicated by the pluperfect tense?
Do you know any other name for this tense in English ?
Conjugate in English the present, imperfect, future, perfect,
and pluperfect tenses of
ending of the
first
person singular
I saw
What
he/ have; come.
other tenses in the Latin verb have had
as the person-
What is the tense
of
you had seen they were

coming we have been they had had they have had
they have they have been they were they had they
had come they came they are coming they will come
each of the following
they come.
XXII.
{a)
Romanl
4.
Caesar centurionem
1.
fiores vident.
3.
hiemem
fiores videmus.
in agrls erit.
Ros
7.
6.
Mox
dabunt.
{h)
1.
With
Of Caesar
flowers
Men
the brothers
(nom. and
Ilieme
multitudo florum
poetae
to the centurion
for
5.
8.
Fratres
Virtus centurionum
9.
Romanorum magna erat. 10. Itaque

turiones Romanos laudaverunt.
2.
timet.
in floribus pulcher est.
fiores pulchros miltrl
Consules
2.
Erantne mores hominum boni
Imperatoris pater longam
non multos
laudavit.
Romanl
cen-
of the consuls.
winter (nom. and
commanders for
by custom. 4. In a multitude for fathers
dew (nom. and ace). 5. I am praising you were praising he will praise we have praised you had praised
ace).
3.
a mother
ace.)
of the
they praised.
;;
196
BEGINNING LATIN
(c)
In what consonants do liquid stems end

r and nominatives in
three nouns with stems in
many nouns are there with
Name
How
s.
How
do stems in
Stems in -on? Stems in -ter?
-in form the nominative?
What nouns of declension II do these last resemble?
What is the difference in meaning between homo and vir ?
What
is
stems in
the gender of homo
XXIII.
(a)
2.
Equites muros delent
1.
Yiri
litterfis
object).
3.
scrlbunt;
mox
et agros vastfibant.
in salute erimus.
Caesar bellum
6.
portas deleverint.
mit'tent (supply
Litteras iain scripsisti
iam moverant
7.
mox
cur manes
5.
them as
4.
Castra
Obsides dederimus
In agris erunt
magnum
flores invenerint.
gesserat et virtutem militum
8.
Panels horls oppidum expugnaverimus.
EomanI pueros Gallorum perterruerunt et feminae
servl erunt Eomaflent.
10. Dux pueros servaverit
laudabat.
9.
norum.
Give a synopsis (that
(b)
is,
the
first
form of each tense
so far given) of the verbs sum, laudo, moneo, peto, munid,
Give a synopsis in the second person singular of
venio.
in the third person singular of do in the first person plural of mitto in the second person plural of libero
in the third person plural of gero.
future perfect differ
(6^) How do the endings of the
video
from the future tense of sum ?

perfect differ at all from the
is
commoner
What
is
tenses ?
Do
the endings of the plu-
im])erfect of sum
Which
in English,- the future or the future perfect ?
the difference in meaning between these
two
EXEECISES FOR CLASS DRILL
197
XXIY.
(a)
Pro Caesare;pro
1.
pidum
pro amicis.
venerunt
De
2.
loco
de oppido venimus.
castrls misit.
cum
castrls; pro
4.
Sed servi pro
populo; ante op-
clc piice
de obsidibus
manebant.
castrls
mllitibus pro imperatore EomaiKj pugnabunt.
multitudine Gallorum servl pauci sunt.
numero multi sunt.

non pugnabit.
portls.
11.
Imperator servos e
3.
10.
9.
Y.
5.
Mox
6.
Prae
Prae nostro
Sine consilio imperiitoris legatus
8.
Non
sine
duce discedent mllites a
Sine imperatore in periculo non manebunt.
Komanus
Sine tribunis populus
in
magno
periculo erat.
When may with be
(h)
translated by cum ? Distinguish
between the meaning of ex and that of ab. When must
the forms a and e not be used ? Give two meanings for
1 in (a), what determines the meaning of

Does the same principle apply to any other sentences in (a) ? Make an English sentence of your own
containing a tvith expressing accompaniment another
containing a with expressing manner another containing
de.
In sentence
pro?
a with expressing means.
XXYI.
(a)
1.
Legio ad oppidum venit.
pido sunt.
3.
Cum
de loco discesserunt.
sarem de pace mittent.

portis
cum
2.
PaucI iam in op-
timore in oppido mansimus.

5.
Galli legatls in castra
6.
Iam sub
vallo sunt.
ducibus nostrls manebunt.
8.
4.
Iam
ad Cae7. Pro
Estne virtus
Gallorum parva prae virtute nostra ? 9. ISTon sine timijre

Gallorum venimus. 10. Sub monte manebimus
et pro liberis pugnabimus.
in agros
;;
BEGINNING LATIN
198
{h)
At
1.
the wall.
the foot of the mountain.
In the ditches.
3.
To
2.
the foot of
Into the ditches.
4.
They came to Caesar.

6.
They gave hostages to
Caesar.
7. They sent hostages to Caesar.
8. We shall
5.
withdraw from the

from the town. 10.
the winter
9. We Avere Avithdrawing
not the soldiers stay in camp in
walls.
Do
Explain the different uses of in and sub. Explain

the difference between in and ad. Give two meanings of
pro.
Give a list of prepositions Avhich take the ablative.
Name the j^repositions which are used with both ablative
(6^)
With what
and accusative.
What
tions used ?
case are all other preposi-
case do prepositions take in English
XXYII.
Duceris
{a) 1.
ducitis.
tur
3.'
Ducor
ducuntur.
lamur
laris
Ducunt
5.
2.
we
We
1.
being
It is
besiege
Appellatur
munire
filled
he
appel-
InveniminI;
10.
are sought
is filling
he
fills.
3.
they are being sought.

;
mimiris.
duci-
tenemur.
perterreris.
they
Appel-
6.
Tenetur tenentur
11.
perterrere
Ave are seen
not seen
duceris.
invenitur; inveniuntur.
are saved
ducimini
Ducimus
4.
7.
Appellare
8.
are being saved
seeking
ducere
Ducit
2.
appellantur.
appellor.
Perterremini
{h)
dilcitur.
;
invenimur; contineor.
12.
duco ducimur.
appellamini
Invenior;
9.
ducis
Ave see.
6.
Are
they seek.
It is filled
4.
They
Ave seen ?
are
are
AAê
do Ave not see ? 6. They besiege they do not

do they not besiege ? 7. Are they besieged ?
are they being besieged
they not besieging
? is it
are they besieging ?
given
are they given ?
8.
9.
Are
We

are given
owed
is
you are given I am given. 10. The money is

man you are being sent to Caesar the camp
;
to the
being
199
fortified.
(c) When an active sentence is changed to the passive

form, what does the object become? What does the sub-
ject
become? Explain the
What
agent.
means and
is used to form the passive

same thing happen in Latin ?
auxiliary verb
Does
in English ?
difference between
tlie
XXYIII.
(a) 1.
stituet.
Impediemus; impediemur.
perterrebor; perterrebar.
pediere; impedies.
baminl.
dit
impedient
constituam
(b)
1.
6.
5.
exspectabantur
constituebatur
impediuntur.
Cur non
Impediar
10.
9.
Impe-
impediam
Roma
4.
servabiminl.
;
mox veniet. 2.
Nonne de loco disce-
non impedietur
perterreris
/lominum habebo
RomanTs
exspectabar.
constituitur.
constituar.
Exspectatur
tu (you) et
Perterrebo;
4.
Impedieris; impedlris; im-
Equites sub monte constituentur.

des
Constituetur; con-
Impedietis; impediemini; impedie-
Exspectantur
7.
Constituebat
8.
2.
Constituebat; constituebatur.
3.
3.
Armis
nostrls, Caesar, et
Auxilium multitudinis
5.
animus non perterrebitur.
in agro videbuntur.
7.
6.
Galll a
Multi flores in agris a
Paucae legiones in castrls ab

9. Tum a Caesare ducebamur.
10. Oppidum a consule oppugnabatur
portae et murl
delebantur fossae complebantur feminae et pueri per-
puellls inveniebantur.
8.
imperatore relinquebantur.
terrebantur et semper flebant.
BEGINNING LATIN
200
XXIX.
(a)
1.
The
2.
We
came
side of the
to a broad
camp
is
river
to
broad
rivers.
at the foot of a mountain.
In the sides of the camp are broad gates.
The fear
5. What is the name of the
of crimes is a good
place ? 6. We Rbmans have given our own name to the
7. We are called by name
place it is called Rome.
Romans. 8. Do you fear the work of fortification ?
9. The armies-on-the-march are led by Caesar's guides.
in the body in the rivers of the broad
10. Of heads
side for a great name (dative) works by a great crime.
3.
4.
thing.
What
(h)
cases are alike in all neuter nouns
What
same as in
do neuters
the stem modified
cases of neuters of the third declension are the
other nouns of the same declension?
How
form the nominative singular 1 How is

to form the nominative when the stem ends in -or- ? in -er- ?
What is the stem of the word meaning head f
in -min- ?
XXXI.
{a) 1.
you
the boundary
of the Gauls
?
3.
We
do not fear the enemy.
By
a tower
4.
6.
see
The territories
7.
Why
8.
The
10.
we
shall hold
We
5.
were narrow.
2.
Do
fear great bloodshed.
We
fear our enemies.
back the enemies'
have you not placed the men in the
first
forces.
rank
The places are narrow.

back from [their]
enemy
the
hold
Will the Gauls
place
boundaries
(b)
is
narrow.
9.
Give the case and the stem of each of the following
forms, and translate.
1.
Caedem; caede;
caedes.
2.
Or-
EXEKCISES FOK CLASS DRILL
dinum
4.
ordinl.
3.
Hostium
liostis; lioste.
6.
Turrim;
ordinem
Hostis;
201
hostibus
hostes.
turris; turri.
(c) Give the genitive and accusative plural, the gender,

and the meaning of each of the following words: finis;
corpus; caedes; flumen; turris; ordo; caput; latus.
Decline
together the Latin Avords meaning /dgk tower; narrow
river; our houndary.
In what respect do i-stems differ
from consonant stems ?
XXXII.
{a)
Datum est
1.
gestum
est
audit!
{h)
2.
1.
The
dedit.
multa bella
castra posuerunt
missus
gessi.
Castra
5.
AuditI
have been led
fields
Bellum
3.
es.
2.
castra ponentur.
sum non missus

sunt audltus sum audiebar.
MissI sumus
estis
data est datus est
bella gesta sunt
in agrls posita sunt

4.
was being
have been laid waste
led
I shall
be
were being
waste; are being laid waste; were laid waste.
have been alarmed
are alarmed
3.
are alarming
led.
laid
We
have
The camp has been broken they have broken

camp camp will be broken soon. 5. You have been
called Romans
you have been called women you
have been called a poet you have been called poets you
have been called a soldier have you not been a soldier ?
alarmed.
4.
(c)
Name
the three stems of the verb.
Name
the
formed from the present stem from the perfect

stem. What forms of the verb are taken to form the
tenses
principal parts ?
What
is
the use of the principal parts
XXXIII.
(a)
1.
Animadversum
versum erit.
2.
erat
animadverterat
Traducti erunt
animad-
traductus erat ; traductus
;;
BEGINNING LATIN
202
ero.
4r.
3.
Delectus est
delectus erat
clelegit
deligit.
Desperatum erit desperamus desperilveramus.

;
cumventl
5.
Cir-
circumventus
est.
circuinventus eris;
eratis;
6. Def ensi erant def enderant del' enderint def ensi erunt
defenderunt. 7. Nonne educti erunt ? eductus erat estne
eductus ? 8. Nonne fuga hostium animad versa erat ?
;
Erantne def ensures circuniventi
9.
animadverteras
animadvertit
10.
Animad verti
animadversi erunt
ani-
madverterunt.
(]j)
We see.
1.
shall be seen.
seen.
sent.*
9.
You have
alarmed.
have
22.
18.
We
We shall see. 4. We
seen.
6. We shall
sending.^
10.
am
8. You are being

You had been sent.'
hindered.
were leaving.
were
left.
23.
letters
Avritten.
We
21.
We
15.
The
17.
They
They
13.
have stationed.
be written.
They had not been
We
20.
left.
will
3.
have been
sent.*
12. I
We
14.
16. It
been written.
left.
shall
sent.*
laying waste.
have
We
Y. You were
You were being
have
11.
"We are seen.
2.
5.
24.
left.
19.
were
are
are
had
We
being-
We
shall
left.
XXXIY,
{a)
1.
Pontem in
cohortem
4.
{over) fluraine faciemus.
clientium
Ab hostibus non
accipit.
capieminl.
3.
5.
Partem
6.
Imperator
urbis
capies.
Obsides ab imperatore
Prima pars noctis est.

Homanae pontem longum traducentur.
9. Tela in Pomanos
tela accipientur.
accipiuntur.
2.
Mox
8. Ab
7.
cohortes
hostibus
iacientur a parte
Give both singular and pluraL
hostium.
Roman!
10.
203
magnam partem Gallorum
gladiis
interficiunt.
you receive. 2. We
are captured you are captured I have captured. 3. You
4. They
were doing he was doing it was being done.
liad
thrown
been
they
have
been
were thrown they
thrown. 5. You were not being taken we were not being taken we were taking. 6. They were killing we
(h)
1.
We receive
am received
shall not kill
you
you
will not kill.
will be received
you had
7.
you
8.
It has
we have been
done; you have been received;
had captured
We shall be received
received.
been
received.
you will have

you will
have been received they will have been received. 11. They
have made you had made he had made. 12. We shall
have made; you will have made; they will have made,
13. They had thrown
you had thrown we had thrown.
14. I shall do
you are taken they are throwing. 15. I
have been received I had been received you will have
9.
been captured.
will
have captured
have been received
I shall
10.
been received.
(c) In what respects do verbs in -io of the third conjugation differ from other verbs of the same conjugation ?
XXXYI.
(a)
2.
1.
Longo flumine
in
mare venient audaces Romanl.

fugam dati sunt (in fugam
Proelio equestrl hostes in
dare, ptit
to flight).
3.
non timebant.
Acres milites periculum proell
4.
Omnia calcaria equitum
audacium in alto flumine amissa erant.
5.
Ingens et
altum est mare et multos homines perterret.
equestris
BEGINNING LATIN
204
(b)
1.
They gave
spurs to the bold
the huge animals seized
huge bridge over
(in)
all
the swift river.
leaders will be praised by all the
powerful animals in the

(c)
Eoman.
the brave men.
2.
3.
Fear of
There
is
The powerful
4.
commons.
5.
There are
sea.
Decline together the Latin words for shar/? spur;
brave soldier; equestrian order; hold slave; active consul.
What
is
the ending of the nominative singular in neuter
nouns which have i-stems ? In what do the neuters of

consonant stems end ? JSêuters of the second declension ?
What
tives
is
peculiar in the declension of celer
of the
What
adjec-
third declension are called Adjectives of
Three Terminations ? of Two Terminations? of One Termination ? What is the Latin for seem f for put to flight f
XXXYIL
{a)
1.
aestate.
Brevissimam aestatem brevissima aestate brevi

2. Longior murus; longioris murl; longiorum
;
murorum.
3.
In iniquiore loco
iniquioribus locls.
simls virls
Q))
1.
2.
inlquiora loca
in
cum
in
certis-
Acriorum calcarium
5.
acriore calcare.
In a deeper sea
swifter horse.
3.
In iniquiorem locum
4.
a certissimo homine.
acrioris calcaris
Of
In a longer time
of a shorter
swifter ships
summer
of the longest time
with a
of very swift ships.
a long time.
To a braver man to braver men to the bravest men.

To the bravest boy to brave boys to a brave boy.
2. Ci(c) 1. Imperator potentior erat quam legatus.
cero acerrimus consul urbem brevissimo tempore servavit.
4. Equi celeriores sunt
3. Hiems gravior aestate est.
4.
5.
EXERCISES FOR CLASS BRILL
hominibus.
faciebas.
5.
6.
castrls.
7.
205
Legatum de numero hostium certiorem

quam in
In oppido fortius praesidium est
Praesidia fortiora sunt
quam
elves.
8.
Bre-
vissimo tempore milites in locum iniquidrem venient.

nil certi homines
9.
ent.
non
oppidum
sine periculo in
veni-
Celerrimas naves hostium vidimus.
10.
XXXYIII.
Amici meliores
2.
est in
oppido
quam
Eomanorum minora
Corpora
(a) 1.
rum.
quam
in pace sunt.
in .castrls.
5.
4.
Maxima
pars hostium dissimillima
sunt sorore.
defendemus.
9.
Gallo-
Plus f rumen tl
3.
Plura perlcula in bello
Pomanis est.
6. Maiores nostrl
7. Puer maior natu est quam puella.
natti
quam
erant
inimlcis sunt.
n(3n
8.
Roman!.
erant
Fratres minores
Maiore praesidio urbem nostram
Naves nostrae longiores quam hostium
10.
erunt.
Define positive degree comparative degree superHow is the comparative regularly formed
How is the comparative dein Latin ? The superlative ?
clined ? The superlative ? How are nominatives in -er
compared? When may quam, them, be omitted? Give
ih)
lative degree.
the
list
of adjectives
What
useful.
is
compared
like
facilis.
Compare
utilis,
peculiar in the use of plus?
XXXIX.
{a)
1.
ordu in
Gain tum proximi Romanis
summo monte
summus mons ab
^
The dative
is
erant.
collocatus erat.
3.
hostibus captus erat.
found with words meaning
2.
Primus
Priore nocte
4.
Cohors in
like or unlike.
BEGINNING LATIN
206
mediam urbem
turres.
6.
In
Roinanuin.
8.
venit.
5.
Ad
extremas fossas erant altae
'
Gallia est maxiinuiii praesidium
tllteriure
Minores natu
7.
Pninuin agmen sub collem
ultimis
locis
postremu ordine sunt.
in
venit.
navibus venerunt.
9.
10.
Nautae
fortes ex
Suntne animalia
ingentia in Infimo marl?

(h)
The
1.
rest of the
men
the middle of the field
the
The ends of the Avails the bottoms

3. The nearer legions
the legion
of the gates the van.
next the camp mid-summer. 4. The end of summer at
the end of summer at the end of winter. 5. In the foltop of the tower.
2.
'
lowing year
the next year
the place next the river
is
suitable for a camp.
XL.
(a)
Gladiis minus longTs
1.
non pugnabimus.
2.
Exte-
quam castrls.
minus idoneus maxim
riores munitiOnes paulo propiores sunt urbl

3.
Locus
idoneus
castrls
minime
quam hiems?
6.
5.
erat idOneus
idoneus.
Estne aestas multo brevior
4.
Maria multo
Mater paulo pulchrior
quam
altiora
filia est.
sunt fluminibus.
7.
Xon omnes
minus pulchrae matribus sunt. 8. Valium multo

9. Sed murl septem
minus altum erat quam murus.
10. Multo maxima
pedibus alti(3res erant quam portae.
filiae
pars hostium flumen traducta
est.
What
kind of adjectives are regularly compared by

magis and maxime ? What part of speech is magis? What
part of speech is plus?
Which, therefore, should one
(h)
use in saying ^nore water? more favorahle f more

^
With verbs
of rest, ad
may mean
near.
men
more
By what
suitable f
shown
case
is
the degree of difference
Can you think
in Latin ?
207
any expressions in
Can you think of any
of
English which resemble this use ?

reason why the ablative is used for this purpose
XLIT.
Ab
{a) 1.
auxilium vubls datum
iis
peius servitute est?

hostes.
A me
4.
virtus, a te
Romanl sumus;
elves
erit.
2. Quid nobis
Timore nostrum prohibebuntur
3.
pecunia lauchltur.
servl
V(3s
in
et
estis
5.
NOs
servitute
manebitis.
1.
iJ))
plur.).
Of us
3.
You
(ace.)
them to her.
us to him to it
those him her
him by it.
to
5.
them
of
It
her.
it.
4.
of that
to those.
9.
2. To you (sing, and

To me to you to him
by her by them. 6. To
of him.
us
Y.
Me
We
8. Them
By me by
you they.
;
you
10.
us.
Decline together the words meaning that man; that

How are we to determine the case of a
pronoun ? the number ? the gender ? Why are the personal pronouns seldom used in the nominative?
((?)
city; that river.
XLIII.
{a)
1.
gnum
mihi
Gladium huius
bellum a liomanis gestum
dedistl.
praemium a
7. 111!
nis
mllitis habeo.
4.
Hoc praemium
te n(3n habebitur.
6.
gladil sunt hclrum mllitum.
Marcus
ndmen
hilius,
Lucius
annd ma-
Illo
3. llilius
est.
2.
praemium
me habebitur.
Haec
8.
est.
5.
Illud
plla nostra sunt.
Nomen
9.
illius liomi-
Haec
pericuhx
j;;
BEGINNING LATIN
208
maiora sunt quam
10. Ilia perlcula
ilia.
quam
pauciora
haec nun erant.

(h)
1.
This city was saved by that consul.
from
brave consul saved our city

3.
The former despaired
of safety, but the latter did not
We
shall not see the great Caesar.
fear the danger.
4.
In these regions they found very great
5.
This
2.
the greatest danger.
(a)
that night they killed very
many
forests.
citizens.
man of these men of those men. 8. Do 3ôu

man ? do you see those men ? 9. This is Caesar
a lieutenant
the former I fear
On
this
see that
that
is
the latter I do not fear.
They have given many books
10.
6.
Of
7.
to us
to
you
to
me
to them.
Decline together the Latin words meaning this

this altar j this workj that hody^' that province
(<?)
consul^'
that poet.
What is
tlie
plural of that in English ? of this f
XLIY.
{a)
2.
1.
Tum
imperator
audient.
eius
apud
Milites
imperatorem
suas laudabit.
copiiis
Nam
4.
suum
is
3.
consistent.
IllI
laudem
summam laudem
els
dabit.
6. Sed urbs
5. Hi tuam urbem numquam
eorum maxima virtute ab els defendetur. 7. Fortes virl
oppidum suum defendebant. 8. Nam illud oppidum ab
defendent.
hostibus ecjrum oppugniltum erat.

cOnstiterunt.
1.
(1))
yours
is
My
10.
book
5.
is
little
much wider than
In
ilia silva
longer than yours.
mine.
I praise
my
do not praise his friends.
6.
that one, yours.
9.
hostes
Suamne urbem oppugn fibunt ?
4.
3.
This region
But
2.
is
ours
he praises
his.
Cicero was a great
man
friends,
among
his
[own]
city.
mine.
9.
their
money.
[own] people.
7.
was]
liis
[It
8.
The enemy
his spurs, but I
They did not
10.
will defend their
spurs the horseman lost, not
have not found
209
lose their
have
lost
money.
XLYL
(a) 1. The prisoner whom you saw the prisoners whom
you saw the prisoners who saAV you the prisoner who
saw you. 2. The signal which was given the signals
which were given the signals by which we were informed.
3. The winter quarters to which they were
returning the winter cpiarters in which they were the
winter quarters from which they had come. 4. The soldier whose sword I have; the soldiers whose swords I
had the soldiers to Avliom I gave the swords the soldier
5. The place to which
to whom I shall give the sword.
he is returning the places to which they are returning
the place from which I come the places from which we
;
come.
(h)
How is the gender of a relative pronoun determined ?
the number
the case
Keview
225.
Does the
rule of
that section contradict in any respect the rule for the
agreement of the relative ? What are pronouns used for ?

Could we express our thoughts without them? Try.
Tell the case, and give all possible meanings of quibus;
cui; qui; quae; quo; quorum; cuius; quod.
Give the complete nominative of the relative in English
sive
the objective.
Is there
any
the posses-
which
that in English
neither the relative nor the demonstrative will translate

in
latin?
Tell the case,
of quern; quarum
14
and give
all possible.
quos; qua; quas; quam.
meaniiigs
''*W'^ ^-
'
'
BEGINNING LATIN
210
XLYII.
(a)
1.
Aliqui homines sunt
gladiuni habet.
est?
4.
habebat.
3.
Quis
est
belli
liber puero datus est ?
erant?
8.
castris.
interfectus
pericula
7.
qui gladium non
non timet
6.
quo
Quibus signa a captivis data
Cuius erant sIgna quae habebatis?
imperator copias suas ex hibernis eduxit
10.
9.
Qui
Quis ex
Feminam quandam video. Quis est ?

Quae femina est quam video? 13. Quid vides?
urbe revertit
12.
Quisque
2.
Cuius gladio servus mens interfectus
quodam
5.
in
11.
14. Quae sunt puellae quas vides ?

feminarum
quarundam quae ex urbe
15. Hae filiae sunt
hostium obsides' fllios suos ad imperatorem miserunt.
2. ]ôt everyone
(h) 1. Did you not say something'?
who says this'' is my friend. 3. Certain signals were
made by the prisoners. 4. What signals had they made ?
6. A certain part
5. At what city have we arrived now ?
of these were (sing.) placed on the top of a hill.
7. Whose
book is this ? 8. It is someone's whom you have never
10. At a certain
9. Each one's work is very good.
seen.
time the prisoners will be killed. 11. I have given each
Aliquas video puellas.
one a large reward.
XLYIII.
(a) 1.
Equites sub
pedites signa
^
"
tion
non
montem
viderant.
3.
se
receperunt.
Ipse in
illls
2.
'' As hostages" (agreeing with filios).

The neuter of pronouns and adjectives often me&ns things
from persons, which are denoted by the masculine
IpsI
montibus
in distinc-
(or feminine).

saepe
fui.
Haec
4.
laudfibimus.
5.
puella se laudat
Oives se ab hosti-
7.
bus defendent quos ab muris vident.
rum
Gallos prohibebunt.
prohibebimus.
Quis
11.
10.
8.
dat
12.
14.
portis mtlro-
Flnibus nostrls
9.
Nostram pecuniam
sibi praeraia
Ipse hoc dixisti.
13.
eam numquam
Quldani saepe ad ipsam urbem venerunt.
Ipsos laudo quus semper laudavi.
6.
nos
211
ipsi
Gallos
ipse nobis dederit.
Quis sul habet timorem
Ipse
illud
numquani
dixi.
15. Quidam id dixit quein ipse numquam vidi.

16. Aliquem vidimus qui ipse hoc dixit. 17. Eum non laudamus
qui ipse se laudat.
non vdbis laudem
18. Ipsi
nos non laudamus.

20. Ille vobis
dedistis.
19.
Yos
laudem dabit
qui ipse vestra opera vidit.
Explain the difference in the use of
(h)
Which would you
use in translating
in
He wounded
How
of
ille
ipse
himself f
be used in inflecting
and
sui
He came
ipse.
himself f
far can the case-endings
XLIX.
{a) 1. Totlus oppidi
llne
equites
pedites ab
cum
his
praesidium erat una legio.

erant
Minime {nd)\
3.
imperatore missi erant.
similior est patrl ?
natu simillima
5.
Neuter
est matrl.
2.
4.
Ulsoli
Uter fratrum
maior
Unlus agminis dux erat
est patrl similis, sed

6.
Alteram agmen a Cicerone ducebatur. 8. Nul9. In nullo flumine sunt

lae naves in marl visae sunt.
10. JSTtilllus maior erat
plures naves quam in hoc.
Caesar.
7.
auctoritas
(h)
place.
1.
quam
Caesaris.
Of another
2.
With
hill
to another
with the
rest of the
to another sister
the other legions
BEGINNING LATIN
212
legion
by the
rest of the citizens.
we throwing stones.
5. They will
One cohort
4.
At no time were
3.
will not attack the
not attack the city alone.
town.
whole legion will be led-across the bridge.

legion there Avere ten cohorts.
ters is like
mother.
10.
her mother?
9.
Which
8.
Neither
6.
7.
of the tAVO
sister is
Have they any brothers?
The
In one
sis-
like the
They have no
brothers.
LI.
1.
Hi manebunt
alii pacem
;
ceteri discedent.
petebant.
tebant,
4.
Alii alio loco cOnstiterant.
pida oppugnabant.
altering equites
difficile
est.
8.
6.
sunt.
Alii
5.
Alterum
12.
7.
Alterum opus
portas
oppidi
fl
9.
et
facile,
pugnabant.
14.
alterum
oppugnabant,
Aliud agmen
11. Alterius Gains, alterius
Alius ab alio impeditur.
15.
Aêniet.
faciebat.
alii
^
venit.
limine latu, alterum collibus
timebant et discesserunt, sed ceteri
manebant
aliud
AlterTus imperat(")ris copiae pedites,
latus castrorum
altis detenditur.
men.
Alii obsides mit-
Aliae legiones alia op-
equites hostium circumAêniebant.

10.
2.
Alius
3.
Lucius est no-
Hi serAdtutem
maxima cum virtu te
13.
mox
quam reliidoneus quam
Reliqua pars obsidum
Hie miles nonne multo fortior
est
Hlc locus castris multo magis est

Reliquo tempore eos non timebimus. 18. Tuum
consilium optimum, reliquorum pessimum erat. 19. Et
qui ?
ceteri.
16.
17.
Gains et Lucius audaces erant

ab imperatore laudatus
alter
laudavit.
viri
est.
itaque alter a legato,

20.
Alter
alterum
213
LII.
(a)
1.
Quis dextri cornus dux erat
mia dabuntur.
4.
Ii
3.
2.
Equitatui prae-
Principatus civitatis a multls petitur.
RomanI habebant principes

Romanus impetum
6. Senatui populoque Romano
7. Senatus populTque Roman!
qui principatum. senatus
appellabantur.
hostiuni
laus ab
nun
5.
Senatus populusque
tiniebant.
omnibus data
est.
exercitus potentissimi erant.
populoque
Romano?
solo sustinebitur.
8.
Quid potentius erat senatu
Impetus Gallorum a peditatu
9.
commeatu intercludetur
Exercitus
10.
ab hostium equitibus.
(h) 1. The Gaul defended himself with his
2.
With our own hands we
3.
Leaders of armies are called generals.
of the
army alone
alry.
5.
(c)
We
will
hand.
The wings
4.
will withstand the attack of the cav-
had arrived
at the right wing.
meaning our
Decline together the Latin words
a7'rival; greater
left
complete the work.
army;
left
AVhat case-endings in
wing.
the fourth declension are the same as those of the third
What
of the second?
what nouns
in Latin
cases
is
Do any
nominative?
end
in -us?
what
in -us?
In
the vocative different from the

of the fourth declension
remind you of verb forms
nouns
LIIL
{a)
2.
1.
In the plain; of the plain; they see the plain.
Of the days
five days.
plain.
4.
in five days
the
camp was
besieged for
3. On that day hostages will be sent into the

However, the Gauls will not exchange hostages.
BEGINNING LATIN
214
I will
5.
draw up the
on the day of
line of battle
their
6. We shall exchange; you have exchanged.

arrival.
8. In a few days
7. Will you give us a pledge of safety ?
(into)
your
under
protection.
come
shall
we
9. Caesar
had the utmost (summus) confidence in (dat.) his legions.

10. For five days the army besieged the town.
1.
Hostes adventum classis Komanae timent.
{}))
2.
Itaque in acie se Instruxerunt.
4.
Obsides inter nos non damns.
nostram
7.
tis.
die venient?
Yenientne in fidem
5.
quam ex coUe vidisquam murus.
In planitiem venient
6.
Fossa multls pedibus longior erat
marl omnis instructa
Classis in
8.
in
Quo
3.
hoc loco mansimus.
10.
erat.
Dies decern
9.
Fossa decern pedes alta
est.
LIY.
{a) 1.
64.
7.
29, 38, 47, 55.

75, 84, 93, 27.
4.
92, 24, 46, 37.
4000 swords
miles
45, 33, 22, 31.

65, 96, 85, 76.
Q%
44, 53,
to 5000 soldiers.
78.
10.
3.
6.
43, 52, 32,
21, 62, 73, 87.
1000 ships; of
9.
Six miles
of seven
of one mile.
1.
(h)
8.
2.
5.
Tres et viginta naves sunt in
illo
flumine.
2.
In
una nave sunt nonaginta quinque nautae. 3. Ille vir

4. Septem et sexaginta
octoginta octo servos habet.
obsides dati sunt.
maior natu
est
5.
quam
quaginta numero
(in
septuaginta militibus
cum
Ille vir
10.
6.
number)
ille
quadraginta annos
et
IstI
sunt.
amici sex et quin7.
Cum
duobus
tribunus proelio discessit.
mille navibus veniet.
faciet.
unum
hic puer.
9.
Decem
8.
et
Rex
milia passuum iter
Tria milia civium in proelio interfecta sunt.
215
LYI.
MiUe et sescentos annos manebat ci vitas Eomana.

Prlmo impetu nostrorum hostes perterriti sunt. 3. Al-
(a) 1.
2.
terlus oppidi niurus mllle passibus longior est

rius.
4.
quam
alte-
Quattuor sunt in muro portae, quarum una vigintl
pedes lata
est, alia
duobus pedibus angustior quam prima,
autem tribus pedibus latior quam secunda, quarta,

quae minima est, septem pedibus angustior quam prima.
6. Valium
5. Passus Romanus quinque habebat pedes.
quingentos passus longum erit. 7. Nam munltiones quas
milites faciunt centum pedibus sunt longiores quam ceterae.
8. QuTngentI passus duo milia et quingenta pedes habent.
9. Triginta milia passuum ex hibernis ad quoddam op10. Die septimo quattuor milia
pidum iter fecerunt.
tertia
quadringenti quadraginta quattuor militSs venerunt.
What
is a cardinal numeral ? an ordinal numeral ?

numerals are not declined ? When is the word for
one in the plural ? Give a rule for the case of mllle, singuIn what do most multiples of ten end ?
lar and plural.
(b)
What
multiples of a hu7idred f
LYII.
(a) 1.
Aegre sub montem nos recepimus.
opus suum optime

tu
populum defendet.
hostis
iecerunt.
exspectavimus.
sumus.
8.
facit.
Y.
5.
6.
4.
3.
Nemo
2.
Quisque
diligentius
quam
Graviter defensores in fossam
Satis
Maxime
Galllne acrius
diu adventum
tuum, amice,
gladils in flilmine impedlti
quam RomanI pugnabunt?
Quisque audacissime pugnabit.
9.
LegatI, qui de pace
BEGINNING LATIN
216
venerant, diutissime apud imperatorem clarum manserunt.

10.
Equites acriter impetum fecerunt.
(b)
The town
The gates were more easily
TJie troops fought very sharply.
1.
was bravely defended.

destroyed than the
3.
Avails.
completed this with
4.
2.
Did you march very far ? 6. Each

7. Some Avill do this better
than we. 8. You do not come often enough. 9. Will
you not stay with your friends a little longer ? 10. The
battle was heard far and wide.
great difficulty.
5.
one did his work carefully.
LYIII.
Eomae
{a) 1.
terris
multl erant servi.
plurimi servl venerant.
exercitus
Romanl
cherrima
erat.
omnium.
6.
5.
8.
3.
facient.
Roma
ex
alils
in alias terras
Corinthus urbs pul-
4.
CorinthI multae arae deorum erant

ille Corinthum pervenit et
Quid hominibus dixit quos Corinthi
Paulus {Paid)
aras ipse vidit.
invenit
iter
Romam
2.
"
7.
Non
nam
bene, amicl, hoc fecistis,
tinus est
autem omnia fecit, et CorinthI et Athenis et

Romae et in omnibus terrae regionibus." 10. Corintho
in alia loca discessit, sed litteriis Corinthum ad amicos
Deus.
9.
Is
misit suas quas ipsi saepissime audlvimus.

{!))
Athens
1.
at
Athens
from Athens
to Athens.
At home;, home; from home.

3. At Corinth; to
Corinth from Corinth. 4. From Carthage to Carthage;
at Carthage.
to the country in
5. From the country
2.
the country.
country are
Cures
6.
we marching ?
to Cures.
In what country are we, and to what
8.
Cures
7.
In Italy
at Cures
to Italy
from
from
Italy.
In Gaul
9.
a town
in a city of
Gaul
217
to a city of Gaul.
In
10.
town from a town.
to a
LIX.
Add
(a)
terminations to the adjectives and pronouns,
and
translate.
1.
Altitude
senibus in
ill-
opere bon-.
aggeris
magn-
est.
palude audientur.
ill-
4.
Me- labore urbem
senum nun milximbertatem civium
sunt.
2.
3.
su- servaverunt.
toris a Gallis exspectat- est.
me llberavit.
10.
morte
viri
su-
ll-
Profectio impera-
8.
1st-
9.
Vires
5.
Ciceronis orationes
7.
optim- ab omnibus appellabantur.
pessim-
est celeritas in
vestr- servavi.
Quidam
6.
Clamores nostr- a
Bon-
profectio servitute
Timure magn- virium
vestr- con-
tinemur.
We
1.
(?>)
shall take the
rewards by
the altar of the god Jupiter.

travelling
(iter)
7.
violence.
We
6.
For .our strength
praise to the gods
great swiftness
marsh
in
force.
I see
2.
What was the custom
of
4. The gods had sent an

For they were not slain
in those days ?
easy death to the old men.
by
3.
5.
do not fear the violence of the king.

is
greater than his.
in return for
we made an
my
give
I will
8.
safety.
With
9.
enemy
attack on the
which they defended themselves.
10.
in a
Their
shout ^vas heard by the god Jupiter.
LXI.
(a)
teris
terant
1.
Possumus
potueris.
;
potero
3.
;
poteram
Potuisti
poteritis.
potestis.
potuerim
5.
2.
Poteras
poteratis.
Potuero
4.
po-
Po-
potueramus
;;
BEGINNING LATIN
218
potuimus.
potueris
tis
potueras.
poterat
Potuistis
6.
8.
potuit
PotuI
poterant.
possum.
possunt
7.
potes.
Poterimus
10.
Potuerint
Potes-
9.
poterunt
potuerunt.
(b)
They ought
1.
We
to set out
you ought
to follow.
The speech which

you made (had) could not be heard by those who had
come. 4. I shall set out you are setting out we were
they will have set out
5. They had set out
setting out.
why have you not set out ? 6. Soon we shall set out from
the place in which we have been dwelling (perf.). 7. The
shouts of the people encouraged the defenders. 8. Do you
2.
cannot dwell
in that place.
3.
always try to encourage your friends
my work
do
old
men
(c)
with swiftness.
I shall try to
9.
the departure of the
the others tried to set out.
Give the rule for changing
What
possum.
On
10.
do
we have
to
in the inflection of
instead of potf ui ?
To what
Does
tenses does the principle of this last change apply ?
the English infinitive always have

part of the verb
is
do in We can do
to as its
What
sign ?
this well f
LXII.
(ft) 1.
fortes
Est bonus.
sumus?
5.
2.
Sit bonus.
tiones tuae ne sint longae
ut fortissimi
sitis.
audivistis.
9.
14.
ne
Simus fortes.
8.
7.
Hoc
4.
Nonne
0.
Ora-
oratione vos cohortor,
estis, qui hanc orationem

domi ? 10. Litteras ad te
11. Proficlsci non possum. 12. Haec
possim.
13. Pus amicum sequor.
Fortissimi
Erisne, amice,
mittam, ut domi
faciat,
3.
Orationes longae non sunt.
SIS.
proficlsci
Rus amicum sequar
15.
Pus amicus
nostros sequa-

mini.
16.
Eomani
19.
KomanI
Gallos sequi conantur.
cOnentur.
sequi
219
DomI maneant
18.
feminae.
pueri.
Rus ne
feminae
et
Gallos
lY.
Domi manent
et
20.
veniant.
{h)
1.
The old men
4r.
return home.
difficulty.
do
Avill
3.
all
all.
6.
nals.
8.
do
I will
able to be seen.
may
enemy may
old
men with
signals.
your signal
7.
be able to see our
this (neuter) that
sig-
may
be
Let your shouts be heard far and wide.
9.
The shouts
2.
praise the gods, that the
The signal is seen by the

The old men cannot see the
5.
these things, that they
all
10.
Let
Let the gods be praised by
All [men] are praising the gods.
[men] praise the gods.
will be heard
by the gods
whom we
are
trying to praise.
(c)
What
person-endings are used in forming the pres-
ent subjunctive?
junctive formed
is
How
is
the stem of the present sub-
in each of the four conjugations ?
What
the stem of the present subjunctive of sum ? of possum ?
LXIII.
2. Con(a) 1. Haec omnia dixl ut fortiter ptignaretis.
venimus ut proelium committamus. 3. Conveniamus ut
proelium committamus. 4. Conveniamus ut proelium com-
mittatur.
6.
5.
Defensores tela coniciunt ut muros defendant.
Muros defendunt ut civitatem
debant ut civitatem servarent.
omnes
lium
liberl essetis.
committerent.
proelium
cum
9.
servent.
8.
7.
Muros
defen-
Civitatem servavi ut vos
Exercitus progress! sunt ut proe-
10.
Eomani progrediebantur
Gallls committerent.
ut
BEGINNING LATIN
220
(h) 1. We are fighting that you may all be free.

2. We
were fighting that they might be free. 3. Let us fight
that we may save the Avomen and children
4. They
!
fought to save them.

they
may
Let us follow the prisoners, that
5.
not be able to return home.
We returned to
6.
the country, that he might not be able to foUoAv us
he might not follow

of the
men?
8.
us.
Can you not
7.
we may
Let us meet that
strength of this man.
They met
9.
that
learn the strength

learn the
to learn all the facts.
The facts which you have learned could not be ascertained by these old men, Avhom we encouraged to try (sub10.
junctive) to understand (infinitive) them.
Can the imperfect subjunctive of sum and possum be

formed by adding person-endings to the present infinitive,
(c)
as can be
done in the case of regular verbs ?
LXIY.
(a)
2.
1.
Unde conveniunt
Nonne me rogabas unde convenlrent ?
exercitus ?
tibi
Nemo
intellego
imperator dixit
3.
mihi dixit ubi maneret.
dicam ubi maneat.
]ôn
5.
Ctir proelium
Ubi manet
Numquam
4.
non commit tun t ?
cur proelium non committant.

ctir
proelium non committeret
Ctir illud latus exercitus
apertum sit. !NescIvI

non possumus quid in
6.
7.
Cul
Quo
Quis scivit quo progrederentur ?
mllites progrediebantur ?
8.
Nescio unde conveniant.
ctir
apertum est?
apertum
esset.
castris faciant.
9.
10.
Nescio
ctir
Cognoscere
Quid facerent
cognoscere conati sumus.

(h)
where
1.
Where do you
I live ?
3.
I Avill
live ?
not
tell
2.
Why
you why
do you ask
1
me
ask you Avhere
221
4. They could not tell us who Avas asking

you live.
where ^ve were living, 5. I coukl not tell the old men
where you were. 0. What is the height of that mound ?
7. He
I don't know what the height of the mound is.
didn't know what the height was. 8. Let us draw up the
9. Why are you drawing up a line of
line of battle.
10. Don't you understand why
battle in that place?
drawn up ?
of
is
being
battle
the line
(c) In which sentences of 361 and 363 is the indirect
question the object of the principal verb ? In which (if
any) is it the subject ? Should an indirect question be
Why ?
called a substantive clause ?
Should a clause of
purpose be called a substantive clause

exercises in this lesson,
and
see
Examine
all
the
whether the indirect ques-
always has an interrogative word (who, why, etc.)

to introduce it.
Can you make an indirect question in
English without an interrogative word ?
tion
LXYI.
[a)
venlret
venisset.
veris.
5.
Nescio cur venias
1.
3.
Eogfitus
4.
QuaerO a
ducti
sint.
oppido educeret
7.
Quis
8.
Nemo
scit
sclveris
quaeratur
1.
Kesclvi
te quid cogites
ctir
cogita-
C(3gitavissem.
ducat ducantur
Romam
Nesciverunt cur tot obsides ex

essent
tela
10.
illo
eduxisset educerentur.
a defensoriblis coniecta sint?
sciebat quot coniecta essent.
quid sciam
(J)
6.
educti
quot
2.
sum quid cogitarem
lêscimus quot mllites
duxerit
veneris.
Quis
scit
9.
Cur" quaeris
quid quaesltum
sit
I don't
know why you
follow
me have followed

BEGINNING LATIN
222
meare following me.

am trying to do was
3.
We
will not tell
were fearing
have
Why
2.
me what
do you ask
have tried to do
feared had feared
trying to do
you what we
feared
have
been fearing.
Who
4.
I
?
We
them what we
had
feared ?
6. How well did you know what we
feared ? 7. No one knows what he can do. 8. No one
knew what they could do. 9. Do you know where my
tell
you what we
books are
fear.
were have
where they had
5.
been?
told
No
10.
one told
me
been were.
LXYII.
{a)
vis.
Nolunt; volunt; volebant.
1.
Non
3.
5.
Maluero
7.
Malle
mus.
vis
volo
noles
;
mavultis
vult.
;
Yolumus;
9.
noluistl.
6.
vultis.
2.
4.
JSTon vult
8.
Non
noluerit
vultis
nolle; nolumus.
vis; manolam malo.
Malunt;
Nol(3
10.
velle
mavult.
;
malu-
Yoles; male-
bat; noluerunt; noluerant.

(b)
1.
do not wish to follow.
2.
You do
not
know
3. We Avished to set out.

I do not wish to follow.
We shall not tell you with whom we wished to set out.
why
4.
5.
6.
7.
No
No
one asked you with
whom you
wished to
fight.
one knew why he had been unwilling to come.

Did you ask them why they preferred not to exchange
hostages
8.
WEy
do they ask who wishes to be leader ?
9. I did not ask who wished to be leader; I wished to

know who had been unwilling to return home. 10. I
freed
you from slavery that you might be willing to
follow me.
;
!;
223
LXYIII.
Fit ut amicl non slnt.
(a) 1.
fiant.
5.
3.
Haec
amlci fiebant.
lium convocaretur.
non
sit factus.
Casu
facti sunt ut
flunt
fieretis.
6.
fient
Fiat pax!
4.
Factum
accidit ut
Numquam
Ne accidat
9.
Tarn amicI
10.
7.
8.
mici flamus.
amid
dixit ut
InlmicI fuerant
AmIcI
2.
est ut conci-
de hac re certior
accidet ut nos, Galba,
ini-
ut vos amici nun flant
nemo
eos inimlcos facere
possit.
(h)
2.
Who
1.
was informed
Let
3.
the
approach.
many
of the cavalry's approach
The
4.
me
by a
inform the senate of the
slave
soldiers are
informed
why the cavalry was coming ?
informed you
senate has not been informed
coming with you.
5.
slave.
enemy's
how
They had not
of the arrival of the infantry.
We
6.
shall
have been informed of the arrival of the fleet. 7. The

man of whose arrival you have been informed is friendly
The sword which you see was made by a

Gaul.
9.
Peace will not be made by the Gauls.
10. They will not make peace, nor (neque) will they tell
to us
us
all.
why
8.
they have not sent ambassadors to Caesar.
LXIX.
{a)
1.
Fero
feror
ferre; feram; ferrl.
mur;
6.
fertis
Tulerint
latus erit.
latl
3.
Latum
ferimus.
5.
2.
Ferunt;
latl erant.
est
sumus ferebamur.
;
Ferris
ferimini
Fert; fertur; feruntur.
ferebas.
tulerant
8.
fers
lata erat
10.
tulistl.
latus erat
Tulimus
9.
Feremur feremus
;
Feri-
tulerunt; ferent.
Latus est
7.
4.
fereris.
BEGINNING LATIN
224
{h)
Let them bring swords.
1.
do you
to bring those swords,
they were not bringing
We fought so
4,
3,
had not brought their swords

enemy
bravely that the
foot of a high mountain.
5.
the swords which
retreated to the
Let us bring together
6.
we found
know why you have
I don't
not reported this to your king.

all
You don't wish them

Didn't he ask why
2.
in the city.
7.
mies have been removed by the brave consul.
Your
ene-
He
will
8.
remove our enemies so that they may not make war on

us.
I Avill
9.
neither endure this, nor will I report our
lack of supplies to the enemy.
you are enduring all these

you to endure [them].
We
10.
don't
know why
and we do not wish
things,
(c) Name those forms of fero which are irregularly

formed from the present stem. Describe the other irreg-
ularities of fer5.
LXXL
Eunt;
{a) 1.
ibunt.
Eamus Imus
4.
6.
Ibamus
8.
Ibitis
il; ibat.
Ibimus
TstI
istis.
Eant;
2.
;
iimus.
ieram.
9.
lit
7.
Ire
5.
Itis
ierat
it; ierant.
ut Iret
ut eatis
ierit.
Is; Ibit;
3.
10.
ut eat.
ut
iretis.
Eam
Ibo
ieras.
{b)
2.
They have gone; .we
1.
are going; I
You will have gone we had gone

;
was going.
am going.
3.
You
go they will have gone you were going. 4. You

had gone; I shall have gone; we shall have gone.
will
5. You had gone

6. I don't know
let me go
let us go.
why he is going went has gonegoes. 7. We didn't
know why you were going had gone. 8. No one told
;
them why we had gone

go
will
many
so
they were going.
miles.
9.
We will
10.
225
To go
they
go through your
province without mischief.
What
(c)
does
ters
the present stem of eo
is
become
it
What
e-?
imperfect and future tenses of eo
Before what
let-
peculiar about the
is
LXXIL
(a) 1.
Fer arma feruntor
ut eos amicis ostendam.
publicam defendite.
3.
conare.
8.
Portas, legate, dele
Litteras
9.
Fortes
Y.
me
ad
servi,
Armate vos, milites rem

domuni vix ante (before)
;
Die mihi, Gal, ubi
5.
Fortes, milites, este.
incendite.
Ferte libros,
2.
puer,
4. T,
noctem eo pervenies.
6.
gladii.
hostium oppidum
rem publicam servare
estis
;
fueris.
plurimas scribe.
10.
Yastate
agros Gallorum.
1.
(I)
Approach, slave
approach, slaves.
me, Galba; follow Galba,
soldiers.
3.
2.
Follow
Show me your
show me your books, boys. 4. Arm the

arm yourself (yoti), Caesar. 5. Stay
people, tribunes
with me, Yergil stay at home, girls. 6. Be good, girls
letter,
my
son
be brave and good,

the enemy,
my
bo3^s.
7.
destroy our state, soldiers.
over (in) that river.

10.
Gauls,
Throw your javelin at {into)

who are trying to
8. Lieutenant, make a bridge
brother; kill those
9.
Lead out
all
make war on the Komans
the troops, Sablnus.

;
CaeSar,
make war
on the Gauls.
(c)
From
Which form
of the imperative has
Avhich stem
15
is
no termination
the imperative formed
Which
BEGINNING LATIN
226
forms of the imperative resemble other forms of the verb ?

What letter must be added to the terminations of the
future imperative active to produce the terminations of
Which form of the pasCan you suggest how its
the same tense in the passive

sive imperative
missing?
is
place might be supplied
help one to distinguish
How may
the punctuation
imperative forms from other
forms of the verb spelled in the same way ? What three

What two different
different things may monere mean ?
things may monemini mean ?
LXXIIL
{a)
Fugere;
1.
constituisse.
stituturus
3.
esse.
incepta
esse;
incepisse
Constituere; constitul;
2.
Iri
constitutum esse
incipl.
coepisse.
Coepisse;
7.
Armavisse armatus esse armatum
8.
esse
isse
deleturus esse
vidisse
turus esse
ih) 1.
ostenturus esse.
venisse
deletum
I say that
con-
Ausurus esse; ausus esse; audere.
4.
Incepturus esse
5.
ftigisse.
Constitutum
iri
venturas esse
deleri
6.
TrI.
10.
;
Inceptum
armare;
9.
Iri
armari.
Armaturus
Delevisse tenu;
visurus esse
dele-
deletus esse.
you are destroying the
state.
2.
Do
you say that I am destroying the state ? 3. We say that

you wish to destroy it. 4. He is not trying to set the
city on fire.
5. They say that the Gauls are setting the
cities on fire.
6, Do you not say that they are trying to
set the
house on
fire ?
7.
You
don't say that
we
are try-
8. Tell me why you wish

ing to follow them, do you ?
9. They tell me that she does not wish to go with
to go.
us.
10.
Who
says that
we cannot
fight bravely ?
227
Lxxiy.
(a) 1.
PerTculum
gnum
esse.
3.
multa
esse.
5.
magnum
est.
2.
Dicit perlculum ma-
Aedificia miilta erant.
4. Dixit aedificia
Dixit aedificia olim (once) plurima fuisse,
sed iam pauca esse, atque
mox
6.
Ex-
ploratores imperatorem certiorem fecerunt collem ab
lios-
tibus teneri.
form
sum
10.
Dicit perlculum
for futuriim esse).
Iri.
9.
8.
maximum
Dixit auxilium a Caesare mis-
Dixit imperatorem auxilium misstirum
1.
They
seek water.
sought
4.
would
be praised
They
said that the
seek water.
5,
were
boy
We
all
scouts were being sent
had
3.
will
was seeking had
you would
Did you
on fire would
said that
the buildings had been set
be set on fire were being set on
fled.
seeking
had been praisedwere praised.
not say that
esse.
esse.
They say that the enemy are fleeing have

enemy were fleeing had fled.
said that the
say that the soldiers are seeking
8.
fore (a shorter
Dicunt pltirimas feminas in oppido visas
(b)
2.
7.
nulla futura esse.
fire ?
been sent
7.
6.
Who
would
said that
be ent
Caesar was informed that the enemy were seen
had
been seen would soon be seen. 9. He told them that

he could see the enemy. 10. He said they could be seen.
LXXYI.
(a) 1. Dicit se superavisse
venit ut superaret
super-
Die mihi cur hostes pulsi sint, nam eos

pulsos esse iam dixistl.
3. Putasne Romanes calamitatem
accepttiros esse ? 4. Quot calamitates acceperint nescio.
are voluit.
5.
2.
Quis consulis llberos patria
pelli iussit ?
6.
Numquam
BEGINNING LATIN
228
amid mel
ego credebam te liberos
patria pulsurum esse.
7.
Non
8.
Dicit se eos pellere patria nolle.
veni ut eos patria pellerem
facere nollet?
{b)
2.
The
1.
Who
10.
nolo eos pellere
9.
Dixitne cur hoc
Consul vos haec beneficia accipere
scouts
have
already
the
seen
says that they have seen the redoubts
vult.
redoubts.
?
3.
scouts themselves say that they have seen them.
4.
The
Do
you knoAV where they were seen ? 5.1 did not know that
6. I did not come to see them.
they had been seen.
8. I do not wish to
7. Who bade you come here (hue) ?
9. Tell me why you wished
tell you who bade me come.
to come.
10. I have already told you that I do not Avish
to see you.
LXXYII.
solem videndl. 2. Patriam relin(a) 1. Solis videndi
quendo patriam relinquendl. 3. Patria relinquenda
ad patriam relinquendani. -1. Flumina transeundo; fluminis transeundi. 5. Fluminibus transeundis
flumine
fluminum transetranseundo. 6. Flumen transeundo
undorum. 7. Ad flumina transeunda ad flumen transe;
undum.
8.
Multas res discendl
multas res discendo.
Multis rebus dlsoendls; ad multas res discendas venimus.
9.
10.
Ad
(b)
state.
hostis superandas statim proficlscemur.
By overcoming
1.
2.
We
ing the sun.

river
we
3.
Do you
shall be free ?
thinks he
Avill
the
enemy we
shall
save the
tlianked the gods for (pro) the hope of see-
suppose that by crossing the
4.
be saved from
we can conquer
the
By
giving favors the general
(a) disaster.
Pomans by
5.
Do you think
routing one legion?

KXKRCISES FOR CLASS DRILL
6.
Of
believint^
for believing
229
by believing.
ger of pitching caiiip in this place
is
7.
The
clan-
8.
We
very great.
enemy by laying waste their

9. By making good laws, the Eomans became
10. The crime of making bad laws is a great [one].
the
terrify
shall
fields.
great.
LXXVIII.
2. Mllitum oppidum
oppidum defendentibus
(a) 1. Mllites mfiros milnientes.
oppughantium.
3.
liostes videntur.
4.
dabuntur.
5.
militibus
Militibus pugnantibus multa vulnera
Eqniti pugnanti vulnus dabatur.
salutem desperanti haec dicta sunt.

diicens a Gallo interfectus est.
Romanos
fugientes
rima erant.
tum
10.
6. Legato
Galba equites
Impetum faciamus
8.
Yulnera eorum pugnantium
9.
Scutum Roman!
in
plu-
fugientis ab hoste cap-
est.
(Jj)
1.
ship
coming
coming; animals coming.

the citizen arming.
eye.
Avar
7.
5.
We
4.
ships
3.
With
seeing eyes
were informed of
by a man following
us.
coming.
2.
An
animal
We see the citizens arming

;
with the seeing
by the men making

6. The soldiers setting out
Do you hear the shouts of
this
from home raised a shout. 7.

the children coming home ? 8. We hear the shout [ing]
9. The man doing the
of the army pursuing the enemy.
work was praised by all. 10. Those hindering you will be
hindered themselves.
LXXIX.
(a)
2.
1.
Yir liberos docens multa de Romanis
dixit.
Liberl a femina bona docti multa discebant quae ante
BEGINNING LATIN
230
(here adverb)
non cognoverant.
3.
Pueri quest! sunt.
Pueri querentes a patribus auditi sunt.
4.
Pueri questi
5.
non volunt a nullo laudabuntur. 6. Missi

pacem postulabunt.
7. Obsidibus retentis, legati
ab imperatore non audientur. 8. Legati his condicioniquod
discere
legati
bus pacis postulatis discesserunt.

discedite.
10.
9.
Pace, legati, facta,
Legati prima luce discedentes a nullo vide-
bantur.
Having announced this fact, all withdrew.

Having complained because the Koman people had suf-
(h)
2.
1.
fered disaster, the ambassador withdrew.

at daybreak,
we reached Rome
3.
before night.
Setting out
4.
They died
fleeing from the danger which they feared.

Having routed the Germans, the Gauls returned home.
6. [While] trying to take a town, many of them were
killed.
7. Having tried to take the town, whose defend-
[while]
5.
ers
they could not conquer, the brave Gauls returned to
their native land.
8.
Crossing a wide and deep river,
once came to the enemy's camp.
9.
The defenders
we at
of this
(pL), seeing us,
immediately began to throw missiles from
the walls.
Leaving the
let us set
10.
women and
old
men at home,
out at daybreak for the place where the
enemy
have pitched their camp.
LXXXL
1.
quit.
vivo,
Catilina
2.
sententiam
Urbe
cives,
relicta,
magno
conatu non
in periculo
6.
veritus
destitit.
eritis.
4.
urbem
3.
reli-
CatUina
Sociis victis,
Feminae mortem veritae

Caesar de sententia Gallorum certior
conatu nostro desistamus.
omnes f ugerant.
senatus
5.
concilium
factus
sociorum
231
convocavit.
Sententiis
7.
eorum rogatis, multa de mala fide Gallorum questus est.

8. Multa questus de calamitate quam acceperat populus
Kdmanus, quaesivit cur non omnes ad concilium convenissent.
Roma
9.
condita, multls se circumvenlri pericu-
Romani cognoverunt.
lis
domum
legatio
tls,
10.
profectus
His condicionibus nuntia-
incensis agrlsque vastatis

stituerunt.
15.
14.
Kos
sidio
patria pulsl ad vos fugi-
domum
revertit,
prima luce pro-
17. Nostrls
hostes eos castra rellquisse crediderunt.
non misso,
castra expugnata sunt.
flumen transire,
20.
Gallia discedere con-
Exercitus
16.
miigna calamitate accepta.

fectls,
De
Oppidis
Nostrl eruptione duabus portis facta Gallos
conabantur.
pellere
Romani de
12.
Hostibus pulsis Galli se Romanes supe-
13.
rare posse putaverunt.
mus.
eorum
11. Profectio
est.
cognita, multi rogabant cur discederent.
et
ab equitatu
questus
iniuria
capti,
quam
19.
omnes
intulerant
18.
Sub-
Hi non
ausi
interfecti sunt.
{cause)
Caesar negavit se pacem esse facturum.
21.
Galll,
Civibus
armatis atque omnibus rebus ad bellum paratis, accidit ut

subito pacem populi I'acerent.
LXXXII.
{a) 1.
fectus
Adiens
efficiens
adittirus; adibit;
aditurus
efficiendum est effectum

;
est.
est.
3.
2.
Ef-
Captlvl
reducendl sunt. Captlvos reducturus

reducturi sunt. Caesar dixit se gentes Gallicas oppresreducti sunt
est
4.
5.
suruni esse.
6.
oppressurus
est.
9.
Gentes
8.
el
opprimendae
sunt.
7.
Gentes
Sclsne cur Gallos oppressurus sit?
Quis rogavit cur opprimendl essent
10.
Rogo
quis eos
! !
!!
BEGINNING LATIN
232
oppressurus
11.
sit.
Eogatus sum quis eos oppressurus
esset.
me what you Avill promise them. 2. I told

would promise them. 3. AVe must leave off
5. "We shall
fio-htintr.
4. We had to cross the river.
6. You must protect your
have to cross more rivers.
going
to protect our rights
are
We
7.
Romans.
rights,
and [those] of our children. 8. Do you know why the
(h)
Tell
1.
you what
Roman
people
Pompey ?
give
9.
going to give the military command to
is
must not be given
It
to a greater
it
man
than
to him.
10.
Pompey,
(to)
You must
citizens.
LXXXIII.
2. Ne veniat;
(a) 1. VenI; venlte; veniat; veniant.
ne veniant noli venire nollte venire. 3. Utinam veniat;
utinam veniant; ne venerit; ne venerint; utinam ne
;
veniat
nam
poUiceri
liceamur.
flat
polliceri
Fit
10.
fiet
Yeta
1.
ne pollicitus
may
9.
Would
6.
7.
Uti-
Noll
Polli-
flat
ne
nolite vetare
flat
utinam
ne vetueris
utinam ne vetuissemus
May we
all
be present
3.
not forbid us to cease from this attempt
If only they
!
sis.
5.
PoUiceatur; ne pol-
8.
utinam
vetate
;
polliceretur
Let him not destroy the Gauls.
plain
10.
venlsset ne veniant
fiat
utinam vetent
Don't delay. 2.
going to the Rhine

7.
that you
4.
9.
ne vetes
(h)
nolite
veniret
pollicitus esset
pollicemini; pollicentor.
cere;
ne
Utinam
4.
pollicearis
6.
that
we were
"Would that you had conquered

off fighting
8. Don't com-
would leave
Would
5.
that Caesar were defending our rights
that that city had never been founded
EXERCISES FUR CLASS DRILL
233
LXXXIY.
Vonerunt urbem visum. 2. Galll legritOs mittunt
3. Ad Pompeium
questuin quod inifiriris acceperunt.
efimus quaesTtum cur domi herl n(3ii fuerit. 4. Dixl eum
interfectum iri.
5. Facile factil est hoc oppidum expu(a)
1.
gnilre.
7.
quam
Mirabile visu erat
6.
ProficTscamur ad hostls Insequendos.
8.
In ununi locum
convenerunt armijrum tradendorum causa.
sumus
orati(3nis
Gallia Gallorum
(b)
tuae audiendae
causil.
opprimendorum
pugnarent.
fortiter
Omnes adNonne est in
0.
10.
causil ?
Substitute for the expressions of purpose in the
above sentences others, as indicated by the letters in

2. {a\
1. (a), (h), (c).
parentheses, which refer to 474.
{h\ {d),
(e).
3.
(a),
{h\
(e).
9. (a), (b), (c), (e).
{h), (e),
{a),
7.
(^>),
(c),
(e).
8.
(^0,
10. (), {b), (.).
LXXXYL
(a)
1.
Quis nihil timet?
Quis
2.
mm
timet ne bona,
Nonne timebas ne linguam Latinam numamittat?

quam discere posses ? 4. Nunc autem num times ut eam
6. Senex
5. Yos hortor, puerl, ut boni sitis.
discas?
3.
adulescentes
7.
hortatus
est
ne
fortiter
mm
pugnarent.
Senex milites hortatus ut fortissime pro patria pugnarent:

8. Timesne ne scutls amissis
veritus est ne fugerent.
non
Roman! de
proelio discedant ?
pro patria pugnetis.
Yos moneo, milites, ut

magis est timendum ne
9.
10. Mult(3
audacius (too boldly) hostis insequantur
non pugnent.
quam ne
fortiter
BEGINNING LATIN
234
(h)
am
1.
come.
4.
he
afraici^
he has not come.
We
Avill
not fear that he

is
may
not there.
8.
accustomed to delay
delay.
10. I
am
2. I
afraid
were afraid that you would not

were afraid that you had not come. 5. I
urged him to fear nothing
gage
not come.
We
3.
7.
Are you
9.
than death.
less
die.
am
6.
He
afraid that he has
am
does
afraid that the bag-
become
not afraid that you
was afraid that you had lingered
Avill
there.
LXXXYIL
have persuaded them to go
had persuaded
them to set out. 3. They commanded him to go (express
in two ways). 4. I shall forbid you to come. 5. Shall you
not harm tiiose who have harmed your friends ? 6. You
cannot please those whom you wish to harm.
7. The
Roman people is about to make war on the Gauls. 8. Do
you know Avhy they are going to make war on us ?
9. Tell us who will be in command of the army.
10. They
1.
out.
say that Caesar has been placed in
2. I
command of
that army.
Can you not persuade him to help us ? 12. He does

not Avish to harm you, but he is afraid that you will make
war on his allies. 13. The trusty allies never hesitate to
pursue those who have tried to harm us. 14. Children,
11.
obey your fathers and mothers.

injured
my
brothers!
friends
17.
16.
The
that they
Don't you believe
but I will not help you.

20. I can't
O
19.
15.
me ?
that I had never
may
not
harm our
18. I believe
you,
Persuade him to believe you.
persuade them to
make war on your
9-bsence pf the that does not affect the translation.
allies.
Who
21.
to
in
is
command
235
army which has been
of the
sent
make war on our enemies ?
LXXXYIIL
(a) 1.
Mox
Gallia potieminT.
Hinc mox
2.
proficis-
Amicis nostrJs fruilmur.
4.
Milites in proelio
et gladiis et scutis uti cOnsueverunt.
5.
Quis nescit qui bus
ceniiir.
3.
rebus vescantur equi
scrlbendum
non ad scrlbendum
est cuius cives
9.
Quo
6.
Die mihi, puer, quibus rebus ad

7. Gladiis ad pugnandum,
uti consueveris.
se
titimur.
8.
Romanos
obsides mittentur ?
Imperator terra potitus
superare posse putaverant.
10. Captivl eo
mittentur unde
numquam hue revertere poterunt.

(h)
1. Where is he ?
2. Where have they come from ?
4. There we found nothing.
3. Where are you going?
5.
I shall
yesterday.
go there to-morrow.
7.
Come
here,
my
6.
We
friend.
came from there

8. Here is a new
book which I wish you to see. 9. We shall all set out

from here at daybreak. 10. You have performed a service by which you have pleased the senate.
LXXXIX.
(a) 1.
eram.
mecum
3.
4.
Dum eum adiuvare

2.
Quamquam
venias, volo
tibi
tamen
conor, ipse in
persuadere
magno
periculo
non possum ut
te audire quid dicturus sim.
Postquam Gallia potitus est, in alias terras est profectus.

Ubi eo pervenl, bene intellegebam numquam me inde
revertere posse sine auxilio tuo.

vis,
5.
ante lucem non proficiscemur.
Nisi nos te relinquere

6.
Cum
pater filium
bp:ginning latin
236
hortatus esset ut ibi maneret,

7.
Cum
is
tamen
patri
non
paruit.
eo pervenissem, timebain ut revertere possem.
amicis mels nocebis, ego tibi
8.
Si
9.
Caesar ut intellexit socios
sibi
eorum ad colloquium convocavit.
non
10.
numquam
adero.
paruisse, principes
Principes ad col-
loquium venerunt, ut audirent quid imperator dicere

vellet.
was obeying you, you Avere trying to

Although they do not use swords, yet we
know that they are brave. 3. After the general had performed great services for his country, he died in the town
where he had been accustomed to live. 4. Although they
have no (not) fear of death, yet they are not braver than
other men.
5. Because you do not know Avhere I came
from, do you think that you are braver than I ? 6. We use
the things that Ave have. 7. While the enemy Avere bravely
resisting in one place, some of our men attacked the camp
at another place.
8. While I am present, I Avish to hear
your speech. 9. While I am enjoying this poAver, I Avish
to help you all.
10. While some Avere hancUng over the
arms, others were trying to escape.
(b)
1.
AVhile I
harm me.
2.
FORMS
The constructive method employed
makes it undesirable and unnecessary
The system here adopted is designed
in
to
neutralizing the effect of the Exercises.
I.
NOUNS.
Declension
the treatment of inflections
to give
I.
all
facilitate
paradigms
in full.
reviews, without
238
BEGINNING LATIN
Declension
III.
FOKMS
n. ADJECTIVES.
First
and Second Declensions.
239
240
BEGINNING LATIN
ADJECTIVESContinued.
Third Declension.
FORMS
IRREGULAR ADJECTIVES.
241
242
BEGINNING LATIN
III.
PRONOUNS.
(a)
Personal.
FORMS
PRONOUNSContinued.
243
244
BEGINNING LATIN
IV.
(a)
VERBS.
Regular Verbs.
ACTIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
FORMS
245
ACTIVE VOICE-Contiimed.
Pehfec'-'.
j
246
BEGINNING LATIN
ACTIVE VOICE Continued.

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
FORMS
ACTIVE VOICEContinued.
Pluperfect.
247
248
beginni:ng latin
ACTIVE VOICE Contmued.

participles.
FORMS
249
PASSIVE VOICE.
INDICATIVE.
Present.
250
BEGINNING LATIN
PASSIVE VOICEContinued.
Perfect.
FORMS
251
PASSIVE VOICE Continued.

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
252
BEGINNING LATIN

Pluperfect.
FORMS

PARTICIPLES,
Perfect.
253
BEGINNING LATIN
254
IRREGULAR VERBS Continued

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Present.
FORMS
255
IRREGULAR VERBS Continued.

INFINITIVE.
Pres.
pERF.
posse
prosum,
potuisse
benefit.
Principal Parts: prosum, prodesse,
profui, prof uturus
BEGINNING LATIN
256
IRREGULAR VERBSContinued,
volo, nolo,
malo
volo, velle, volui, wish.
Principal
ParTo
nolo, nolle, nolui, be unwilling.
malo, malle, malui, prefer.

INDICATIVE.
Singular.
Pres,
volo
nolo
vis
non vis
non vult
vult
malo
mavis
mavult
Plural.
nolumus
non vultis
malumus
vultis
volunt
nolunt
malunt
volumus
Impf.
volebam,
FUT.
Perf.
Plup.
volam, voles,
F. P.
voluero, etc.
nolebam,
etc.
etc.
etc.
nolam, noles,
etc.
etc.
nolueram,
malebam, etc.
malam, males,
malui, etc.
nolui, etc.
volui, etc.
volueram,
mavultis
etc.
malueram,
maluero,
SUBJUNCTIVE.
etc.
etc.
etc.
FORMS
257
IRREGULAR VERBSContinued.
IMPERATIVE.
Pres.
noli, etc.
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
Perf.
See
397.
258
BEGINNING LATIN
IRREGULAR VERBS Continued.

SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres.
Impf.
Perf.
Plup.
FORMS
259
IRREGULAR VERBS-Contiimed.
60, go
Principal Parts:
INDICATIVE.
Pres.
eo, ire,
ii
(ivi),
SUBJUNCTIVE.
itum
IMPERATIVE.
BEGINNING LATIN
260
IRREGULAR VERBSContinued.
fio, be
made, become, happen
Principal Parts
INDICATIVE.
Pres.
fio, fieri,
factus
SUBJUNCTIVE.
sum
IMPERATIVE.
SPECIAL VOCABULARIES
The numbers correspond with the numbers
of the Lessons.
II.
amicus, -i/ m., friend.

legatus, -i, m., lieutenant.
oppidum,
murus,
puella, -ae,
m., wall (of a town).
-i,
-J.,
porta, -ae,
n.,
town,
gate.
f.,
girl.
f.,
non, not.
III.
altus, -a, -urn,' high, deep.

et,
and.
fossa, -ae,
magnus,
-a,
multus,
-a,
parvus, -a, -um,
m., sword.
gladius,
-i,
habeo,
habere,
pi.
many.
ditch.
f.,
-um, large, great.

-um, much; in
habitum,^
habui,
Romanus,
have.
little,
small.
pauci, -ae, -a, few.

-i,
m.,
Roman.
video, videre, vidi, visum, see.
-um, wide, broad

longus, -a, -um, lon^f.
latus, -a,
IV.
copia, -ae,
filia,
-ae,
numerus,
-i, n.,
f.,
-i,
pecunia, -ae,
grain.
telum,
m., number.
singular of nouns
is
-i,
given, followed
oppugnavi,
besiege.
f.,
provincia, -ae,
lack, want.
The nominative
oppugnare,
oppugnatum,
daughter.
frumentum,
inopia, -ae,
oppugno,
supply.
f.,
f.,
money.
f.,
province.
n., missile.
by the termination
of the geni-
tive singular.
3
3
The nominative masculine, feminine, and neuter of adjectives is given.

The forms of the verb here given are called the Principal Parts. Their use
explained later
it
occurs.
( 41, 107, 170),
will be
but they should be memorized for each verb as soon as
BEGmNING LATIN
262
(V.
New
words occurring in the Reading Lessoas must be looked for in
the General Vocabulary.

VI.
auditum,
audivi,
audire,
audio,
hear.
datum,
do, dare, dedi,
give.
fortify.
debeo, debere, debui, debitum, owe.
praemium,
-i, n.,
reward.
m., son.
filius, -i,
Gallus,
mitto, mittere, misi, missum, send.

munio, munire, munivi, munitum,
ambassador, see lieutenant, Voc.

weapon, see missile, Voc. IV.
m., a Gaul.
-i,
inimicus,
-i,
m., enemy.
I.
VII.
annus,
pilum,
m., year.
-i,
bellum,
-i, n.,
expugnare,
expugno,
n., javelin.
-i,
populus,
ivar.
-I,
m., people, nation.
expugnavi, pugno, pugnare, pugnavi, pugna-
tum,
expugnatum, take (by besieging).

libero, liberare, liberavi, liberatum,
fight.
quattuor, indeclinable, four.
free.
periculum,
-i, n.,
danger.
troops, forces, pi. of copia.
See Voc.
IV.
VIII.
-orum,
cum, prep. w.
castra,
n. pi.,
camp.
littera, -ae,
(In the
abl., with.
in,
letter.
means
a letter of the alphabet; in the
cur, why.
hora, -ae,
f.,
singular, littera
f.,
hour.
plural,
prep. w. abl., in.
nuntius,
an
-i,
epistle.)
m., messenger.
IX.
et
et,
both
and.
gero, gerere, gessi, gestum, wage,
conduct, carry on.

quid, what.
relinquo, relinquere, reliqui, relic-
tum,
vallum,
leave.
-i, n.,
rampart.
263
XL
contendo,
contendere,
contendi,
contentum, haden.
contineo, continere, continui, con-
tentum, restrain.
regnum,
-i, n.,
kingdom.
teneo, tenere, tenui', hold.
occupo, occupare, occupavi, occu-
patum,
pono, ponere, posui, positum, place;

castra pono, jritch a camp.
timeo, timere, timui,* fear, be afraid
seize.
(of).
paro, parare, paravi, paratum, pre-
venio, venire, veni, ventum,
come.
pare, prepare for.
XII.
bonus, -a, -um, good.

defessus, -a,
femina, -ae,
-um, wearied,
f., woman.
tired.
proelium,
-I, n., battle.
servus,
m., slave.
sum,
-i,
esse, fui, futurus, be.
poeta, -ae, m., poet.
XIII.
ager, agri, m.,
consilium,
-i,
field.
n.,
plan, advice, de-
puer, pueri, m.,

Vergilius,
sign.
Roman
creber, crebra, crebrum, frequent.
dea, deae,
f.,
liber, libera,
liber, libri,
goddess.
liberum,
bo7j.
Vergili,
m.,
Vergil,
poet,
vir, viri,
m., man.
message,
same word
free.
m., book.
mens, mea, meum, my, mine.
as messenger,
Voc. VIII.
XIV.
ara, -ae,
f.,
scribo,
altar.
maneo, manere, mansi, mansum,
scribere,
tribunus,
stay, remain.
pulcher, pulchra, pulchrum, beauti-
scripsi,
write.
tum,
-i,
m., tribune.
then.
ful.
verbs do not have
all
ihe principal parts.
scriptum,
BEGINNING LATIN
264
XVI.
idoneus, -a, -um, suitable.
nam,
invenio, invenire, inveni, inventum,
pueri,
locus,
-i,
m.
(pi. loca,
-orum,
m.
-orum,
(Children
find.
of
children.
pi.,
free
called liberi; pueri
n.),
parents
is
are
a general
word.)
place.
moveo,
movere,
motum, Romanus,
movi,
move; castra moveo, break camp.
mox,
conj., for.
-um, Roman.
-a,
vasto, vastare, vastavi, vastatum,
soon.
lay waste.
XVII.
and
itaque,
so;
therefore;
accord-
translated before the
precedes
ingly.
perterreo, perterrere, perterrui, per-
like -ne.
enclitic,
servo, servare, servavi, servatum,
territum, terrify.
This word
-que, and.
word which
and. is an
See 25.
it,
is
always
save, preserve.
xvm.
civitas, -tatis,
f.,
peto, petere, petivi, petitum, seek.
state.
dux, ducis, m., leader.

lex, legis,
miles,
f.,
commons.
f.,
princeps, -ipis, m., chief.
m., soldier.
-itis,
pax, pads,
plebs, plebis,
law.
f.,
saliis, -utis, f., safety.
vox, vocis,
peace.
f.,
voice, word.
XIX.
compleo, complere, complevi, completum, fill up, fill.
fletum, weep.
fleo, flere, flevi,
semper, always.
deletum, de-
deleo, delere, delevi,

stroy.
XXI.
auctoritas, -tatis,
eques,
-itis,
f.,
influence.
m., horseman, knight.
obses, -idis, m., hostage.

pes, pedis, m., foot.
iam, now, already.
servitiis, -tutis,
laus, laudis,
virtus, -tutis,
f.,
praise.
f.,
f.,
slavery.
courage.
265
XXII.
general),
as
distinguished
Caesar, -aris, m., Caesar.
(in
centurio, -onis, m., centurion.
from populus, people
consul, -ulis, m., consul.
imperator,
m., flower.
flos, floris,
hiems, hiemis,
f.,
(a nation),
m., commander,
general.
m., brother.
f rater, fratris,
-oris,
laudo, laudare, laudavi, laudatum,
winter.
praise.
homo, hominis, m. and f., man. mater, matris, f., mother.

Homo means man considered as mos, moris, m., custom.
a
human
being, while vir
is
man
woman,
and sometimes means hero. The
pi., homines,
may mean people
multitude,
as distinguished from
large
-dinis,
multitude,
f.,
number.
pater, patris, m., father,

ros, roris, m., dew.
No new words
in
XXIII.
XXIV.
a, ab, prep,
with
away
abl.,
from,
ante,
prep,
with
abl.,
out
of,
from.
prep,
with ace,
in
before,
prae, prep, with abl., in comparison
front of.
de,
ex,
e,
from.
prep,
with.
with
abl.,
down from,
pro, prep,
from, about.
behalf
discedere,
discedo,
discessi,
dis-
with
abl., in front of,
in
of, for.
sine, prep,
with
abl., without.
cessum, withdraw.
XXVI.
ad, prep,
with ace,
to,
towards,
for,
in,
prep, with abl., in, on, at; with
ace,
mons, montis, m,, mountain.

sub, prep, with abl., under, at the
near.
into, to.
legio, -onis,
f.,
foot of;
with ace, under,
to the
foot of.
timor, -oris, m., fear.
legion.
XXVII.
a,
ab, prep,
with
abl.,
by, from.
munitio. -nnis,
f.,
fortification.
appello, appellare, appellavi, appel-
latum,
call.
ducd, ducere, duzi, ductum, lead.
guide, see leader, Voc.
XVIII.
BEGINNING LATIN
266
XXVIII.
animus, -i, m., mind.
arma, -drum, n. pi.; arms.
auxilium,
-i, n.,
constituo,
exspecto,
aid, help.
constituere,
exspectare,
exspectavi,
exspectatum, await.
impedio, impedire, impedivi,
im-
peditum, hinder.
constitui,
constitutum, station.
perterreo, perterrere, perterrui, per-
territum, alarm, terrify.
XXIX.
agmen, -minis,
n.,
army
{on the
latus, -eris, n., side.
nomen, -minis,
march).
caput, capitis, n
corpus, -oris, n.
flumen, -minis,
opus, -eris,
head,
body.
n.,
n.,
name.
work.
scelus, -eris, n., crime.
sed, but.
n., river.
XXXI.
amitto, amittere, amisi, amissum,
pi.),
cus
lose.
angustus, -a, -um, narrow.

caedes, -dis,
coUoco,
f.,
collocavi,
col-
primus, -a, -um,
-is,
hibitum, hold back, check.
hostis, -is,
In
m., end, boundary.
pi., territories,
first.
prohibeo, prohibere, prohibui, pro-
locatum, place, station.

finis,
(public, while inimi-
a personal enemy).
ordo, -dinis, m., rank.
bloodshed, slaughter.
collocare,
enemy
is
lands, country.
m. (generally found
reliquus, -a,
turris, -is,
-um, remaining,
f.,
rest of.
tower.
in
No new words
in
XXXII.
XXXIII.
animadvtrto,
animadvertere,
ani-
madvert!, animadversum, notice

circumvenio, circumvenire, circumveni,
circumventum, surround.
defendo, defendere, defend!, defendefensor, -oris, m., defender.
choose.
speratum, despair
educo,
educere,
delectum,
of.
ediixi,
eductum,
lead out.
fuga, -ae,
f.,
flight.
traduco, traducere,
sum, defend.
deligo, dejiêre, delegi,
despero, desperare, desperavi, de-
ûctum, lead
traduxi,
across.
tra-
267
XXXIV.
accipio, accipere, accepi,
acceptum,
iacio, iacere, ieci,

interficio,
receive.
capio, capere, cepi,
captum,
take,
terfectum,
nox, noctis,
capture.
iactum, throw.
interficere, interfeci, inkill, slay.
night.
f.,
cliens, -entis, m., client.
pars, partis,
cohors, -hortis,
pons, pontis, m., bridge.
f.,
cohort.
factum, do, make.
facio, facere, feci,
f.,
urbs, urbis,
jmrt.
city.
f.,
XXXVI.
acer, acris, acre, sharp, keen, active.
animal,
audax,
-alis, n.,
animal.
put
mare, -is,
omnis, -e,
peler, celeris, celere, swift.

-tris, -tre,
fugam
dare,
to flight.
ingens, -entis, huge.
-acis, bold.
calcar, -aris, n., spur.
equester,
fuga, -aeî., flight; in
cavalry (adj.),
n., sea.
all.
potens, -entis, powerful.
equestrian.
order, see rank, Voc.
fortis, -e, brave.
XXXI.
XXXVII.
aestas, -tatis,
f.,
summer.
iniquus, -a,
certus, -a,
civis, -is,
equus,
-i,
-um,
-um, unfavorable.
gravis, -e, heavy, severe.
brevis, -e, short.
navis, -is,
trusty, certain.
f.,
praesidium,
m., citizen.
ship.
-I,
n., garrison, force.
tempus, tempo ris,
m., horse.
n., time.
xxxvm.
-um, bad.
difRcilis, -e, difficult.
malus,
dissimilis, -e, unlike.
minor, minus,
facilis, -e, easy.
maior, mains, greater; maior natu,

older (literally, greater in respect
to birth);
maiores, ancestors.
-a,
less,
smaller;
natu, younger.
plus, pluris, n., more.
similis, -e, like.
soror, -oris,
f.,
sister.
minor
BEGINNING LATIN
268
XXXIX.
m.,
collis, -is,
-um, first, prlmum agmen,

van (of an army),
hill.
exterior, -ius, outer; sup. extremus,

-a,
-um, outmost, end
propior, -ius, nearer; sup. proximus,
of.
sup. infimus
-ius, lower;
inferior,
-um,
lowest, bottom
posterior, -ius, latter;
sup. postre-
and imus,
-a,
-a,
-um,
nearest.
superior, -ius, higher, former; sup.
supremus and summus,
of.
mus,
-um,
-a,
the
-a,
-um,
highest, top of.

ulterior, -ius, farther; sup. ultimus,
last.
prior, -ius, former; sup. primus, -a,
-a,
-um,
farthest.
XLI.
decem,
magis,
novem,
indecl., ten.
adv.
comp.,
more;
sup.
less;
sup.
maxime, most.
minus,
adv.
minime,
indecl., nine.
octo, indecl., eight.
paulo, with comparatives, a
comp.,
quinque, indecl.,
little.
five.
septem, indecl., seven.
least.
multo, with comparatives, much.
sex, indecl., six.
XLII.
ego, mei,
is,
silva, -ae,
/.
ea, id, he, she,
it,
f.,
tu, tui, thou,
that.
wood,
you
forest.
(sing.).
regio, -onis, f ., region.
XLIII.
hie,
haec, hoc,
man,
this, this one, this
ille,
illud, that, that one,
ilia,
etc.; the former, he, she,
etc.; the latter.
man,
it.
XLIV.
apud, prep, with ace, before, near,
in the presence
of,
among.
Cicero, -onis, m., Cicero.
consisto,
stand
meus,
-sistere,
-stiti,
-stitum,
still, halt.
-a,
-um, my, mine.
numquam,
Roma, -ae,
vester,
never.
'
Rome.
-um, his,
suus, -a,
your,
yours
her, tiers, its,
great
-um, your, yours
tuus, -a,
-trum,
-tra,
(pL).
f .,
theirs.
their,
269
(sing.),
(of
-um.
summus,
persons),
See Voc.
-a,
XXXIX.
thy, thine.
XLVI.
captivus,
-i,
clarus, -a,
hibema,
m., prisoner.
used,
-um, illustrious, famous.

-orum, n. pi., winter-
(neminis),
(For
this
for the ablative sin-
qui,
See Lesson XLIX.)

rel. pron., who,
quae, quod,
which, what, that.
quarters.
nemo
and
gular, nullo.
the
m. and
f.,
no one.
word nuUius
revertere,
sum, return.
regularly signum, -i, n.,
singular
genitive
reverto,
is
rever-
reverti,
of
signal, standard.
XLVII.
(aliqui),
aliquis
(aliquod),
aliquae,
pron.,
indef.
aliquid
some,
quis
someone, something.
dico, dicere, dixi, dictum, say,
pervenio,
tell.
pervenire, perveni, per-
ventum, arrive
{at),
dam), indef. pron., a
with ad and
certain,
certain one, some, someone.
(quae),
quid,
pron.,
interr.
who? which? what?

quisque (quique), (quaeque), quid-
que
(quodque),
indef.
pron.,
each, everyone.
ace.
quidam, quaedam, quiddam (quod-
XLVIII.
decimus, -a, -um, tenth.
dimitto, dimittere,
take
dimisi,
dimis-
sum, send away.

-um, intensive pron.,
ipse, -a,
with
re-
saepe, often.
sui, reflexive
pron. of third pers.,
of himself, herself, itself, or
infantry.
recipio, recipere, recepi,
recover;
reXj regis, m., king.

self.
pedes, peditis, m., foot soldier; in

pi.,
back,
flexives, retreat.
receptum.
them-
BEGINNING LATIN
270
XLIX.
alius, -a, -ud, other, anotner.
-erum,
alter, -era,
the other (of two).
conficio, conficere, confeci, confec-
tum, complete.
idem, eadem, idem, the same.
iste, ista, istud, that
libertas, -tatis,
f.,
neuter, -tra, -trum, neither.
totus, -a,
-um, no, none.

-um, alone, only.
-um, the whole (of).
ullus, -a,
um, any.
nuUus,
-a,
solus, -a,
unus, -a, -um, one, alone.
of yours.
uter, -tra, -trum,
freedom, liberty.
which
(of
two)
LI.
(ceterus),
rest
-a,
found in
dexter,
the
other,
ceterus
the
intercludo, intercludere, interclusi,
not
interclusum, cut
classical Latin.)
and
-trum,
-tra,
-terum,
-um,
(Form
{of).
off,
with
abl. of
separation.
-tera,
right.
ripa, -ae,
f.,
hank.
sinister, -tra,
-trum,
left.
LIL
aditus, -us, m., approach.
facere in, with ace,
adventus, -us, m., arrival.
tack on.
commeatus,
-us, m., suppli
cornu, -us,
n.,
horn,
wing
manus,
(of
an
army),
-us,
f.,
make an
at-
hand, hand, com-
pany.
peditatus, -us, m., infantry.
equitatus, -us, m., cavalry.

exercitus, -us, m.,
principatus, -us, m., leadership.
army.
impetus, -us, m., attack;
senatus, -us, m., senate.
impetum
sustineo,
sustinere,
sustinui,
sus-
tentum, withstand.
LIII.
acies, -ei, f ., line of battle.
autem^
that
however (postpositive;
hut,
is,
words
placed after one or more
of the sentence or clause)
classis, -is,
dies, -ei,
fides, -ei,
f.,
f.,
tum, draw up.

prep, with
among.
inter,
ace,
between,
inter se dare, exchange.
f., fleet.
m. and
instruo, instruere. instruxi, instruc-
day.
confidence, faith, pro-
planities, -ei,
res, rei,
f.,
f.,
plain.
thing, fact.
tection, pledge.
Gallia, -ae,
f.,
Gaul (the country).
before (of position), in return
see in front of, Voc.
XXIV.
for-,
271
LIV.
unus, -a, um, one.
decern, ten.
duo, -ae, -o, two.
centum, a hundred.
tres, tria, three.
mille, a thousand.
quattuor, four.
iter
quinque,
factum,
a journey).
facere, feci,
facio,
march
five.
(literally waA:e
passus, -us, m., 'pace (five
sex, six.
septem, seven.
feet);
octo, eight.
passuum, mile.
mille
passus,
Roman
pi.,
milia
novem, nine.
LVII.
much, comp. magis, more, sup.
aegre, with difficulty.
maxime, most.
audacter, boldly.
bene, well, comp. melius,
better,
satis,
enough, sufficiently.
sup. optime, best.

diligenter, carefully.
bravely,
diu, long.
certainly,
facile, easily.
impetuously,
late, far
and wide,
^
\
see 305.
heavily,
widely.
longe, far.
sharply,
multum (with comparatives multo).
severely,
'
LVIII.
Athenae, -arum,
Carthaga, -ginis,
Corinthus,
-i,
f.,
Cures, -ium, m.
pi.,
f.
f.,
Athens.
Carthage.
Corinth.
pi.,
domo,
from home.
f.,
rus, ruris, n.,
Italy.
tJie
country (as dis-
tinguished from the city).
Cures.
do mi, loc, at home.
abl.,
Italia, -ae,
terra,
domum, ace, home, homewards.
-ae,
f.,
land, country
(geo-
graphical division).
LIX.
agger, aggeris, m., mound.
consuetudO; -dinis,
f.,
height.
deus, dei,
celeritas, -tatis,
f.,
swiftness.
iter, itineris, n.,
clamor, -oris, m., shout.
ni.,
f.,
habit, custom.
a god.
altitude, -dinis,
journey, march.
luppiter, lovis, m., Jupiter.
BEGINNING LATIN
272
labor, -oris, m.,
mors, mortis,
oratio, -onis,
palus, -udis,
profectio, -onis,
toil.
f.,
senex,
death,
speech.
f.,
vis (vis),
marsh.
f.,
f.,
departure.
m., old man.
-is,
force, violence; in pi.,
f.,
vires, strength.
LXI.
cohortor, cohortari, cohortatus sum,
proficiscor, proficisci, prof ectus
encourage.
sum,
set out, go.
Conor, conari, conatus sum,
sequor, sequi, seciitus sum, follow.
try.
habito, habitare, habitavi, habita-
tum, dwell, live.

possum, posse, potui, can, he
finish, see complete,
same
ought, the
able.
Voc. LIV.
as owe, Voc. VI.
LXII.
ne,
lest,
that not, in order that not.
ut, that, in order thai.
Lxin.
apertus, -a, -um, open, exposed.
intellego,
mtellegere, intellexi, in-
tellectum, understand.
cognosco, cognoscere, cognovi, c6-
progredior,
progredi,
gnitum, learn, ascertain.
sum, advance.
committo, committere, commisi,
commissum,
join.
conicio, conicere, conieci,
tum, throw,
progressus
coniec-
fact,
hack,
hold
see
hack,
Voc.
XXXIV.
convenio, convenire, conveni, con-
ventum, come
see thing, Voc. LIII.
keep
hurl.
together, meet.
LXIV.
nescio, nescire, nescivi, nescitum,
not know, he ignorant.
quo, whither,
to
what
place, where
(with verbs of motion).

rogo, -are, -avi, -atum, a^k.
scio, scire, scivi, scitum,
ubi,
where,
verbs of
unde,
what
know.
(with
in what place
rest).
whence,
place.
from
where,
from
273
LXVI.
cogi-
cogitavi,
cogitare,
cogito,
tatum, think about, meditate.

deduce, deducere, deduxi, deduc-
away
turn, lead
or from.
quaero, quaerere, quaeslvi, quaesiturn, ask, inquire.
quam, how (with

quot, how many.
adjs.
and
advs.)-
incendo, incendere, incendi, incen-
sum,
on
set
reach, see arrive at, Voc.
fire.
XLVII.
LXVII.
malo, malle, malui, prefer, would nolo, nolle, nolui, be unwilling.

V0I65 velle, volul, wish, be willing.
rather.
LXVIII.
accido, accidere, accidi, happen.
factus sum, become, hap-
fio, fieri,
amicus, -a, -um, friendly.
pen, be made, be done.
casus, -us, m., accident, misfortune.
inimicus, -a, -um, hostile.
certiorem (-es) facio, facere,
sic,
factum, inform
(literally,
more certain"),
communis, -e, common,
concilium,
-i,
convoco,
convocare,
feci,
**make
design, see plan, Voc. XIII.
general.
n., council,
in such a way, so, thus.

tam, so (with adjs. and advs.).
meeting.
form
plan),
(a
see
take,
Voc.
XXXVIII.
convocavi,
convocatum, call together, call manage, see wage, Voc. IX.

(with such words as concilium). matter, see thing, Voc. XLIX.
LXIX.
adfero,
bring
adferre,
attuli,
adlatum,
atque, and,
phasizes
and
what
also,
atque em-
follows, while et
conferre,
tum, bring
defero,
contuli,
deferre,
18
colla-
together, gather.
detuli,
bring away, report.
infero,
latum, bear, bring,
delatum,
inferre,
intuli,
iUatum,
bring in or on; bellum inferre,
with
emphasizes neither part.

confero,
fero, ferre, tuli,
carry.
to, report.
dat.,
inferrCj
on
make war
advance
on; signa
(literally,
bear
the standards).
nam, for. Another word is enim,

which is always postpositive.
BEGINNING LATIN
274
neque, and
neque
not.
is
spelled
also
treat
made
before a vowel or h.
is
is
overpowered
by an attack).
suffer, endure.
referre,
relatum,
rettuli,
pedem
bring hack,
used when
is
movement when
perfero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum, hear,
refero,
recipere
mentioned; while pedem

referre denotes the backward
except
nee,
(se
the place to which the retreat
This
nor.
referre,
toUo,
sustuli,
tollere,
sublatum,
raise, remove.
re-
LXXI.
eo, ire,
ii,
on
postridie eius diei,
eras, to-morrow.
the next or
following day.
itum, go.
heri, yesterday.
natura, -ae,
hodie, to-day.
undique, from all sides, on all sides.

vix, scarcely, with difficulty.
f., mischief, harm.

with ace, through.
iniuria, -ae,
per, prep,
hem
f.,
nature, character.
Voc. XI.
in, see restrain,
LXXII.
armo, armare, armavi, armatum,
arm.
pinquavi,
appropinquatum, ap-
proach.
appropinquo, appropinquare, appro-
ostendo,
ostendere,
ostendl,
os-
tentum (and ostensum), show.

LXXIII.
lacks the tenses formed from the
audeo, audere, ausus sum, semi-
present stem.
deponent, dare.
eruptio, -onis,
constitud, -stituere, -stitui, -stitu-
tum,
gratias
decide, determine.
incipio, incipere, incepi,
hegin.
f.,
sortie, sally.
agere,
egi,
fugio, fugere, fugi,
Instead of the perfect,
vulnus, vulneris,
flee, fly.
n.,
wound,
LXXIV.
aedificium,
aqua, -ae,
explorator,
subsidium,
-i,
f-,
n., building.
via, viae,
f.,
way, road.
water.
oris,
-!, n.,
m.^ scout.
reinforcements.
actum,
thank, return thanks (with dat.).
inceptum,
the verb coepi, coepisse, coeptus,

Coepi
in, is generally used.
ago,
occupy, see hold, Voc. XI.
275
LXXVI.
accipio, accipere, accepi, ticceptum,
liberi,
adulescens, -centis, m., youth.
beneficium,
calamitaSj -tatis,
f.,
castellum,
redoubt.
credo,
credere,
patria, -ae,
favor, kindness.
-i, n.,
-i, n.,
-orum,
in. pi., children.
(See
Voc. XVI.)
receive, suffer.
puto,
disaster.
credidi,
native land, country.
f.,
pello, pellere, pepull, pulsuni, rout.
putare,
putatum,
putavi,
think.
creditum,
supero, superare, superavi, supera-
suppose, believe.
turn, conquer.
LXXVII.
statim, immediately.
disco, discere, didici, learn.
oculus,
-i,
sol, solis,
m., eye.
transeo, transire, transii, transitum,
m., eye.
cross.
No new words
LXXVIII.
in
LXXIX.
condicio, -onis,
f.,
ter7ns (in pi.).
queror,
doceo, docere, docui, doctum, teach,
show,
quod, because.
tell.
lux, lucis,
f.,
questus sum, com-
queri,
plain.
light;
prima
retineo, retinere, retinui, retentum,
luce, abl.,
keep back.
at daybreak.
morior, mori, mortuus sum,
die.
nuntio, nuntiare, nuntiavi, nunti-
accept, see receive, Voc.
atum, announce.
beq, see seek,
LXXVII.
Voc. VIII.
postulo, postulare, postulavi, postu-
latum, demand.
LXXXI.
Catilina, -ae, m., Catiline, a
Roman
conspirator.
conatus, -us, m., attempt.
socius,
condo, condere, condidi, conditum,
desisto, desistere, destiti,
destitum,
f.,
embassy
novus, -a, -um, new.
f.,
opinion.
ally.
-um,
verCri,
so great, such.
veritus
sum,
fear,
reverence.
v!vus, -a,
cease, desisi.
m.,
-i,
tantus, -a,
vereor,
foimd.
legatio, -onis,
Piso, -onis, m., Piso.
sententia, -ae,
-um,
alive, living.
vinco, vmcere, vici, victum,

quer, subdue.
con-
BEGINNING LATIN
276
LXXXII.
adeo, adire, adii, aditum, go
to,
with
opprimo, opprimere, oppress!, oppressum, crush, destroy.
ad and ace.
efficio,
eflficere,
bring
to
effectum,
erffeci,
polliceor, poUicerl,
pollicitus
sum,
promise.
pass.
j
Gallicus, -a,
-um,
gens, gentis,
f.,
imperium,
Pompeius,
Gallic.
tribe.
-i, n.,
'
military
command,
m., Pompey.
lead back, bring back,
Rhenus,
empire.
intermitto,
-i,
reduce, reducere, reduxi, reductum,
-i,
m., the Rhine.
intermittere, intermisi,
intermissum, leave
protect, see defend,
off.
Voc.
XXXIII.
right, law.
ius, iuris, n.,
LXXXIII.
adsum, adesse, adfui, adfuturus, be
lingua, -ae,
colloquium,
-i,
f.,
tongue, language.
moror, morari, moratus sum, delay,
present, be at hand.
n., conference,
con-
linger.
utinam,
versation.
Latinus, -a, -um, Latin.
that!
would
that! if only!
veto, vetare, vetui, vetitum, forbid.
L XX XIV.
dubito, dubitare, dubitavi, dubita-
tum, doubt,
hcfiifate.
insequor, insequi, insecutus sum,
quoque, also (placed after the important word).

resisto, resistere, restiti, resist.
scutum,
-i, n., shield.
mirabilis, -e, wonderful.
talis, -e,
such.
nunc,
trado,
pursue.
noiv.
hand
tradere,
traditum,
tradidi,
over, give up.
LXXXVI.
consuesco,
consuescere,
consuetum,
in
\)eri.,
consuevi,
become accustomed;
be accustomed.
hortor, hortarl, hortatus
sum,
ibi, there.
impedimentum,
-i,
n.,
hindrance;
in pi., baggage.
urge.
nihil, indecl., n., nothing.
277
L XXXVII.
adiuvo, adiuvare, adiuvi, adiutum,
pareo, parere, parui, obey.
Anotlior
with arc.
word for help is adsum, whicli
persuadeo,
takes the dat.
placed,
help,
aid,
charm, with ace.
plca!<e,
placitum,
placul,
f actum, place in command of.

praesum, praeesse, praefui, prae-
nocitum,
nocul,
nocere,
placere,
praeficio, praeficere, praefeci, prae-
exeo, exire, exii, exitum, go out.
noceo,
persuasi,
please.
delecto, delectare, delectavi, delec-
tatum,
persuadere,
persuasum, persuade.
injure, harm.
command
futurus, be in
of.
L XX XVIII.
60, thither, to that place, there
(with
ibi, there,
sum, enjoy.
fungor, fungi, functus sum, perfruor, frui, fructus
potior,
form.
from
this
n., service.
potitus
sum, gain
(with verbs of motion).

place,
ubi, where, in
from
here.
hue, hither,
potirl,
possession of, become master of.

quo, whither, to what place, where
hie, here, in this place.
hinc, hence,
in that place.
munus, muneris,
verbs of motion).
to this place,
unde,
here (with
whence,
what place.
from what
place,
from where.
j
verbs of motion).
vescor, vesci, use for food, eat.

j
LXXXIX.
dum,
while; until; provided that.
metus, -us, m.,
fear.
nisi, if not, unless, except.
postquam,
tamen, nevertheless,
ubi, when, where.
ut, that,
in order
yet.
that, as,
when.
after.
quamquam,
although.
gero in the passive
on
si, if.
may mean
to
go
(of actions).
XCI.
cared, -ere, -ui, -itum, lack.
cura, -ae,
f.,
usus, -us, m., use, advantage.
care.
despolio, -are, -avi, -atum, rob.
-atum, strip.
-atum, deprive.
niido, -are, -avi,
privo, -are, -avi,
protection,
see
garrison,
Voc.
XXXVII.
safeguard, see safety, Voc.
XVIII.
LISTS OF
WORDS FOR REVIEW
Vocabularies II-IV.
WORD
LISTS
YOCABULARIES YI-XYI.
NOUNS.
279
'JSO
11K(JINNIN(5
OC A U
I
NOUNS.
A K
lis
LATIN
X V 1 L- X X
\'
Wolv'l)
VodAin.i.AKiMs
NOIINH.
IIS'I'H
XXVIII XXXVIII
'JSI
BEGINNING LATIN
282
YOCABULARIES
NOUNS.
XXXIX-XLIX.
WORD
283
LISTS
YOCABULAKIES LI-LXI.
NOUNS.
Decl.
Conor
habito
I.
Atheiiae
deus
adventus
Conj.
commeatus
equitatus
exercitus
Gallia
Italia
impetus
ripa
terra
Decl.
Decl. IV.
aditus
II.
domi
priiicipatus
domo
III.
agger
Conj.
III.
intercludo
instruo
proficiscor
sequor
Irregular,
possum
senatus
domum
Decl.
man us
passus
peditatus
II.
sustineo
ADVERBS.
cornu
Decl. V.
acriter
altitude
dies
aegre
audacter
Carthago
fides
bene
celeritas
planities
certe
clamor
res
diligenter
classis
consuetiido
Cures
iter
luppiter
labor
mors
oratio
pal us
profectio
rus
senex
vis
acies
ADJECTIVES.
diu
facile
centum
fortiter
(ceterus)
dexter
graviter
late
duo
longe
mille
multum
sinister
multo
tres
satis
unus
veliementer
VERBS.
Oonj.
PREPOSITION.
I.
cohortor
inter
BEGINNING LATIN
284
YOCABULARIES LXII-LXXII.
NOUNS.
WORD
LISTS
Vocabularies LXXIII-LXXXIII.
NOUNS.
285
BEGINNING LATIN
286
YOCABULARIES
NOUNS.
LXXXIY-XCI.
LATIN-ENGLISH VOCABULARY
A.
a, ab, prep,
with
Aeduus, -a, -um, Aeduan as noun,

Aeduus, -I, m., an Aeduan.
aegrotus, -a, -um, sick, ill.
;
abl.,
away
from,,
aeneus, -a, -um, of bronze, bronze.
from, by.
accido, -cidere, -cidi, happen.
aegre, with difficulty.
accipio, -cipere, -cepi, -ceptum, re-
aer, aeris, m., air.
aestas, -tatis,
ceive, suffer.
acer, acris, acre, sharp, keen, active,
agger, aggeris,
fierce.
acies, -ei,
f., liiie
with ace,
near, at,
to, for,
-itum, go
to,
reach,
with ad and ace, or ace. alone.

adfero, adferre, attuli, adlatum,
bring
to,
-lis,
m., approach.
-esse,
-fui,
present, be at
-i,
-atum, drive,
ply.
lamb.
ni.,
agricola, -ae, m., farmer.

ala, -ae,
f.,
albus, -a,
unng.
-um,
white.
(adj. aliquod), pron. indef., some,
alius, -a, -ud, other, another.
-futurus,
be
hand, help (witli
Alpheus,
-i,
-veni,
m., the Alpheus, a river
of Elis in central Greece,

alter, -tera,
dat.).
-terum, other of two, the
man.
other, second.
-ventum,
altitude, -dinis,
adulescens, -centis, m., young
advenio, -venire,
the
someone, somethin^g.
take to oneself, accept.
adsum,
army on
aliquis (adj. aliqui), aliqua, aliquid
report.
adscisco, -sciscere, -scivi, -scitum,
aditus,
agito, -are, -avi,
agnus,
-ire, -ii,
mound.
n.,
march.
before.
adeo,
in.,
agmen, -minis,
of battle.
acriter, sharply, fiercely.
ad, prep,
summer.
f.,
ager, agri, m., field, territory.
arrive.
altus, -a,
-um,
f.,
height.
high, lofty, deep.
adventus, -us, m., arrival.
amicitia, -ae,
adversus, -a, -um, unfavorable.
amicus, -a, -um, friendly ; as noun,

amicus, -i, ni., friend.
aedificium,
aedifico,
-i, n.,
-are,
construct.
building.
-avi,
f.,
friendship.
-atum, build, amitto,-mittere,-misi,-missum,Zose.
amo,
-are, -avi,
-atum,
love.
VOCABULARY
288
amoenus,
-um, pleasant.
-a,
Attica, -ae,
animadverto, -vertere, -verti, -ver-
sum,
narrow
(generally in
f.
pi.),
animal,
breath,
audacter, boldly.
deponent, dare, venture.
life.
audio, -ire,
animal.
-alls, n,,
influence.
audeo, audere, ausus sum, semi-
angustus, -a, -um, narrow.

f.,
f.,
boldness, daring.
f.,
audax, -acis, bold.
place, defile.
anima, -ae,
auctoritas, -tatis,
audacia, -ae,
notice.
angustia, -ae,
Attica, a division of
f.,
Greece.
amplius, adv., more.
-ivi,
-itum, hear.
animus, -i, m.,mind, spirit, courage. augustus, -a, -um, august, majestic.
aureus, -a, -um, golden.
annus, -i, m., year.
ante, prep, with ace, before, in aurum, -i, n., gold.
autem, postpositive, but.
front of.
auxilium,
antiquus, -a, -um, ancient.
name
Apollo, -inis, m., the
god
of the
prophecy, music, and
of
n.,
-i,
aid, help; in pi.,
auxiliary troops.
avus,
m., grandfather.
-i,
healing.
appello, -are, -avi, -atum, call.
B.
apporto, -are, -avi, -atum, bring.
-atum,
baculum,
dratv near, approach, with dat.
appropinquo,
-are,
-avi,
aptus, -a, -um, suited.
-i, n., stick, staff.
barba, -ae,
f.,
beard.
apud, prep, with ace, before, near, beatus, -a, -um, happy, prosperous.
Belga, -ae, m., a Belgian.
in the presence of, among.
aqua, -ae,
f.,
water.
m., an Aquitanian.
Aquitanus,
-i,
ara, -ae,
altar.
f.,
aratrum,
-i, n.,
bellicosus, -a,
-um, warlike.
bellum,
tear.
bene,
plough.
svip.
-i, n.,
comp. melius,
well;
optime,
beneficium,
argentum, -i, n., silver.

arma, -orum, n. pi., arms.
-i, n.,
benevolentia,
favor, kindness.
-ae,
f.,
armatus, -a, -um (part, of armo),

armed.
armo, -are, -avi, -atum, arm.
benignus, -a, -um, kind.
aro, -are, -avi, -atum, plough.
bestia, -ae,
ars,
-artis,
.'science,
f.,
art,
skill;
in
pi.,
artifex, -ficis, m., artist.
asper, -era, -erum, rough, austere.
Athenae, -arum, f. pi., Athens.

atque, and, and also.
-um,
(the
good-will,
quality;
while
beneficium means a kind act),
biennium,
f.,
beast,
n.
-i,
animal.
{period of)
two
years.
learning.
attentus, -a,
kindness
better;
best.
attentive.
bonus, -a, -um, good; conip. melior,

optimus, -a,
-ius, better; sup.
um,
best,
bona, -orum,
goods, possessions.
brevis, -e, short.
n. pi.,
LATIN-ENGLISH
289
(ceterus),
-um,
-a,
the
other,
all
ot}ier(mm\. sing, niasc. not found).
Caesar, -aris, m., Caesar.
-orum, n. pi., food; molita

meal (sec mold).
Cimbri, -orum, m., pi., the name
of a Germanic tribe,
calamitas, -tatis,
circumvenio, -venire, -veni, -ven-
cado, cadere, cecidi, casum,

caedes,
-is,
caelum,
-i, n.,
fall.
slaughter, massacre.
f.,
sky, heaven.
disaster.
f.,
m., plain.
-i,
cibaria,
tum, surround.
calcar, -aris, n., spur.
campus,
cibaria,
civis, -is,
m., citizen.
canto, -are, -avi, -atum, sing, chant.
civitas, -tatis,
caper, capri, m., a he-goat.
clades,
capillus,
captum,
capio, capere, cepi,
take,
capture; with consilium, form.
capra, -ae,
captivus,
f.,
-um,
classis, -is,
illustrious,
coemo, -emere,
buy up.
with abl.
m.,
castellum,
cogito,
-i, n.,
f.,
-orum,
cause,
eam causam, on
tum,
-atum,
think
learn, ascertain.
reason; ob
collect,
compel.
cohors, -hortis,
Catilina, -ae, m., Catiline.

f.,
-avi,
-are,
cogo, cogere, coegi, coactum,
camp.
casus, -us, m., accident, misfortune.
causa, -ae,
-emptum,
cognosce, -gnoscere, -gnovi, -gni-
redoubt.
n. pi.,
-emi,
(about), meditate.
Carthage.
castigo, -are, -avi, -atum, punish.
castra,
-i,
coepi, coepisse, began.
n., song, ode.
cart.
Carthago, -ginis,
famous.
m., (round) shield.
clipeus,
-i,
loss,
cliens, -entis, m., client.
careo, carere, carui, caritum, lack,
carrus,
destruction,
f., fleet.
caput, capitis, n., head.
carmen, -minis,
state.
clamor, -oris, m., shout, shouting.

clarus, -a,
she-goat.
m., prisoner.
-!,
f.,
f.,
massacre.
m., hair.
-i,
-is,
f.,
cohort.
cohortor, -arl, -atus sum, encourage.
this account.
cautus, -a, -um, wary, caidious.
coUis, -is, m.,
celer, celeris, celere, swift.
coUoco, -are, -avi, -atum, place,
celeritas, -tatis,
f.,
colloquium,
swiftness.
f.,
certamen, -minis,
letic)
n., contest,
game.
-um,
trusty, certain,
certiorem
erring,
conference.
facere,
columna, -ae, f., column, pillar.

comburere, combussi,
combiistum, burn up.
commeatus, -iis, m., supplies.
un- commeo, -meare, -meavi, -meatum,
(ath-
certe, certainly.
certus; -a,
-i, n.,
color, -oris, m., color.
a Celt.
wax.
Celta, -ae, m.,

cera, -ae,
hill.
in-
combiiro,
go
and come,
iriake frequent visits.
committo, -mittere, -misi, -missum,
form.
cerva, -ae,
f.,
19
deer, hind.
join.
VOCABULARY
290
commodum,
gain,
n.,
-I,
advan- conserve, -are,
communio, -munire,
-mlinTvi,
nitum, fortify (on
-mu- consilium,
all sides), se-
-e,
common,
comparo, -are,
pare,
-avi,
-stitum,
-stiti,
f.,
firmness.
constituo, -stituere, -stitui, -stitu-avi,
-atum, com-
tum,
station, set, determine.
consuesco, -suescere, -suevi, -sue-
compleo,
fill
-plevi,
-plere,
-pletum,
-ia, several,
a num- consul,
-tendere,
-tendi,
-ten-
fi^ht.
continenter, continually.
contineo, -tinere, -tinui, -tentum,
yield, grant.
concilium,
-i, n.,
concursus,
-us,
m.,
running
f.,
hem
restrain,
meeting, council.
to-
condition; in pi.,
terms.
condo, -dere, -didi, -ditum, found.

confero, conferre, contuli, collatum,
conficio, -ficere, -feci, -fectum,
convivium, -i, n., banquet.

convoco, -vocare, -vocavi, -voca-
tum,
call together,
c5pia, -ae,
f.,
com- Corinthus,
-i, f.,
cornu, -us,
accomplish.
confirm, -are, -avi, -atum, assure,
n.,
(part, of con-
iungo), joined, connected

-iunxi, -iunc-
Corinth.
horn, wing (of
an
crown, wreath.
f.,
corpus, coiporis, n., body.

cotidianus, -a,
hurl.
coniungo, -iungere,
pi., forces,
army)
corona, -ae,
establish.
conicio, -icere, -ieci, -iectum, throiv,
um
summon.
supply; in
troops.
bring together, gather.
-um,
daily.
eras, to-morrow.
credo, -dere, -didi, -ditum, believe,
suppose.
creo, creare, creavi, creatum, elect.
join.
coniuratio, -onis,
f.,
conspiracy.
Cures, -ium,
Conor, -ari, -atus sum,
try.
consecro,
-atum, con- crudelis,
-are,
in.
convenio, -venire, -veni, -ventum,

meet, come together.
gether, gathering.
-avi,
m.
pi.,
Cures.
creber, -bra, -brum, frequent.

-e, cruel.
cultus, -us, m., civilization.
secrate, devote.
conservatus, -a,
habit.
tum, hasten; contend,
concede, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum,
coniunctus, -a,
f.,
m., consul.
-ulis,
contendo,
many.
conatus, -us, m., attempt.
condicio, -onis,
tum, become accustomed.

consuetudo, -dinis,
up.
complures, -a or
tum,
-sistere,
-atum, pre- constantia, -ae,
pare.
plete,
plan, advice, de-
halt.
general.
collect.
comparo, -are,
ber,
n.,
-i,
sign.
consisto,
cure, barricade, intrench.
communis,
'fill,
-atum, pre-
-avi,
serve, save.
tage.
-um
servo), preserved.
(part of con-
cum
(1),
prep, with abl.,
gether with.
ivith, to-
LATTN-ENGLTSTI
cum
(2), conj., ichcn, while, since,
291
despero, -are, -avi, -atum, despair
nlthovgh.
of.
despolio, -are, -avi, -atum, rob.
cur, ivhy.
cura, -ae,
deus,
care.
f.,
custos, -odis,
-i, ni.,
dexter,
guardian.
111.,
-trum,
-ae,
god.
right.
the right hand.
f.,
dictio, -onis,
de,
-i,
Danvhe.
the
with
prep,
dies, diei,
down from,
abl.,
from, about, concerning.

dea, -ae,
f.,
-tera,
dextra,
dico, dicere, dixi, dictum, say,
D.
Danuvius,
and
As noun,
-trum,
-tra,
differo,
tell.
pleading.
f.,
m. and
day.
f.,
dilatum,
distuli,
dififerre,
differ.
goddess.
difficilis, -e, difficult.
debeo, -ere, -ui, -itum, oive, ought,
diligenter, carefully.
decimus, -a, -um, tenth.
dimitto, -mittere, -misi, -missum,
deduce, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum,

lend away, lead from.
defendo, -fendere, -fendi, -fensum,

defend,
discipulus,
defero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum, bring

report.
defessus, -a,
-um, wearied.
-atum, please,
-a,
-um
destroyed.
dissension.
f.,
arrange, dispose.
-um,
-a,
adv., long.
diuturnus, -a, -um, long, prolonged.

dives,
of
or in Delos,
Delian.
divitis,
-um,
sup.
ditissimus,
-a,
rich.
divide,
-videre,
-visum,
-visi,
divide, separate.
-I, f.,
Delos,
an island
in the
Sea.
densus, -a, -um, thick, dense.
-avi,
-atum,
lay
waste.
desisto, -sistere, -stiti, -stitum, desist, cease.
do,
fugam
dare, put to flight; inter se
dare, exchange.
deploro, -are, -avi, -atum, lament.

-are,
-um, of the gods, divine.

-arum, f. pi., riches, wealth.
dare, dedi, datum, give;
in
divinus, -a,
divitiae,
Delphicus, -a, -um, of or at Delphi

(a city in Greece), Delphic.
depopulo,
training.
f.,
m., pupil.
disco, discere, didici, learn.
diii,
(part, of deleo),
deligo, -ligere, -legi, -lectum, choose.
^gean
-cessum,
dissimilis, -e, unlike.
deleo, -ere, -evi, -etum, destroy.
Delus,
-cessi,
dispone, -ponere, -posui, -positum,
delighl.
Delius,
-i,
disco rdia, -ae,
delecto, -are, -avi,
deletus,
-cedere,
go aumy, withdraw.
disciplina, -ae,
pi'otcct.
defensor, -oris, m., defender.
away,
send away.
discedo,
doceo, docere, doctii, doctum, teach,
show, inform.
doctus, -a,
-um
(part,
of doceo),
learned, scholarly.
domus,
-lis, f.,
home, house,
domi,
VOCABULARY
292
domum, ace,
loc, at home.
domo,
home,
dono, -are,
/rom home.
-atum, present,
equester, -tris, -tre, cavalry (adj.)^

equestrian.
abl.,
-avi,
equitatus, -us, m., cavalry.
equus,
give.
donum,
m., horse.
-i,
reptum,
eripio, -ripere, -ripui,
-i, n., gift.
draco, -5nis, m., serpent, dragon.

dubito, -are, -avi, -atum, hesitate.
eruptio, -onis,
duco, ducere, duxi, ductum, lead.
et,
and.
et
sortie^ sally.
f.,
.
both
et,
Dumnorix, -igis, m., the name of etiam, even; also.

ex, see e.
an Êduan nobleman,
exeo, -ire, -ii, -itum, go
durus, -a, -um, hard, tough, rude.
dux, ducis, m., leader, guide.
res-
cue.
exercitus,
-iis,
and.
out.
m., army.
-atum, unfold,
explico, -are, -avi,

disclose.
explorator, -oris, m., scout.

-are, -avi, -atum, carry
from or out of.
ex (always ex before a vowel or expugno, -are, -avi, -atum, take (by
exporto,
e,
storm).
h), out of, from.
exsequor,
ebur, -oris, n., ivory.
educo,
-duxi,
-ducere,
-ductum,
-sequi,
sum,
-seciitus
follow up, enforce.
exspecto, -are, -avi, -atum, await.
lead out.
effemino, -are, -avi, -atum, weaken,
exterior,
mus,
enervate.
efifero, efferre, extuli,
-ius,
-a,
Sup. extre-
outer.
-um, outmost, end
of.
elatum, carry
out.
efficio, -ficere, -feci,
to
-fectum, bring
F.
pass.
efflo, -flare, -flavi,
out
animam
ego, mei,
-flatum, breathe
efflare, die.
facile, easily.
f acilis, -e,
easy.
facio, facere, feci,
/.
factum, do, make
elegans, -antis, polished, refined.
fallo, fallere, fefelli,
emigre, -are, -avi, -atum, emigrate,
fatigatus, -a,
inove away.
enim, postpositive,
fatigo,
divulge, betray.
60, thither, to that place.
eques,
in
ii,
itum, go.
-itis,
pi.,
m., horseman, knight;
cavalry.
falsum, deceive.
(part, of fatigo),
wearied, harassed.
for.
enuntio, -are, -avi, -atum, disclose,
eo, ire,
-um
-are, -avi,
-atum,
weary,
harass.
fecundus, -a, -um, fruitful.

felix, -icis, fortunate,
femina, -ae,
f .,
happy.
woman.
fere, nearly, almost.
ferreus, -a,
-um,
of iron, iron.
LATlN-EN<iLISn
ferrum,
-i,
fugo, -are, -avi, -atum, put
iron.
ii.,
-um,
ferus, -a,
fulmen,
wild, fierce.
confidence, faith, pledge,
f.,
filia,
-ae,
f.,
-minis,
thunderbolt,
n.,
lightning.
fumus,
protection.
figura, -ae,
to fii^jht,
chase away.
fertilis, -e, fertile.
fides, -ei,
293
m., smoke.
-i,
furor, -oris, ni., madness.
form.
daughter.
f.,
m., son,
filius, -i,
m., end, limit, boundary;
finis, -is,
in pi., territories, country.
finitimus, -a,
-um, bordering upon, galea,

As noun, Gallia,
-ae,
helmet.
f.,
Gaul (the country).

Gallicus, -a, -um, Gallic.
finitimus, -i, ni., neighbor.
fio, fieri, factus sum, become, hap- Gallus, -i, m., a Gaul.
adjoining, neighboring ;
pen, be made, be done.
gallus,
firmo, -are, -avi, -atum, strengthen.
firmus, -a, -um, strong.
flamma,
-ae,
f.,
fleo, flere, flevi,

flos, floris,
Genava,
gens, gentis,
tribe.
n.,
kind,
sort;
-ae,
-i,
f.,
Germany.
m., a German.
gero, gerere, gessi, gestum, wage,
-dinis,
f.,
courage,
en-
manage, carry on.

gladius,
lot,
fortune, des-
-i,
gloria, -ae,
m., sword.
glory, fame.
f.,
gracilis, -e, slender.
tiny.
fossa, -ae,
ditch, water-course.
f.,
f rater, -tris,
frequently, throng.
frigidus, -a,
-um,
frumentarius,
-a,
-i, n.,
gratia, -ae,
-um,
of
grain;
grain.
sum,
enjoy
flight; in
fugam
dare,
(with abl.).
fuga, -ae,
f.,
Greece.
f,,
thank,
as noun,
m., a Greek.
favor, thanks.
egi,
actum,
thanks
(with
agere,
return
dat.).
-um, pleasing, welcome;
thankful.
gravis, -e, heavy, severe.
graviter, heavily, severely.
guberno, -are, -avi, -atum,
to fliijht.
fugio, fugere, fugi,
f.,
-i,
ago,
gratus, -a,
fructus
frui,
Graecus,
gratias
cold.
res frumentaria, grain-supply.
friimentum,
Graecia, -ae,
Graecus, -a, -um, Greek
m., brother.
frequento, -are, -avi, -atum, visit
put
the river
Geneva.
f.,
f.,
generis,
Germania,
Germanus,
durance.
fruor,
f.,
race.
fortiter, bravely.
f.,
-ae,
genus,
m., river.
fortuna, -ae,
m. or
-ae,
fletum, weep.
fortis, -e, brave.
fortitiido,
m., cock, domestic cock.
Garumna,
flame.
m., flower.
-i,
-i,
f.,
Garonne.
fliimen, -minis, n., river.

fluvius,
-ae,
flee, fly,
avoid.
govern.
direct,
VOCABULARY
294
known (when
word with which
great or well
it; the
following the
habeo, -ere, -ui, -itum, nave, hold.

habito, -are, -avi, -atum, live, dwell.
hasta, -ae,
Helvetii,
f.,
imago, -ginis,
immolo, -are,
-orum,
n.
pL,
winter-
impedio,
hinc, hence,
from
imperator,
winter.
f.,
impetus,
Homerus, -i, in., the poet Homer.
homo, hominis, m. and f., man, impetro,
as
general,
pi.,
people (in
distinguished from
populus, people, a nation).
f.,
urge,
en-
courage-
-are,
m., stranger.
enemy
hue, hither, here,
(public).
to this place.
-tatis,
-atum, gain
-avi,
imploro, -are, -avi, -atum, invoke,
importo, -are, -avi, -atum, bring in,

prep, with abl., in, on, at; with
ace,
into, to.
ineautus,
hostis, -is, m.,
humanitas,
-us, m., attack.
one's end, obtain (a privilege).
in,
sum,
hortor, -ari, -atus
-itis,
em-
import.
hour.
horribilis, -e, terrible.
hospes,
sovereignty,
command.
beseech.
honos, -oris, m., honor, reputation.

hora, -ae,
commander,
m.,
n.,
-i,
pire, military
hindrance;
n.,
-i,
-oris,
imperium,
this place.
being;
sacrifice.
-itum, hinder.
general.
hodie, to-day.
human
-atum,
-avi,
-ire, -ivi,
in pi., baggage.
in this place.
hiems, hiemis,
light up,
image, statue.
f.,
impedimentum,
quarters.
hie, haec, hoc, this, the latter.
hie, adv., here,
-atum,
-are, -avi,
imber, -bris, m., rain, shower.
plant.
heri, yesterday.
hiberna,
agrees).
illuminate.
spear.
f.,
-orum, m. pL, Helvetians.
herba, -ae,
it
illiistro,
f.,
refinement.
humilis, -e, low.
-um,
-a,
unwary,
off
(one's) guard.
incendo, -eendere, -eendi, -eensum,

set
on fire.
Instead
begin.
tenses, eoepi
ineito,
-are,
-eeptum,
-eepi,
-eipere,
ineipio,
the
of
is
perfect
generally used.
-avi,
-atum, rouse^
inspire.
ineola, -ae,
ibi, there,
in that place.
idem, eadem, idem, the same.
ineolo,
idoneus, -a, -um, suitable.
inde, thence,
indicium,
ille,
inhabitant.
dwell,
-i,
from
n.,
disgrace.
-a, -ud, that, the former, he, she.
in-
that place.
information.
unhappy.
Sup. infimus
infelix, -icis, unfortunate,
ignis, -is, m., fire.

f.,
f.,
-colui,
habit.
ignavis, -e, cowardly.
ignominia, -ae,
m. and
-colere,
inferior, -ius, loiver.
and imus,
lowest, bottom of.
LATIN-P^NGLISH
infero, inferre, intuli, illatum, bring
on; bellum
make
with dat.,
inferre,
ivar on; signa inferre,
ad-
vance (to an attack).
infiammo,
-are,
iSp
ea, id, he, she,
-atum,
-avi,
set
self.
it,
that.
iste, ista, istud, that of

f.,
yours.
Italy.
ita, so.
itaque, and.so, therefore, accordingly.
fugam
ingens,
ipsum,
ipse, ipsa,
Italia, -ae,
fire to.
in
295
dare, put to flight.
way, route, march,
iter, itineris, n.,
enormous,
huge,
-gentis,
great.
journey; iter facere,
to march.
-atum, repeat.
as iubeo, inhere, iussi, iussum, com-
itero, -are, -avi,
inimicus,
-um,
-a,
noun, inimicus,
hostile
-i,
m.,
enemy
iniquus, -a,
-um, unfavorable.
iniuria, -ae,
inopia, -ae,
insequor,
f.,
bid, order.
ing.
wrong.
rnischief,
-secutus
-sequi,
pursue.
-i,
iudicium,
-i, n., trial.
iugum, -i, n., yoke.

sum, iumentum, -i, n., beast of burden.
iungo, gere, iunxi, iunctum, join.
lack, want.
f.,
institutum,
mand,
iucundus, -a, -um, pleasant, pleas-
(personal).
n., institution,
cus-
tom.
luppiter, lovis, m., Jupiter.

lura, -ae,
instruo, -struere, -struxi, -structum,
f.,
the Jura mountains.
ius, iuris, n., right, law.
draiv up.
insula, -ae,
f.,
island.
-legere,
intellego,
-lexi,
-lectum,
understand, perceive.
inter,
prep,
with
ace,
between,
among.
labor, -oris, m.,
-um, glad, happy.

and wide.
interea, meanwhile.
laetus, -a,
intercludo, -cludere, -clusi, -cliisum,
late, widely, far
cut off.
latebra, -ae,
interficio,
-ficere,
-feci,
-fectum,
-mittere,
-misi,
-mis-
leave off.
invenio,
-venire,
-atum,
-veni,
enter.
invius, -a,
laurea, -ae,
-ventum, laus, laudis,
-um,
-atum,
praise,
f.,
the laurel-tree.
f.,
praise.
lavo, -are, lavi,

hateful, displeas-
ing.
invitus, -a,
-avi,
commend.
find.
invisus, -a,
-um, wide, broad.
latus, lateris, n., side.
laudo, -are,
inter se dare, exchange.

intro, -are, -avi,
hiding-place.
f.,
Latinus, -a, -um, Latin.

latus, -a,
kill.
intermitto,
sum,
toil.
lacus, -us, m., lake.
-um, unwilling.
-um, pathless.
lautum, lotum, or
lavatum, wash, bathe.

legatio, -onis, f., embassy.
legatus,
-i,
bassador.
m.,
lieutenant,
am-
VOCABULARY
296
legio, -onis,
lex, legis,
m., hook,
-erum,
-drum, m.
liber, -era,
liberi,
maleficium,
as noun,
freo;
children (of
pi.,
-atum,
free, liber-
-um,
llgneus, -a,
lingua, -ae,
littera, -ae,
freedom, liberty.
rather.
-a, -um, bad, evil.
maneo, manere, mansi, mansum,
letter (of
pi.,
the alpha-
letter
(epistle),
literature.
locus,
m,
-i,
(pL, loca,
-orum,
remain.
manus,
-us,
n.),
place.
longe, adv., far.
marmoreus,
n., sea.
-a,
f.,
f.,
mother.
Matrona,
f.,
the river Marne.
-ae,
maxime, see multum.

maximus, see magnus.
medicus,
length.
-um, marble.
mater, matris,
medicina, -ae,
longitudo, -dinis,
hand; hand, com-
f.,
pany.
mare, maris,
ivooden.
tongue, language.
.,
f.,
in
bet),
f.,
-i,
f.,
medicine, healing.
m., physician, doctor.
longus, -a, -um, long.
melior, see bonus.
loquor, loqui, locutus sum, speak.
melius, see bene.
lorica, -ae,
leather cuirass, corse-
f.,
membrum,
-i, n.,
pi.
often
trader,
mer-
limb; in
bodies.
let.
ludus,
-i,
m., plaij; in Lesson
XXV,
luna, -ae,
the
f.,
lucis,
f.,
moon.
f.,
-ae,
-is,
mercator,
Prima
light.
luce,
ah\., at daybreak.
lyra, -ae,
memoria,
mensis,
school.
lux,
majesty:
mischief.
malo, malle, malui, prefer, would
stay,
ate.
libertas, -tatis,
f.,
-i, n.,
malus,
free parents).
libero, -are, -avi,
ancestors;
older.
maiestas, -tatis,
law.
f.,
liber, -bri,
maiores,
maior natu,
m.. Lake Geneva.
-i,
-um;
-a,
legion.
f.,
Lemannus,
memory.
-oris,
m.,
chant.
metus, -us, m.,
meus,
lyre.
f.,
m., month.
-a,
fear.
-um, my, mine.
migro, -are, -avi, -atum, migrate,

go away, move.
miles,
-itis,
m., soldier.
Minerva, -ae,
magis, see multum.

magister,
-tri,
ni.,
teacher.
magistra, -ae,
magnitudo,
ness.
f.,
f., Minerva, goddess

wisdom.
master, school- minime, see minus.
minor, -us, and minimus, see
of
parvus.
7nistress.
-dinis,
f.,
size,
great-
minus,
less;
sup. minime,
least.
mirabilis, -e, ivonderful.
magnus, -a, -um, large, great; mitto, mittere, misi, missum, send.
comp. maior, -ius, sup. maximus, modus, -i, m., manner.
LATIN- KNGLISII
mollis, -e, soft, gentle, effeminate.
molo,
molitum,
molui,
molere,
grind.
navigium,
navigo,
advise, warn.
mons, montis, m., mountain.
n., vessel^ ship.
-avi,
-atum,
sail,
f.,
ship, boat.
lest.
-ne, interrogative enclitic, attached
to the emphatic
word
in a ques-
tion not containing another in-
out, teach.
disease.
-i, ni.,
terrogative.
morior, mori, mortuus sum, die.
sum,
-atus
-ari,
delay,
nee, see neque.
neco, -are, -avi, -atum,
kill.
nego, -are, -avi, -atum, deny, say
linger.
mors, mortis,
f.,
death.
(that)
mos, moris, m., custom, manner.

moveo, movere, movi, motum,
With
move.
mox,
-is,
ne, that not,
monstro, -are, -avi, -atum, point
moror,
-i,
-are,
cruise.
moneo, monere, monui, monitum, navis,
morbus,
297
castra, break.
soon.
.not.
nemo, (neminis), m., no one.

nemus, nemoris, n., grove.
Neptunus,
-i,
m., Neptune, god of
the sea.
multitude, -dinis,
f.,
great number,
multitude.
neque, and
neither
not;
neque
(Also
nor.
neque,
spelled
multum and
(with comparatives)
nee; but always neque before a
much;
vowel or h.)
comp. magis,
more; sup. maxime, most.
nesci6> -scire, -scivi, -scitum, not
multus, -a, -um, much; in -pi., many;
know, be ignorant.
comp. plus, n., more
sup. neuter, -tra, -trum, neither.
plurimus, -a, -um, most, very niger, -gra, -grum, black.
many.
nihil, n., indeclinable, nothing.
mundus, -i, m., the world, the uni- nihilo minus, none the less.
multo,
verse.
nobilis, -e, distinguished.
munitus,
-a,
-um
(part, of
munio),
munio,
-ire,-ivi,
-itum, fortify.
-onis,
f.,
fortification,
-eris, n., service,

-i,
f.,
the
nobility,
noce6,-ere, -ui, -itum, harm, injure.

noctu, by night.
nolo, nolle, nolui, not wish, be un-
.strength.
munus,
murus,
-tatis,
aristocracy.
fortified.
munitio,
nobilitas,
reward.
m., wall.
N.
willing.
nomen, -minis, n., name.

nonnullus, -a, -um, some.
Noricus, -a, -um, of the Norici.
nam,
conj., for.
natura, -ae,
f.,
nature, character.
nota, -ae,
noto,
f.,
-are,
write down.
mark,
sign.
-avi,
-atum,
mark,
V OCA UU LAKY
298
novus, -a, -um, new.
f., night
optime, see bene,
optimus, see bonus,
nox, noctis,
nubes,
-is, f.,
opus, operis,
cloud.
nudo, -are, -avi, -atum,
ora, -ae,
nullus, -a, -um, no, none.

num, whether (in indirect questions
oraculum,
in direct questions, it
suggests
that a negative answer
is
ex-
work.
n.,
coast, shore.
-i, n.,
oratio, -onis,
f.,
oracle.
speech.
ordo, -dinis, m,, rank, order.
Orgetorix, -igis, m., the
name
of a
Helvetian noble,
pected).
Humerus,
f.,
m., number; rhythm,
-i,
ornatus, -a,
-um
(part, of
orno),
adorned.
verse.
numquam,
orno,
never.
nunc, now.
nuntio, -are, -avi, -atum, announce.
nuntius,
-avi,
-atum,
adorn,
-tendere,
tendi,
tentum
-are,
supply.
-i,
m., messenger^ message.
ostendo,
and -tensum, show.
O.
with ace, on account
ob, prep,
because
of,
palus, -udis,
of.
obscurus, -a, -um, dim, shady, un-
-tinui,
-tinere,
-tentum,
-are,
-i,
-avi,
-atum,
seize.
m., eye.
odor, -oris, m., scent, odor.

olim, at some time, formerly, hereafter.
oliva, -ae,
f.,
Olympius,
-a,
Olympus,
-i,
of paro),
dat.).
paro, -are,
hold.
oculus,
(part,
pareo, -ere, -ui, obey (with dat.).
obses, obsidis, m., hostage.
occupo,
-um
ready, prepared.
intelligibk.
obtineo,
marsh.
f.,
paratus, -a,
olive.
prepare
-avi,
-atum, prepare,
for.
pars, partis,
f.,
part, direction.
parvus, -a, -um, small,
little; comp.
minor natu,
younger; sup. minimus, -a, -um,
minor,
less,
smaller;
smallest, least.
passus, -us, m., pace; mille passus,

-um, Olympic.
pi., milia passuum, mile.
m., Olympus, home of
the gods.
omnis, -e, all, every.
opinio, -onis,
f.,
reputation.
pastor, -oris, m,, shepherd.
pateo, -ere, -ui,
lie
open; extend.
pater, -tris, m., father.
patientia, -ae, f., endurance.

oppidum, -i, toum.
opprimo, -primere, -pressi, -pres- patior, pati, passus sum, suffer, persum, crush.
mit, allow.
oppugno, -are, -avi, -atum, besiege. patria, -ae, f., native land, country.
LATIN -EN(;j.ISII
patrius,
-um,
-a,
a father, a
oj
f.,
pecunia, -ae,
little.
peace.
f .,
money.
In
pigritia, -ae,
pilum,
infantry.
tres copiae, infantry.
pulsum, rout,
f.,
Peloponnesus,
n., javelin.
-i,
plus, -a,
-um,
placeo,
-ere,
placidus, -a,
-I, f.,
the Peloponsouthern part of Greece,
called Morea.
win
-itum,
-ui,
please,
quiet, mild.
the favor of.
plaga, -ae,
now
planities, -ei,
-are,
-atum,
-avi,
enter,
penetrate.
perduco, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum,

lead through, carry.
-ficere,
-feci,
-fectum,
perlculum,
-i,
-um, dangerous.
n.,
danger, peril.
-um, skilful.
perniciosus, -a, -um, destructive.
perrumpo, -rumpere, -rupi, ruptum,
peritus, -a,
break through, force a passage.
n., fruit, orchard-fruit.
-i,
pono, ponere, posui, positum, place;

pitch.
pons, pontis, m., bridge.
populus,
porous,
-i,
porta, -ae,
porto,
m., people, nation.
m., pig.
-i,
f.,
-are,
gate.
-avi,
-atum,
possum, posse, potui, can, be

post, prep, with ace, after.
dat., persuade.
tum, alarm,
carry,
bring.
persuadeo, -suadere, -suasi, -sua-
sum, with
sum,
-licitus
-liceri,
Persa, -ae, m., a Persian.
perterred, -terrere, -terrui,
plures,
promise.
with castra,
accomplish.
perlculosus, -a,
pi. adj.,
more.
poeta, -ae, m., poet.
p5mum,
fer.
plain.
f.,
plus, pluris, n. (in
polliceor,
perfero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum, suf-
f.,
commons.
-um, full.
plebs, plebis,
pliira),
of.
blow.
f.,
plenus, -a,
with ace, through, by
per, prep,
finish,
devoted, devout, good.
-um, calm,
nese, the
perficio,
lazy.
laziness, idleness.
placo, -are, -avi, -atum, appease,
defeat.
means
quiver.
with dat.
peditatus, -us, in., infantry.

pello, pellere, pepuli,
f.,
-grum,
piger, -gra,
pedester, -tris, -tre, on foot; pedQS-
penetro,
is
beg, ask.
pharetra, -ae,
pedes, -ditis, m., foot soldier.

pi.,
ad
peto, petere, petivi, petitum, seek,
while.
paulo, with comparatives, a
pax, pacis,
of small islands,
pes, pedis, m., foot.
pauci, -ae, -a, few.

little
towns and
omitted,
father's, fatherly.
paulisper, a
299
able.
postea, afterwards.
-terri-
terrify.
pervenio, -venire, -veni, -ventum,
with ad and ace, arrive at, reach.

With domus, rus, names of
posterior,
mus,
-ius,
latter;
sup. postre-
on
the following
last.
postridie
eius diei,
day.
postulo, -are, -avi, -atum, demand.
VOCABULARY
300
pronuntio, -are, -avi, -atum, pro-
potens, -entis, ^powerful.

potestas, -tatis,
potior,
get or
prae,
gain possession
with
prep,
claim.
sum, with
-itus
-iri,
power.
f.,
abl.,
abl.,
propinquus, -a, -um, near, related;
of.
before,
in
comparison with.
praecedo, -cedere, -cessi, -cessum,
^
praeclarus, -a, -um, very famous.

f.,
place in
-fectum,
praesidium,
-i,
dat.
n.,
-esse, -fui, -futurus, be in
command
of,
saga-
girl.
dren
(the
boy; in
pi., chil-
general word;
chil-
-lis,
upon,
Sup. primus,
beauty.
strike.
Pythia, -ae,
of the
first.
-um,
f.,
purus, -a, -um, pure, clear.
m., leadership.
prior, prius, former.
privatus, -a,
liberi).
pulso, -are, -avi, -atum, beat, beat
princeps, -cipis, m., chief.
-um,
.,
pulchritudo, -dinis,
primus, see prior,
-a,
foreseeing,
-entis,
cious.
pugno, -are, -avi, -atum, fight.

pulcher, -chra, -chrum, beautiful.
with dat.
pretiosus, -a, -um, costly.

primum, adv., first.
principatus,
province.
dren of free parents are called
protection.
praesum,
f.,
puer, pueri, m.,
guard, garrison,
Sup. proxi-
-um, nearest, next.

-a, -um, gracious, kind.
puella, -ae,
reward.
-i, n.,
m.,
-i,
proximus, see propior.

priidens,
-feci,
command of, with
praemium,
-a,
provincia, -ae,
relate; praise.
-ficere,
propinquus,
propior, -ius, nearer.
propitius,
booty, prey.
praedico, -are, -avi, -atum, assert,
praeficio,
noun,
kinsman.
as
mus,
excel, surpass.
praeda, -ae,
prope, prep, with ace, near.
f.,
the Pythoness, title
priestess of
Apollo at
Delphi.
private.
privo, -are, -avi, -atum, deprive.
pro, prep, with abl., in
front
of,
before, for, in return for, in behalf

of.
proelium,
qua, by what way, where.

quaero, quaerere, quaesivi, quaesi-
n., battle.
profectio, -onis,
departure.
f.,
proficiscor, proficisci, prof ectus
sum,
progredior,
-gredi,
-gressus
sum,
prohibeo, -ere, -ui, -itum, hold or
keep back, check, prevent.

-icere,
throw before.
request.
hoiv, than.
quattuor, indeclinable, four.

-que, enclitic, and.
advance.
proicio,
tum, ask, inquire,
quam,
set out, go.
-ieci,
-iectum,
queror, queri, questus sum, complain.

qui, quae, quod,
that.
who, which, what,
LATIN -ENGLISH
301
-um, remaining,
quid, n., what.
reliquus,-a,
quidam, quaedam, quiddam (and

adj., quoddam), soitic, a reriain.
quis, quid, iiit err. who,^ ivhichf what?
remigro, -are, -avi,
quisquam, quicquam (quidquam),
repello, repellere, reppuli,
any, any one.
quidque
(adj.,
quodque), each, each one, every,

quo, whither, where,
what
to
place.
quod, because.
quoque,
7nove
back, return.
remus,
ni., oar.
-i,
repulsum,
repudio, -are, -avi, -atum,

res, rei,
reject.
thing, fact, matter;
f.,
publica, rei publicae,
everyone.
quot,
rest of.
drive back, repulse.
quaeque,
quisque,
-atum,
f.,
res
common-
wealth.
resisto, -sistere, -stiti, resist, with-
stand.
also.
how many.
retineo,
-tinere,
-tentum
-tinui,
keep back.
reverto,
-vertere,
-versum
-verti,
deponent, revertor, reverti,

reversus sum), return.
(also
rapto, raptare, raptavi,
carry
raptatum,
ratis, -is,
f.,
-ceptum, take
back, recover; with reflexive, se

recipere, retreat.
-atum, read aloud,
recito, -are, -avi,
-i,
ripa, -ae,
raft.
recipio, -cipere, -cepi,
recite.
recreo, -are, -avi, -atum, revive, re-
f.,
m., the river Rhine.

bank.
robur, -oris, n., oak; vigor.

robustus, -a, -um, strong, sturdy.
rogo, -are, -avi, -atum, ask.
Roma, -ae, f Rome.

Romanus, -a, -um, Roman. As
noun, Romanus, -i, m., a Roman.
.,
ros, roris, m., dew.
fresh.
reddo, -dere, -didi, -ditum, return^
rosa, -ae,
f.,
ruina, -ae,
give back.
reditio, -onis,
reduce,
rex, regis, m., king.
Rhenus,
off.
-ducere,
ruin.
rus, ruris, n., the country.
return.
f.,
rose.
f.,
-diixi,
-ductum,
bring or lead back.

refero,
referre,
rettuli,
pedem
bring back;
relatum,
referre,
sacer, -era, -crum, sacred, holy.
treat.
regina, -ae,
regio, -onis,
regius, -a,
regnum,
f.,
queen.
region, place.
f.,
-um,
-i, n.,
royal.
kingdom, throne.
relinquo, -linquere, -liqui, -lictum,

leave.
S.
re-
sacerdos, -dotis, m.
and
f.,
priest,
priestess.
saepe, often.
saevus, -a, -um,

sagitta, -ae,
f.,
fierce,
savage.
arrow.
salto, -are, -avi,
-atum, dance.
VOCABULARY
302
salus, -utis,
f.,
safety, safeguard.
similis, -e, like.
sano, -are, -avi, -atum, heal, cure.

sapientia, -ae,
satis,
wisdom.
f.,
sinistra, -ae,
scitum, know.
scribere,
scribo,
scriptum,
scripsi,
ivrite.
scutum,
n., shield.
i,
secundus,
-um,
-a,
prosperous,
situs, -a,
-um,
socius,
m., ally.
i,
sol, solis,
m., sun.
solus, -a,
-um,
soror, sororis,
spes, spei,
sed, hut.
f.,
sella, -ae,
f.,
sementis,
alone, only.
f.,
sister.
abode.
seat,
liant.
mag-
splendor, -oris, m., splendor,
seat.
sowing, seeding.
-is, f.,
hope.
f.,
splendidus, -a, -um, shining, bril-
.sixteen.
sedes, -is,
situated.
specto, -are, -avi, -atum, behold.
favorable.
sedecim,
-trum, kft; as noun,

f., the left hand.
sinister, -tra,
n., staff, sceptre.
scio, scire, scivi,
a time, sepa-
rate.
scelus, sceleris, n., crime.

-i,
abl., without.
singuli, -ae, -a, one at
n., rock.
sceptrum,
with
sine, prep,
enough, sufficiently.
saxum/-i,
simplex, -plicis, simple.
nificence.
semper, always.
(spons, spontis),
(only found in
f.
sempiternus, -a, -um, everlasting.
abl. sing., sponte), of one's
senatus, -us, m., senate.
accord; by oneself, alone.
senex,
m., old man.
-is,
sententia, -ae,
f.,
statim, immediately.
opinion.
statua, -ae,
statue.
f.,
separo, -are, -avi, -atum, separate.
Stella, -ae,
f.,
Sequana, -ae, m., the river Seine.

Sequanus, -i, m., a Sequariian.
sterilis, -e,
barren, unfruitful.
sequor, sequi, seciitus sum, follow.
stilus,
servatus, -a,
-um
(part, of servo),
saved, rescued.
servitiis, -litis, f., slavery.
servo, -are, -avi, -atum, save, preserve.
servus,
severus, -a, -um, stern,

sic, so, thus,
signa
-avi,
n.,
inferre,
-atum, show,
signal,
advance
wood,
with
the
to the
abl.,
forest.
-itum, undergo, en-
subito, suddenly.
standard.
(to
an
-i, n.,
reinforcements.
sui, of himself, herself, itself,

selves.
sum,
attack)
f.,
and
-ire, -ii,
subsidium,
-i,
silva, -ae,
of;
dure.
set forth.
signum,
barrenness.
style,
studium, eagerness, fondness.

sub, prep, with ace, under,
subeo,
strict.
in such a way.
-are,
significo,
f.,
a pointed instrument for writing on wax.

strenuus, -a, -um, active, busy.
m.,
-i,
under.
m., slave.
star.
sterilitas, -tatis,
foot
^
own
esse, fui, futCirus, be.
summus,
see superior.
them-
LATIN-ENGLISH
-um
superatus, -a,
(part, of supero),
303
-um,
tertius, -a,
third.
Teuton!, -orum,
ronqiured.
superior, -ius, higher, former; sup.
supremus and summus,
-a,
-um,
When applied to
summus often means
name
the
m. pi., Teutons,
Germanic tribe.
of a
timeo, -ere, -ui, fear.
highest, top of.
timidus, -a, -um, timid.
persons,
timor, -oris, m., fear, be afraid
supero, -are, -avi, -atum, conquer,
overcome,
pass
.surpass;
over,
dure.
toUo,
tollere,
sustuli,
sublatum,
raise, remove.
rise above.
suppliciter,
(of).
-atum, bear, en-
tolero, -are, -avi,
great.
like
petitioner,
sup-
totus, -a,
trado,
pliantly.
-atum, sup-
-avi,
sustento, -are,
-um, whole.
-dere,
-didi,
hand
-ditum,
over.
traduco, -ducere, -duxi, -ductum,
port.
sustineo,
-tinui,
-tinere,
-tentum,
lead across.
trans, prep, with ace, across.
withstand.
suus, -a, -um,
hisj
her,
hers, its,
transeo, -ire,
tristis, -e,
tum,
T.
f.,
tutela, -ae,
f.,
Tacitus,
m., Tacitus, a
tablet.
Roman
tutus, -a,
tuus,
historian.
you
(sing.).
then.
turris, -is,
tabula, -ae,
-a,
tower.
protection.
f.,
-um, protected, safe.

-um, thy, thine, your,
yours (sing.).
such.
talis, -e,
-itum, cross.
sad, gloomy.
tu, tui, thou,
-i,
-ii,
tripus, -odis, m., tripod.
their, theirs.
tarn, so.
tamen, nevertheless.
tantus, -a,
-um, so
taurus,
m., bull, ox.
telum,
-i,
-i, n.,
weapon, missile.
tempestas, -tatis,
templum,
U.
great.
-i, n.,
f.,
storm, tempest.
n., time, season.
teneo, tenere, tenui, tentum, hold.

tener,
-era,
-erum,
soft,
delicate,
tender.
tentorium,
terra,
-ae,
in pi.,
-i, n.,
f.,
tent.
earth, country, land;
sometimes =^/e world.
terribilis, -e, terrible.
uUus, -a, -um, any.

ulterior, -ius, farther; superlative,
temple.
tempus, temporis,
what place.
ubi, where, in
ultimus, -a, -um, farthest.
umquam,
ever.
unda, -ae, f., wave.

unde, whence, from what place.
undique, fro7n all sides, on all
unus, -a, -um, one, only.
urbs, urbis,
ursa, -ae,
f.,
f.,
city.
bear.
sides.
VOCABULAKY
304
usus, -us, m., use, advantage.
victima, -ae,
ut, that, in order that, so tlmt; as.
victor, -oris, m., victor.
uter, -tra, -trum,
utinam,
which
(of two),
would that! if only!

usus sum, with abl., use.
that!
utor, uti,
uxor, -oris,
victoria, -ae,
f.,
victory;
also Vic-
tory (the goddess of victory).
vicus,
m., village.
-i,
video, videre, vidi, visum, see.
wife.
f.,
sacrifice, victim.
i.,
vinco,
vincere, vici, victum, con-
quer, subdue.
vinculum,
V.
-i,
chain,
n.,
bond;
ex
vinculis, in chains.
vadum,
-i, n.,
vallum,
vinum,
ford.
-um,
validus, -a,
strong, powerful.
rampart.
-i, n.,
vasto, -are, -avi, -atum, lay waste.
vehemens,
velum,
violently, impetuously.
-onis,
f.,
f.,
f.,
courage.
force, violence,
hunt,
hunting
expedition.
vito,
f., life.
-are, -avi,
-atum, avoid,
scold.
-um,
vivus, -a,
ventus,
vix, scarcely, with difficulty.
verbum,
m., wind.
-I,
n.,
ence.
vaster,
votum,
m., Vergil.
-tra,
-trum,
your,
yours
vestimentum,
-i,
n.,
garment.
veto, vetare, vetui, vetitum, forbid.

f.,
-i, n.,
vox, vocis,
f.,
way, road.
f.,
will.
vow, prayer.
word, voice.
vulneratus, -a,
(plur.).
via, -ae,
voluntarius, -a, -um, voluntary.
voluntas, -tatis,
-i,
living.
volo, velle, volui, be willing, wish.
word.
vereor, -eri, -itus sum, fear, rever-
Vergilius,
es-
vitupero, -are, -avi, -atum, blame,
venio, venire, veni, ventum, come.

-i,
power;
in pi., vires, strength.
cape.
-i, n., sail.
venatio,
vis, (vis),
vita, -ae,
-entis, violent.
wine.
n.,
m., man.
virtus, -tutis,
vapor, -oris, m., exhalation, vapor.
vehementer,
-i,
vir, viri,
-um
(part, of vul-
nero), wounded.
vulnero, -are, -avi, -atum, wound.
vulnus, vulneris, n., wound.
ENGLISH-LATIN VOCABULARY.
The principal parts of verbs an be found by
EngUsh Vocabulary preceding this.
refer,
*<
army,
A.
nee to the Latin-
m.; army on
exercitus, -Us,
the march, dgmen, -minis, n.
about, de, prep, with abl.

accident, casus, -us,
ad
ace.,
across, trans, prep, with ace.
domus,
active, acer, acris, acre.
and
being
names
rus,
ask,
advantage, usus, -us, m.
assure, conjlrmo,
advice, consilium,
at, in,
n.
auxilium,
-i,
alarm, perterreo,
all,
omnis,
peto,
3;
postulo,
2.
f.
pi.
(verb),
attack (noun), impetus, -us,
m.
1;
1.
oppugno, 1
petum facere in, with ace.
im-
m.
attempt, condtus, -us, m.
alone, solus, -a, -um.

also,
1;
3.
prep, with abl.
attack
n.
-e.
ally, socius, -i,
rogo,
quaero,
Athens, Athenae, -drum,
advise, moneo, 2.
towns
of
of small islands.
advance, prdgredior, 3; advance to

an attack, slgna Inferre.
aid,
ad and
omitted with
arrive at, pervenio, 4, with
accordingly, itaque.
-i,
m.
arrival, adventus, -Us,
m.
avotd, fugid, 3.
quoque; and also, atque.
await, exspectd,
1.
altar, dra, -ae, f
always, semper.
ancestors, mdiores, -um,
and,
et,
and
atque, -que
also, atque;
animal, animal,
m.
and
not, neque.
-dlis, n.
announce, nuntio,
B.
pi.
(postpositive);
1.
bad, malus, -a, -um.
bank, rlpa,
-ae,
another, alius, -a, -ud.
battle, proelium,
any, ullus,
be,
-um.
approach (verb), appropinquo, 1.
approach (noun), aditus, -Us, m.
arm, armo, 1
arms, arma, -drum, n. pi.
20
-a,
f.
baggage, impedimenta, -drum, n.
sum,
-j, n.;
irr.
be at hand, adsum,
command
of,
be present, adsum,
305
irr.
praesum,
irr.
pi.
-ae,
irr.
be able, possum,
be in
pugna,
irr.
f.
VOCABULARY
306
be unwilling, nolo,
be willing, volo,
but,
irr.
autem (postpositive),
sed.
by, a, ah, prep, with abl,, or the
irr.
beautiful, pulcher, -chra, -cnrum.
abl. alone.
because, quod.
become,
fio, irr.
become accustomed, consuesco, 3.

before (of both place and time),
ante, prep,
with ace;
(of place
only often with the idea of defense), pro, prep, with abl.; (= in
the presence of), apud, prep,
with ace.
Caesar, Caesar, -aris, m.

call, appello, 1.
call
together, convoco, 1.
camp, castra, -drum,

can, possum, irr.
beg, peto, 3.
capture, capio, 3.
begin, incipid,3; in perfect tenses,
carefully, diligenter.
Carthage, Carthago, -ginis,
generally coepi, defective.

besiege, oppugno, 1.
-um; (adv.),
best (adj.), optimus, -a,
adj.), equester, -tris, -tre.
optime.
better (adj.), melior, -ius;
(adv.),
certain
(:= sure), certus, -a, -um;
(^
a certain), quldam, quaedam,

quiddam, and adj. quoddam.
melius.
inter, prep,
bloodshed, caedes,
with ace.
certainly, see 305.
-is, f.
body, corpus, corporis, n.
character, ndtura, -ae,
bold, audax, -acis.
chief, princeps, -cipis,
book,
both
liber, -bri,
.
bottom
and,
of,
m.
et
et.
Infimus, -a, -um.
brave, fortis,
m.
choose, deligo,
city, urbs, urhis,
client, cliens, -entis,
bring away, defero,
cohort, cohors, -hortis,
bring on, Infero,
redded, 3.
irr.
to, adfero, irr.
bring to pass,
come, venio,
pi.
m.
break camp, castra movere.

irr.;
{oi
m.
bravely, see 305.
bring back, refer 6,
m.
3.
Cicero, Cicero, -onis,
irr.
pi.;
free parents), liberi, -drum,
citizen, civis, -is,
-e.
f.
m.
-drum, m.
children, pueri,
'
boy, puer, pueri,
bring
f.
m.
cavalry, equitatus, -us, m, the plural
of eques, -itis, m., horseman; (as
Catiline, Catilina, -ae,
believe, credo, 3.
between,
n. pi.
f.
m.
f.
4.
come together, convenio, 4.

command, impero, 1 iubed, 2.
common, communis, -e.
commons, plebs, plebis, f
commonwealth, res pUblica,
;
efficid, 3.
broad, lafus, -a, -um..
bridge, pons, pontis,
m.
m.
building, aedificium,
-I,
brother, frater, fratris,
n.
piiblicae,
f.
compel, cogo,
3.
ret
KNGLlSIl- LATIN
complain, queror,
determine, constituo,
3.
complete, conftcid, 3.
conference, colloquium,
confidence, fides,
dew,
Corinth, Corinthus,
council, concilium,
direction, pars, partis, f

disaster, calamitas, -talis, f .
-I, f .
m.
consul, consul, -ulis,
-l,
counsel, consilium,
ditch, /ossa, -ae, f
down from,
n.
-,
division), terra,
~ae,
land), pafria, -ae,
f.
crime, seel us,
-utis,
f.;
draw up,
de, prep,
dwell, incolo, 3
habito, 1.
E.
f.
-eris, n.
each,
qiiisque,
and
crush, opprimo, 3.
m.
Cures, Cures, -turn,
quaeque,
easily, facile.
pi.
easy, facilis,
cut
embassy,
intercludo, 3.
-e.
legatio, -onis, f .
empire, imperium,
-i,
encourage, cohortor,
end
of,
enemy
danger, perlculum,
-i,
filia, -ae, f
day, dies,
-el,
daybreak,
at,
death, mors, mortis,
demand,
f.
satis.
equestrian, equester,
-tris, -tre.
umquam.
quidque, and adj. quodque.

exchange, inter se dare.
m.
eye, oculus,
-I,
m.
pos^wZo, 1.
departure, profectio, -onis,
F.
f.
deprive, prlvo, 1.
desist, desisto, 3.
fact, res, rel,
despair of, despiro, 1.
fall,
destroy,
famous, clarus,
rfeZeo, 2.
m.;
every, omnis, -e; quisque, quaeque,
-um.
defender, defensor, -oris,
-i,
m. (gener-
ally in pL).
ever,
f.
defend, dejendo, 3.
delay, moror,
(personal), inimlcus,
enough,
abl.
decide, constituo, 3.
aZîiS, -a,
extremus, -a, -um.
enjoy, fruor, 3.
m. and f.
prima luce,
n.
1.
(public), hostis, -is,
n.
dare, audeo, 2, semi-deponent,
daughter,
quidque,
adj. quodque.
custom, mos, moris, m.
deep,
with abl.
Instruo, 3.
(native
cross, transeo, 4, irr.
off,
do, facio, 3.
n.
country (as disting;uished froai tlie

city), rus, runs, n.; (geographic il
courage, vijius,
3.
rons, m.
difficult, difficilis, -e.
vinco, 3.
1,
7'os,
die, morior, irr.
n.
-i,
-el, f,
conquer, supci'o,
307
cado,
f.
3.
-a,
-um.
VOCABULARY
508
and wide,
far (adv.), longe; far
late.
farther, illterior, -ius; (adv.), longi-
us; farthest, illtimus, -a,
-um
m.
favor, beneficium,
n.
-i,
-oi'is,
frien(^,
-a.
m.
amicus,
m.
-I,
friendship, amicitia, -ae,
from,
m.
field, ager, agrl,
f.
friendly, amicus, -a, -um.
2.
few, panel, -ae,
libertas, -talis,
frequent, creber, -bra, -brum.
(noun), metus, -us, m.; timor,
fear
free (adj.), liber, -era, -erum.

free (verb), llbero, 1.
freedom,
(adv.), longissirne.
father, pater, patris,
fear (verb)', timed,
four, quattuor.
a,
ab;
e,
ex; de, preps, with
abl.
flee, jugio, 3.
fleet, classis, -is,
f.
flight, fuga, -ac,
f.;
fugam
flower,
fight,
flight,
in
Gaul (the country), Gallia,
fldris,
-fios,
pugno,
fill, fill
put to
dare.
m.
(a Gaul), Gallus,
gain possession
1.
first,
primus,
-um.
garrison, praesidium,
find, invenio, 4.
-um.
-a,
follow, sequor, 3.
foot, pes, pedis,
f.;
of, potior, 4.
Gallic, Gallicus, -a,
up, compleo, 2.
-ae,
m.
-I,
gate, porta, -ae,
f.
gather, confero,
irr.
-i,
n.
general (noun), imperdtor, -oris, m.
m.
footsoldier, pedes, -ditis,
m.
general (adj.), communis,
-e.
German, Germdnus, -a, -um.

pro, prep, with abl., or the dative Germany, Germdnia, -ae, f.
to denote aim or get possession of, potior, 4.
case alone
for (prep.),
meaning
" in behalf of,"
purpose, ad, prep, with ace.; to
girl,
puella, -ae,
denote direction, ad or in with give, do,

go, ed,
ace.
for
enim (postpositive), go
(conj.),
nam.
go
1,
irr.
irr.
out, exed,
irr.
to, aded, irr.
m.
forbid, veto, 1, irr.
god, deus,
force, vls^ (vis),
goddess, dea, -ae,
forced march,
f.
magnum
forces, eopiae, -arum,
f.
ille, -a,
-ud.
munio,
found, rondo,
4.
3.
f.
-a, -um,.
grain, frumentum,
pi.
-I,
n.
mdgnus, -a, -um; (of persons)

often summus, -a, -um.
the former,
great number, multitudd, -dinis, f.
fortification, munltio, -onis,

fortify,
good, bonvs,
great,
forest, silva, -ae, f
former, prior, prius
iter, n.
-I,
f.
greater, mdior, -ius.
greatness, mdgnitudd, -dinis,
guide, dux, ducis, m.
309
ENGLlSll-LATIN
hostage, obses, obsidis, m.
H.
hostile, inimlcus, -a,
-um.
halt, consist o, 3.
how (with adjs. and ad vs.), quam.

how long, quam diu.
how many, quot.
hasten, contendo, 3
huge, ingens, -gentis.
way
-um in
half
up, in with medius,
the abl.
have, habed,
he,
-a,
2.
is, eius.
head, caput, capitis, n.

habit, consuetudd, -dinis,
hand, vianus, -us,
hand
f.
f.
I,
over, trado, 3.
happen, accido, 3 fw,

;
in, in,
help (verb), adsmn,
Helvetian, Helvetius,
hem in, contineo,
prep, with abl.
n.
in order to, ut,

-i, ni.
in
-um;
sic.
infantry, peditatus, -us, m., also the

.
pi. of
higher, altior, -ius; superior, -ius.

highest, altissim,us, -a,
-um; sum-
pedes, peditis, m., footsoldier.
inform, certiorem facere; doceo,

influence, auetoritas, -tdtis,
injure, noceo, 2.
-um.
inquire, cpiaero, 3.
m,
it, is,
hinder, impedio, 4.
hindrance, impedimentum,,
-um;
-I,
n.
its,
eius.
en, id.
Italy, Italia, -ac,
f.
suus, -a, -um; eius.
hither, hue.
hold, teneo, 2; habed, 2.
hold back, prohibed,
home, domus,
2.
J.
-its, f
hope, spes, spel,
javelin, pllum,
f.
horse, equus, equi,
m.
-equitis,
-l,
n.
join, committo, 3.
horn, cornu, -Us, n.
horseman, eques,
with
ace.
high, alius, -a, -um.
his, suus, -a,
such a way,
in the presence of, apud, prep,
eius,
hither) hue.
hesitate, dubito, 1
hill, collis, -is,
with subjunctive.
with abl.
in return for, pro, prep,

2.
her, hers, suus, -a,
-a,
305.
(with the idea of defence), pro,

-i,
hence, hinc.
mus,
prep, with abl.
in front of, ante, prep, with ace.
irr.
help (noun), auxilium,
-um.
-e.
height, altitudo, -dinis,
; (
mei.
impetuously, see
heavily, see 305.
here, hic
immediately, statim.
hear, audio, 4.
heavy, gravis,
ego
illustrious, clarus, -a,
irr.
journey,
m.
iter, itineris, n.
Jupiter, luppiter, lovis,
m.
2.
VOCAEULAKY
310
K.
length, longitudo, -dims,

less
keep back
(of defence), prohibeo,
(of restraint), retineo, 2.
-arum,
lieutenant, Icgatus,
-i,
light, lux, lucis,
n.
king, rex, regis, m.

kingdom, regnum, -l, n.
knight, cques, -itis, m.
know, scio, 4 not know,
;
(adv.)^
-i,
pi.
f.
liberty, llhertas, -tatis,
interfield, 3.
kindness, heneficium,
f.
-us;
minus.
letter, litterae,
keen, acer,Mcris, acre.

kill,
minor,
(adj.),
f.
m.
f.
like, similis, -e.
line of battle, acies, -el, f
parvus,
little,
ncscio, 4.
-a,
-um;
little
(with comparatives), paulo.

live (dwell), habito, 1.
living, vlvus, -a,
long
L.
(of
-um.
time),
space),
(of
diil;
longus, -a, -um.
lack (verb), careo,
2.
lack (noun), inopia, -ae,
language, lingua, -ae,

large,
mdgnus,
low, humilis,
f.
lower.
f.
-ius;
lowest,
In-
fimus and imus, -a, -um.
-um.
-a,
-e.
Inferior,
postremus, -a, -urn.
last,
Latin, Latlnus, -a, -um.

latter, (posterior, -ius)
the latter,
hlc, haec, hoc.
law,
lex, legis, f
make, facio, irr.

man, vir, virl, m.; homo, hominis,
m. and f.
manage, gero, 3.
manner, modus, -I, m.
many, multl, -ae, -a.
lay waste, vasto, 1.

lead, diwo, 3.
lead across, tradUco, 3.

lead away, deduco, 3.
lead back, reduco, 3.
lead from, deduco, 3.
march (verb),
march (noun),
lead out, educo, 3.

leader, dux,
duds, m.
leadership, principatus, -us,
m.
learn (a lesson), disco, 3; (a fact),
cogndsco,
least
minimus,
minime.
leave, relinquo, 3.
leave
off, intermittd, 3.
left, sinister, -tra,
iter, itineris,
marsh, palus, -udis,

matter, res,
-trum.
legion, legio, -onis,
f.
-a,
-um
meet, convenio,
1.
4.
meeting, concilium,
message,
messenger,
n.
f.
ret, f
meditate, cogito,
3.
(adj.),
(adv.),
iter facere.
-I,
n.
,.
nuntius, -i,m..
mile, mllle
passuum.
passus, m.,
pi.
7nllia
KXULISU-LATIN
command, imperium,
mind, animus, -i, m.
mine, mens, -a, -um.
military
mischief, iniuria, -ae,
n.
-I,
311
no, nullus, -a, -um.
no one, nemo, (neminis), m.
and
gen.
and
f.
niillo respectively,
misfortune, casus, -us, m.
not, non.
missile, telum,
not know, nescio,
n.
-i,
money, pecunia, -ae, f.

more (noun), plus, pluris,
(adj.),
plura;
plures,
not wish, nolo,

n,;
(adv.),
plurimus,
(adj.),
(adv.),
-a,
maxime.
mother, mater, mdtris,
mound,
4.
irr.
notice, animadverto, 3.
nothing, nihil, indeclinable.

nor, neque, nee.
tnagis.
most
For
abl. sing., use nullius
agger, aggeris,
-um; now, iam, nunc.

number, numerus,
-I,
m.
i.
m,
mountain, mons, montis, m.

move, moved, 2.
much
multus,
(adj.),
(adv.),
multum
-um;
-a,
(with compar-
atives), multo.
man,
senex, senis, m.
mdior ndtu.
on, in, prep, with abl.
on all sides, undique.
on the following day, postrldie eius
old
-um.
-a,
2.
often, saepe.
multitude, multitudo, -dinis,
my, meus,
obey, pared,
older,
N.
diet.
name, nomen,
one, unus, -a, -um.
-inis, n.
narrow, angustus,
-a,
only, solus, -a, -um.
-um.
native land, patria, -ae,
opinion, sententia, -ae,
f.
near, ad, apud, prope, preps, with
mus,
-a,
-um.
nor, neque
neque; nee
alter,
numquam.
-tera,
-ierum;
other (of several), reliquus,
-um, and
(ceterus), -a,
ought, debeo,
nee.
never,
other, alius, -a, -um; the other (of
two),
neither, neuter, -tra, -trum; neither

.
f.
2.
order (noun), ordo, -dinis, m.
ace.
nearer, propior, -ius; nearest, proxi-
order (verb), iuheo,
the
-a,
-um.
2.
our, ours, noster, -tra, -trum.
or ex, prep, with abl.
nevertheless, tamen.
out
new, novus,
outer, exterior, -ius; outmost, extre-
-um.
next, proximus, -a, -um.
night,
nox,
noctu.
-a,
noctis,
f.;
by
night,
of, e
mus, -a, -um.

overcome, supero,
owe, debeo,
2.
1.
VOCABULARY
312
Omit ad with domus,

of
pace, passus, -us,
m.
part, pars, partis, f
peace, pax, pads,

peril,
perlculum,
f.
-i,
(men), homines, -um, m.
m.;
pi.
-i,
place (verb), coUoco,
1;
command,
plan, cdnsilium,
m.
pond,
and
n.
-a,
resist, resistd, 3.
restrain, contined, 2.
and
-um.
f.
pedem referre.
come back), revertd
power, potestds,
-talis, f.
revertor,
reddd,
3;
(give
right (adj.)> dexter, -tra, -trum,
praise (verb), laudd, 1.

praise (noun), Zoms, laudis,
-<era, -terum.
f.
right (noun), iws, iwris, n.
irr.
prepare, prepare for, pard,
river, flumen, -minis, n.
1.
rob, despolid, 1.
1.
promise, polliceor,
Roman, Rdmdnus, -a, -um.

Rome, Rdma, -ae, f.
m.
2.
rout, peZZo, 3.
protect, defendd, 3.
protection, praesidium,
-i,
n.; /ic^cs,
-el, f
province, prdvincia, -ae,
pursue, Insequor,
put to
flight, irt
S.
3.
fugam
back)
3.
reward, praemium, -I, n.

Rhine, Rhenus, -I, m.
-entis.
-I,
n.
retreat, se recipere;
m.
prisoner, captlvus,
-i,
deferd, irr.
f.
return (go or
powerful, potens,
names
request, quaerd, 3.
3.
n.
-l,
-el, f
preserve, servo,
remain, maned, 2.
remaining, reliquus,
remove, tolld, 3.
praeficid, 3.
poet, poeta, -ae,
prefer, ?/ia/o,
reputation, oplnid, -dnis,
please, placed, 3.
pledge, fides,
-i,
report, adferd
pitch, pond, 3.
place (noun), locus,

place in
redoubt, castellum,
region, regid, -dnis,
reinforcements, suhsidium,
n.
persuade, persuaded, 2.
people (nation), populus,
plain, pldnities, -el,
rus,
of small islands,
receive, accipid, 3.
-i,
towns and
dare.
'
t sa/ws, -wîs,
safety,
j
same, Idem, eadem, idem.
R.
save, serro, 1.
say, died, 3.
mx.
raise, toZZo, 3.
scarcely,
rampart, vallum, -I, n.

rank, orc?o, -dinis, m.
scout, expldrator, -oris,
reach, pervenid, 4, with ad
sea, mare, -is, n.
and
ace.
see, rideo, 2.
m.
f.
and
ENGLISH -LATIN
313
seek, peto, 3.
standard, slgnum,
seize, occupo, 1.
state, clvitas, -talis, f
-um;
self, ipse, -a,
station, constitud, 3.
sul.
m.
send, mitto, 3; send away,
service, munus, -eris, n.
set on fire, incendo, 3.
senate, senatus, -us,
stay,
dlmitto, 3.
and
severely, see
-ia.
nudo,
3.
talis, -e.
suffer, perfero,
ir'r.;
(with disaster),
305.
sufficiently, satis.
sharp, acer, dcris, acre.
suitable, idoneus, -a,
sharply, see 305.

she, ea; eius.
summer,
sun,
shield, scutum,
supplies, commedtus,
-i,
ship, navis, -is, f
short, brevis,
f . pi.
1.
accipio, 3.
-e.
2.
subdue, vinco,
such,
several, complures, -a
maneo,
strength, vires, -ium,

strip,
set out, proficlscor, 3.
severe, gravis,
n.
-I,
n.
sol, solis,
suppose, credo,
-e.
m.
supply, copia, -ae,
-um.
aestds, -talis, f
-tils,
3.
shout, clamor, -oris, m.
surround, circumvenio, 4.
show, ostendo,
swift, celer, ceteris, celere.
3; doceo, 2.
swiftness, celeritds, -tdtis,
side, latus, lateris, n.
signal,
slgnum,
-i,
sword, gladius,
n.
m.
f.
-I,
f.
m.
sister, soror, sororis, f
size,
magnitUdo, -dinis,
slaughter, caedes,
slave, servus,
-%,
-is,
f.
T.
t.
m.
slavery, servitUs, -tutis,
take, capio, 3; (by storm), expu^no,
f.
1.
slay, interficid, 3.
slender, gracilis,
teach, doceo, 2.
-e.
small, parvus, -a, -um.
tell,
smaller, minor, minus.
tenth, decimus, -a, -um.
so, tam, ita.
terms, condicidnes, -um,
so great, tantus, -a, -um.
terrify, perterred, 2.
soldier, miles, -itis,
m.
-I,
m.
pi.
m.
pi.
than, quam.
that (dem. pron.),
sortie, eruptio, -onis,
f.
-a,
f.
sovereignty, imperium,
spur, calcar, -aris, n.
thank, return thanks, grdtids agere.
soon, mox.
speech, oratio, -onis,
territory or territories, fines, -ium,
some, aliquis ; quidam ; nonnulli.

someone, aliquis ; quidam.
son, fllius,
died, 3.
-I,
n.
-ud;
(rel.
is, ea,
id;
quod.
that
(coiij.), ut;
that of yours,
ille,
pron.), qui, quae,
that
not, ne.
isle, ista, istud.
VOCABULARY
314
the great, the well
following the
which
it
venture, awrfed, 2.
agrees.
their, suus, -a,
V.
known, ills, ilia,

word with
illud,
-um
eorum, earum.
Vergil, Vergilius,
-i,
violence, vis, (vis),
then, turn.
f.
voice, vox, vocis, f
thence, inde.
there (in that place), ibi; (to that
place), eo.
W.
therefore, itaque.
thing, res, ret,
think, -puto,
wage,
think about, cogito,

this,
Mc, haec, hoc.
throw, iacio, 3; conicio, 3.

time, tempus, temporis, n,
tired, defessus, -a,
-um.
foot of, sub, prep, with ace.
m.
summus,
-a,
-i,
tribe, gens, gentis,
what
(rel.),
qui,
which
quod;
place),
ubi;
place), quo.
(rel.),
(interr.)
f.
two,
f.
quae,
(interr.), quis, quid.
n.
troops, copiae, -drum,

trusty, certus, -a,
-um.
whether, num, -ne.
-um.
-is, f .
town, oppidum,
-a,
fled, 2.
(to what
eras.
tower, turris,
weep,
n.
whence, unde.
where (= in what
to-day, hodie.
toil, labor, -oris,
-I,
wearied, defessus,
well, bene.
in or ad, preps, with ace; to the
top of,
way, via, -ae, f

weapon, telum,
through, per, prep, with ace.
to-morrow,
m.
-I,
war, bellum, -i, n.

water, aqua, -ae, f.
1.
thither, eo.
to,
gero, 3.
wall, murus,
1.
pi.
qui,
quae,
quid
quod;
which
of
uter, -tra, -trum.
whither, quo.
who (rel.),
-um.
quis,
qui, quae, quod; (interr
),
quis, quid.
try, Conor, 1.
whole,
why,
totus, -a,
-um.
cUr.
wide, latus, -a, -um.
U.
widely,
wing
understand, intellego,
3.
unfavorable, inlquus,
-a,
unlike,
urge, hortor,
late.
(of
an army), cornu,
winter, hiems, hiemis,
-um.
-Us, n.
winter-quarters, hlberna, -drum, n.

pi.
wish, void,
1.
use (verb), Môr,
3.
use (noun), usus, -us, m.
ITT.
with, cum, prep, with abl., or abl.

alone.
ENGI.ISU-LATIN
315
with difficulty, aegre, vix.

withdraw, disccdo, 3.
without, sine, prep, with ubl.
year, annus,
withstand, sustineo,
2.
yesterday, herl.
woman, fcmina, -ae,
f.
wonderful, nnrahiHs,
you,
word, v6x, vocis, f.

work, opus, operis, n.
write, scribo, 3.
m.
tu, tul; (pi.) vos, vestrl
and vestrum.
younger, minor nalu.
young man, youth,
-entis, m.
-e.
would rather, mfilo, irr.

would that, utinam.
wound, vulnus, vulneris,
(sinji;.)
-i,
your, yours, (sing)

n.
(pi.) vester, -tra,
adulescens,
tuus, -a,
-trum.
-um;
INDEX.
The numbers
Ablative absolute, 438; participle
omitted
part,
accompaniment,
441;
in,
pres.
443;
in,
53,
refer to sections.
icate,
verb with subject,
70;
63; pronouns, 225, 240, 244.

Aliqiiis, 248.
agent and means, 57, 148,

151; comparison, 199, 201; de-
Alphabet,
gree
Alter, 263, 267, 268, 271.
,57;
of
English
manner,
218,
difference,
equivalents
134, 137;
220;
49;
of,
means
or in-
strument, 53, 57; place where,

53, 57; with prepositions, 53;
quality, 503;
time when,
separation, 509;
direct
500;
end of motion,
object, 24;
143.
Adiuvo, A84l.
193-199;
com-
denoting
part, 212; first
and second
clensions,
irregular,
29;
comparison
declension,
of,
188;
de-
defective, 211; degrees of, 193;
263;
-cr,
203;
in,
use of
of,
comparison of adjectives
197;
tives in
maxime,
compari-
148,
151;
irregular, 205;
-lis,
dative,
456, 462.
Agreement, attributive, 82; pred-
adjec-
by magis and
by minus and
203;
216;
minime, 217.
Complementary
infinitive,
distinguished
ular, 308: of place, 493.

abl.
395; in third person,
negative, 464.
Comparative,, formation, 194.

Comparison, abl. of, 199, 201;
son, 306; formation, 304; irreg-
Agent,
Clauses, to distinguish, 523.
endings, 28.
Adverbs, defined, 303;
16.
Celer, declined, 189.
463;
Adjectives, agreement, 33;
third
Base, 21.
Commands,
Ad, use, 140.
-lis,
10.
Apposition, 82, 87, 89.

Attributive agreement, 82.
Case-endings,
double,
Accusative,
in
Antepenult,
Case, 15.
11.
parison,
1.
with utor,
53, 57;
etc., 488.
Accent,
Alius, 263, 267, 268, 271.
clause, 417.
Conjugations, 65.
Conjunctions, 498.
from
373;
purpose
INDEX
318
Consonants,
Copula,
Flo, 376.
2, 8.
70.
conjunction,
i'mn,
uses,
490;
meaning, 491.
Cum, preposition, caution about,
Fourth Declension, 274, 276.

From, how expressed, 133.
Future, meaning and formation,
passive, 155.
89;
Future participle, 448, 450.

Future perfect, meaning and
54.
Dative of agent, 456, 462; Eng-
for-
mation, 127; passive, 177.
lish equivalent for, 43; indirect
object,
47;
possessor,
507;
with prepositional compounds,

484, 487; with special verbs,
483,487; service (purpose), 505.
Dea,
Gender, 18;
English
Genitive,
Declension, defined, 74,
Gerund, 422.
Declensions, 17.
Gerundive, 425.
Dependent clauses, 345.

Degree of difference, ablative
of,
218, 220.
quality,
special uses,
Hlc, declined, 228;

233.
Eiems, 123.
Delccto, 484.
Demonstrative
pronouns,
228,
Idem, 260.
231.
Dens, declined, 320.
Diphthongs,
6.
317.
Duo, declined, 288.

Duration and extent, 283, 286.
Ille,
Imperative,
verbs,
irregular
translation,
400;
use, 401.
meaning
tense,
formation
E6, 391.
83;
End
passive,
Comparison of adjs. in, 197.

nouns of decl. II, 70; decl.
396;
395,
398;
Imperfect
of motion, 143.
special uses,
declined, 231;
233.
Ego, 222.
-cr,
equivalents,
general rule, 40;
36;
503; of noms. in -ins, 78.
78.
Domus,
for third de-
rules
clension, 326, 327.
the
in
subjunctive,
sum,
153;
and
indicative,
353,
357;
85;
tense
sign, 83.
-cr,
In, use, 139, 140.
Ill, 120.
Indefinite pronouns, 248.
Indirect discourse, 405, 413.
Fearing, subjunctive after verbs

of, 480.
Fero, 384, 386.
Fifth Declension, 281.

Filia, 78.
Indirect object, 47.

Indirect
tense
questions,
rule,
369;
361,
365;
contrasted
with indirect statements, 419.

complementary, 373;
Infinitive,
INDEX
from
distinguished
417;
clause,
409;
tense,
purpose
Nolo, 372.
formation,
403;
Nonne,
uses,
405;
Nullus, 263.
404,
20.
Num., 388.
verbs taking, 337.
Instrument,
319
Numerals, 288-301.
abl. of, 53, 57.
Intensive pronoun, 251, 254.
Interrogative pronouns, 245.

-id,
verbs
Object, direct, 24;
indirect, 47.
Optative subjunctive, 466.
in, 181.
Order, Latin, 511.
Ipse, 251, 254.

Is, 222.
Paradigm, defined,
Iste, 259.
i-stems,
184;
164,
184,
mixed,
186;
Participle,
neuters, 186.
64.
Part, adjectives denoting, 212.

defined,
forma-
427;
Iter, 323.
tion of present, 428; present p.
luheo, 484.
of
luppiter, declined, 325.

-ius,
gen.
and
voc. of
words
in,
eo, 434; use of present, 430;

agreement, 432; perfect, 436;
future, 448, 450; formation of
perfect
78.
passive,
169;
transla-
tion, 445.
Letters, sounds of, 2-4,
6,
8.
Passive,
Liquid stems, 119.

Locative, 311.
Long vowels,
magis
and
3,
12.
maxime,
endings,
176;
person
177;
145.
tense,
meaning,
106;
in-
dicative, 108; passive, 168; per-
fect
abl. of, 53, 57, 148.
Mllle, declension
and
and
minime,
use, 2^8.
comparison
passive participle,
169.
Periphrastic conjugations, meaning,
450,
by, 217.
Mixed
perfect,
stem, 107; endings in the
abl. of, 134, 137.
mare, 186.
minus
pluperfect,
168;
Perfect
MaJo, 372.
Means,
fect,
Penult, 10.
by, 216.
Manner,
future, 155; per-
future
comparison
im-
present, 146;
144;
perfect, 153;
449;
452;
first
periphrastic,
second periphrastic,
454, 457, 460.
i-stems, 184.
Personal pronouns, 222, 223.
Nasal stems,
Person-endings
123.
Nego, use, 414.
160.
the
present,
Peto, 501.
Place, abl. of, 53, 57; adverbs of,
Neuter, 263.
Neuters,
of
60; of the passive, 145.
-ne, 25.
third
declension,
159,
493;
various
312, 315.
expressions
of,
INDEX
320
meaning and forma-
Pluperfect,
Phis,
with,
cases
declined, 206;
Quis, 245.
Qiiisque, 248.
passive, 170.
tion, 114;
207.
Reflexive pronoun, 253, 254.
Possessive of the
third
person,
235.
Relative pronoun, 238;
transla-
tion, 239, 517; use, 240, 244.
Possessive pronouns, 234-235.

Possessor, dat. of, 507.
Possum, 332, 334, 336, 343.
,Senex, 321.
Postulo, 501.
Sentences,
Predicate agreement, 70, 73.
with the
Prepositions, 131;
plex,
abl.,
ings of present tense,
active,
broken,
514;
Sequence of tenses, 496.

Service, dat. of, 505.
Short vowels,
65; passive, 146; stem, 105.

Principal clauses, 345.
Solus, 263.
Principal parts, 41, 170.
Stem
how
Prohibitions, 464.
Pronouns, agreement
demonstrative, 22S,
interrogative,
sonal,
245;
225;
in-
251,
per-
possessive,
223;
222,
234-235;
of,
231;
intensive,
248;
definite,
253,
reflexive,
254;
Pronunciation,
Purpose, dat.
505; various ex-
pressions of, 474;
substantive
Subject,
declension,
98;
in nouns, 103.
65.
English
in
24;
and
Latin, 14; omitted, 34.

Su])junctive,
present,
and
340;
341;
possum,
formation of
present of sum
343;
meaning,
of
sum and possum, 357; tense
in English,
rules, 355, 368, 369, 496;
clauses
fect
of,
and pluperfect, 366;
sult, 378-381;
477.
in
perre-
wishes, 466;
after verbs of fearing, 480.

Suliordinate clauses, 495-498.
Substantive clauses of purpose,
Qvaero, 501.
Quality, abl. and gen. of, 503.
Quantity, rules
Questions,
third
know
pose, 347, 350; imperfect, 353;
1-12.
of,
in
to
Stem -vowel,
12.
3,
345; hortatory, 346, 350; pur-
relative, 238-240, 244.
351;
long,
510.
Separation, abl. of, 509.
132.
Present, person-endings, 60; end-
254;
compound and com-
513;
of,
direct,
'
indirect, 361, 365.
25,
477.
Sui,
12.
26,
388;
253,
254;
in
indirect
course, 415.
Snh, use, 139, 140.
Qui, 238.
Sum,
Quldam, 248
Superlative, formation, 196.
69, 70, 85, 94, 343.
dis-
INDEX
Supine, defined, 4G9; accusative,
470; ablative, 472.
Time,
abl. of, 53, 57.
Totus, 263.
^Suus, use, 235.
-tr-
Syllables, division into, lOj long
and short,
321
stems
third
in
declension,
120.
Trcs, declined, 288.
3, 12.
Tfi,
222.
Tense, defined, 83.

Tenses,
classification,
495;
se-
quence, 496.
Than,
That,
how expressed, 199.

how expressed, 242.
IJtius,
-io,
181.
declension,
nouns,
99;
99;
classes
consonant
mute stems,
100;
stems, 119; stems in
of
stems,
liquid
-tr-,
120;
-r-stems with nominatives in

-s,
120;
neuters,
ease
endings
i-stems,
184;
nasal
general
164;
i-stems,
263.
Uter, 263.
Third conjugation, verbs in

Third
Ullus, 263.
TJUima, 10.
Verb, agreement, 63; endings

60; stem, 65.
Veto, 484.
Pts, declined, 319.
Vocative, 59;
nouns
123;
Tir, declined, 76.
rule,
159;
YoJo, 372.
neuters,
gender rules, 326, 327.
in
-us
and
-IMS, 78.
stems,
and stem, 160;

mixed t-stems,
of,
Vowels, sounds
short, 3, 12.
186;
Wishes, 466.
of,
4;
long and
Da4 bue
BOSTON UNIVERSITY
1719 02753 7408

Beginning Latin 00 Bars

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Beginning Latin 00 Bars

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

.

G1LJ)ERSLEEV R- LODGE LA TIN SERIES

LATIN MASTER IN THE HOTCHKISS SCHOOL

College of Liberal Arts

UNIVERSITY PUBLISHINCI COMPANY

UNIVERSITY PUBLISHING COMPANY

dedicated to teachers of Latin

the importance of first-year work.

mastery of forms; second, the

nucleus of a working vocabulary; third, a grasp of the broad

book has been guided by the modern

belief that the acquisition of facts should be

activity at every point of advance.

detailed application of this principle of expression

fully exemplified in the treatment of forms.

of the various elements are explained,

and very many sim-

ple exercises in the building of paradigms introduced.

found to give a conscious mastery of inflections in

In the case of the verb, the person-endings are

attacked, interlinear exercises being given in which

of the verb except the

Next, the present

tenses of the four conjugations are exhibited together, and

which focus the attention on the stem-

of the other tenses

incidental result being that the pupil

acquiring a feeling that only the

and that the other conjugations are

In order to render this method prac-

forms at the end have been for the

ticable, the tables of

Here, as elsewhere, experience has been the guide, but a

the assumption that English-Latin exercises are inherently

than Latin-English would seem to involve a

exercise on the practical use of forms, and which does not

contain difficult and complicated syntax, presents to the

has, for the

distinct advantage over the Latin-English exercise

and written work for the study hour

same principles and vocabulary

sons which correspond

not intended that their preparation should be required in

well look them over, and test their preparation by

increased, in order that in his translation

work the pupil

benefit by the teacher's instant correction of

suggestions regarding methods of attacking the

a Latin Reading Lesson.

narratives contained in the

are taken, with the kind permission of their author

the ^^Lateinische FibeF'' of Professor Dr.

vocabularies of the lessons proper are almost entirely

confined to about five hundred of the commonest words in

both special and

vocabularies of the Reading Lessons are less restricted in

and are given only

in the General Vocabulary;

and, while the interest of their content makes

remember, provision for a vocabulary drill has been

The Eeading Lessons

XL, together with

XCII-XCV, are designed as an introduction to Caesar.

sons, all or part of